Toshiba Projector ML3054 User Manual
User’s Manual  
Qosmio F50 Series  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Qosmio F50  
Utilities and Applications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16  
Optinal accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20  
Chapter 2 The Grand Tour  
Front with the display closed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1  
Left side. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3  
Right side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4  
Back. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5  
Underside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8  
Front with the display open. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9  
System indicators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12  
Optical disc drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14  
AC adaptor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16  
Chapter 3 Getting Started  
Connecting the AC adaptor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2  
Opening the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5  
Turning on the power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6  
Starting up for the first time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7  
Turning off the power. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7  
Restarting the computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11  
System Recovery Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12  
System Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12  
Chapter 4 Operating Basics  
Using the Touch Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1  
AV Controller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2  
Using the Fingerprint Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2  
Web Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9  
Using TOSHIBA Face Recognition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11  
Using optical disk drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14  
Writng CD/DVD on DVD Super Multi drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18  
Media care. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30  
TV Tuner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32  
Sound system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33  
Modem. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35  
Wireless communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39  
LAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42  
Cleaning the computer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44  
Moving the computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45  
Chapter 5 The Keyboard  
Typewriter keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1  
Function keys: F1 … F12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2  
Soft keys: FN key combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2  
Hot keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3  
Windows special keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
iii  
Qosmio F50  
Keypad overlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6  
Generating ASCII characters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7  
Chapter 6 Power  
Power conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1  
Power indicators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2  
Battery types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3  
Care and use of the battery pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5  
Replacing the battery pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9  
TOSHIBA Password Utility. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11  
Power-up modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12  
Panel power on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13  
System automatic Sleep/Hibernation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13  
Chapter 7 HW Setup  
Accessing HW Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1  
HW Setup Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1  
Chapter 8 AV functions  
Media Center. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1  
Front operation panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2  
Remote Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5  
Using the Remote Controller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12  
Installing/Removing batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13  
Set-top box Connection Method and Watching TV on the  
Media Center. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17  
Listen to radio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19  
QosmioEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20  
Chapter 9 Optional Devices  
ExpressCard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2  
Bridge media slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3  
Media care. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6  
Additional memory module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9  
Battery Packs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13  
Universal AC Adaptor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13  
Battery Charger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13  
USB floppy diskette drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14  
eSATA (External Serial ATA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16  
External monitor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17  
HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18  
i.LINK (IEEE1394). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20  
Security lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22  
Chapter 10 Troubleshooting  
Problem solving process. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1  
Hardware and system checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3  
TOSHIBA support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
iv  
Qosmio F50  
Chapter 11 Legal Footnotes  
CPU*1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1  
Memory (Main System)*2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2  
Battery Life*3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3  
Hard Disk Drive (HDD) Capacity*4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3  
LCD*5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3  
Graphics Processor Unit ("GPU”)*6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3  
Wireless LAN*7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3  
Non-applicable Icons*8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4  
Copy Protection*9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4  
TV Tuner*10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4  
Images*11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4  
LCD Brightness and Eye Stain*12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4  
Safety Use for TV Tuner*13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4  
Appendix A Specifications  
Physical Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1  
Appendix B Display Controller and Video modes  
Display controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1  
Video modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1  
Appendix C Wireless LAN  
Card Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1  
Radio Characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2  
Supported Frequency Sub-bands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2  
Appendix D Bluetooth wireless technology Interoperability  
Bluetooth wireless technology and your Health . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-2  
Regulatory statements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-2  
®
Using Bluetooth Card from TOSHIBA equipment in Japan . . . . . . D-5  
Appendix E AC Power Cord and Connectors  
Certification agencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-1  
Appendix F Usage Restrictions  
Glossary  
Index  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
v
Qosmio F50  
Copyright  
© 2008 by TOSHIBA Corporation. All rights reserved. Under the copyright  
laws, this manual cannot be reproduced in any form without the prior  
written permission of TOSHIBA. No patent liability is assumed, with respect  
to the use of the information contained herein.  
TOSHIBA Qosmio F50 Portable Personal Computer User’s Manual  
First edition June 2008  
Copyright authority for music, movies, computer programs, databases and  
other intellectual property covered by copyright laws belongs to the author  
or to the copyright owner. Copyrighted material can be reproduced only for  
personal use or use within the home. Any other use beyond that stipulated  
above (including conversion to digital format, alteration, transfer of copied  
material and distribution on a network) without the permission of the  
copyright owner is a violation of copyright or author's rights and is subject to  
civil damages or criminal action. Please comply with copyright laws in  
making any reproduction from this manual.  
Please note that you may infringe the owner's rights protected by the  
copyright laws if you use the screen mode switching functions (e.g. Wide  
mode, Wide Zoom mode, etc.) of this product to display enlarged  
images/video at coffee shops or hotels for the purposes of profits or  
providing these to the public.  
Disclaimer  
This manual has been validated and reviewed for accuracy. The  
instructions and descriptions it contains are accurate for the TOSHIBA  
Qosmio F50 Portable Personal Computers at the time of this manual’s  
production. However, succeeding computers and manuals are subject to  
change without notice. TOSHIBA assumes no liability for damages incurred  
directly or indirectly from errors, omissions or discrepancies between the  
computer and the manual.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
vi  
   
Qosmio F50  
Trademarks  
IBM is a registered trademark and IBM PC is a trademark of International  
Business Machines Corporation.  
Intel, Intel SpeedStep, Intel® CoreTM, Celeron and Centrino are trademarks  
or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation.  
Windows, Microsoft and Windows Vista® are registered trademarks of  
Microsoft Corporation.  
Photo CD is a trademark of Eastman Kodak.  
Bluetooth is a trademark or registered trademark owned by its proprietor  
and used by TOSHIBA under license.  
Memory Stick is a registered trademark and i.LINK is a trademark of Sony  
Corporation.  
DVD MovieFactory is a registered trademarks of Ulead Systems, Inc.  
Labelflash is a trademark of YAMAHA CORPORATION.  
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.  
Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.  
Dolby Home Theater is a trademark of Dolby Laboratories.  
PalmCheck and TouchPad are trademarks of Synaptics Incorporated.  
ExpressCard is a trademark of PCMCIA.  
ConfigFree is a trademark of Toshiba Corporation.  
Wi-Fi is a registered trademark of the Wi-Fi Alliance.  
Secure Digital and SD are trademarks of SD Card Association.  
MultiMediaCard and MMC are trademarks of MultiMediaCard Association.  
xD-Picture Card is a trademark of FUJIFILM Corporation.  
Other trademarks and registered trademarks not listed above may be used  
in this manual.  
Macrovision License  
This product includes copyright protection technology and intellectual  
property that are patented in the U.S. and other countries. These patents  
are the property of Macrovision Corporation. The use of copyright  
protection must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation. It is intended for  
home and other restricted-use applications, unless Macrovision  
Corporation expressly authorizes otherwise. All forms of reverse  
engineering or decompiling are forbidden.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
vii  
   
Qosmio F50  
FCC information  
FCC notice "Declaration of Conformity Information"  
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a  
Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits  
are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference  
in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate  
radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the  
instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.  
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a  
particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to  
radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the  
equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the  
interference by one or more of the following measures:  
■ Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.  
■ Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.  
■ Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to  
which the receiver is connected.  
■ Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.  
Only peripherals complying with the FCC class B limits may be attached to  
this equipment. Operation with non-compliant peripherals or peripherals  
not recommended by TOSHIBA is likely to result in interference to radio  
and TV reception. Shielded cables must be used between the external  
devices and the computer’s external monitor port, Universal Serial Bus  
(USB 2.0) ports, i.LINK (IEEE1394) port, HDMI out port and microphone  
jack. Changes or modifications made to this equipment, not expressly  
approved by TOSHIBA or parties authorized by TOSHIBA could void the  
user’s authority to operate the equipment.  
FCC conditions  
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to  
the following two conditions:  
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.  
2. This device must accept any interference received, including  
interference that may cause undesired operation.  
Contact  
Address:  
TOSHIBA America Information Systems, Inc.  
9740 Irvine Boulevard  
Irvine, California 92618-1697  
Telephone: (949) 583-3000  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
viii  
 
Qosmio F50  
EU Conformity Statement  
This product and - if applicable - the supplied accessories too are marked  
with "CE" and comply therefore with the applicable harmonized European  
standards listed under the Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC, the EMC  
Directive 2004/108/EC and/or R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC.  
Responsible for CE-  
marking:  
TOSHIBA EUROPE GMBH, Hammfelddamm 8,  
41460 Neuss, Germany.  
manufacturer:  
Toshiba Corporation, 1-1 Shibaura 1-chome,  
Minato-ku, Tokyo, 105-8001, Japan  
The complete official EU CE Declaration can be obtained on following  
internet page:  
http://epps.toshiba-teg.com/  
VCCI Class B Information  
Important Safety Information for Computers with TV tuner  
IEC60950-1/EN60950-1 Information technology equipment - Safety -  
Coaxial cable connection to this computer must only be used if the cable  
outer conductive shielding has been grounded by the cable installer at the  
building premises as close to the point of cable entrance, or attachment, as  
practicable and the connection complies with all local cable installation  
requirements that are applicable in your area.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ix  
     
Qosmio F50  
Modem warning notice  
This information is applicable to the models equipped with a built-in  
modem.  
Conformity Statement  
The equipment has been approved to [Commission Decision “CTR21”] for  
pan-European single terminal connection to the Public Switched Telephone  
Network (PSTN).  
However, due to differences between the individual PSTNs provided in  
different countries/regions the approval does not, of itself, give an  
unconditional assurance of successful operation on every PSTN network  
termination point.  
In the event of problems, you should contact your equipment supplier in the  
first instance.  
Network Compatibility Statement  
This product is designed to work with, and is compatible with the following  
networks. It has been tested to and found to conform with the additional  
requirements conditional in EG 201 121.  
Germany  
ATAAB AN005, AN006, AN007, AN009, AN010  
and DE03, 04, 05, 08, 09, 12, 14, 17  
Greece  
ATAAB AN005, AN006 and GR01, 02, 03, 04  
Portugal  
ATAAB AN001, 005, 006, 007, 011 and  
P03, 04, 08, 10  
Spain  
Switzerland  
ATAAB AN005, 007, 012, and ES01  
ATAAB AN002  
All other countries/regions ATAAB AN003, 004  
Specific switch settings or software setup is required for each network,  
please refer to the relevant sections of the user guide for more details.  
The hookflash (timed break register recall) function is subject to separate  
national type approvals. It has not been tested for conformity to national  
type regulations, and no guarantee of successful operation of that specific  
function on specific national networks can be given.  
Japan regulations  
Region selection  
If you are using the computer in Japan, technical regulations described  
under Telecommunications Business Law require that you select the Japan  
region mode. It is illegal to use the modem in Japan with any other  
selection.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
x
   
SUBTEL 3061  
IC: 109AH-ML3054  
TEC/WR/I/MOD-08/02/100.JAN 05  
MOROCCO 2903/2005  
:
0617-05-1699  
Approved by PT (2004)  
A
FCC NO.:US:S56MD01B13054  
Model Number:ML3054  
TE-A22/K012-04-0422  
E04/01/211/G  
EQUIPO  
Pakistan Telecom Authority  
E253445  
HOMOLOGADO POR  
ANTEL  
NYCE/CT/0008/06/TS  
Cofetel n° TTD:MOML06-189  
No de Aprob: MC-108  
Fecha: 20/12/2005  
Empresa: Motorola Inc  
NTC  
This Motorola ML3054 56k  
Modem may be connected  
to the Telecom Network  
:
POSTEL  
02375/POSTEL/2007  
Type Approved  
No.:ESD-CPE-0400760  
PTC  
/
211  
/
05 005  
/
Made In China  
Name of permit owner: Ronny Cabouly  
Telephone: 03-9506328  
Model: ML3054  
Manufacturer: MOTOROLA INC.  
Country of manufacture: USA  
Type approval No.: 7-12840-0-101926  
Valid from: 2004  
Permit No.: 13-12840-0-101927  
Valid from:2004  
Complies with  
IDA Standards  
DA 103255  
A05-0025001  
TE-2004/175  
B93M1015-F  
MOTOROLA ML3054  
54-3708  
MOTOROLA  
N723Z218  
No.#SL405007  
Delphi D40  
This Agere Delphi D40 56K  
Modem may be connected  
to the Telecom Network  
US:AGSMD01BDELPHI  
PTC 211/05/074  
A05-0413001  
NYCE/CT/0003/07/TS  
Cofetel no TTDAGDE07-056  
:
Agere Systems  
Delphi Modem D40  
Approval No. 3785  
No:ESD-CPE-0500938  
N723  
Factory ID:  
E
Agere DELPHI D40(AM5)  
54-5681  
Agere Systems Inc.  
CCAC07M10010T6  
0107898349890382  
115/06  
Approval by PTA,2007  
NCG-CE-06-009  
0455-06-2565  
AM5  
ETISALAT PERMIT NO.:E05/01/254/G  
Certificate No.#SL405083  
TEC/WR/I/MOD-08/02/122.MAY07  
IC:4005B-DELPHI, REN:0.1  
ASI-DELPHI-D40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Qosmio F50  
Pursuant to FCC CFR 47, Part 68:  
When you are ready to install or use the modem, call your local telephone  
company and give them the following information:  
■ The telephone number of the line to which you will connect the modem  
■ The registration number that is located on the device  
The FCC registration number of the modem will be found on either the  
device which is to be installed, or, if already installed, on the bottom of the  
computer, separate from the system information label.  
■ The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) of the modem, which can vary -  
for the REN, please refer to the modem's label.  
The modem connects to the telephone line by means of a standard jack  
called the USOC RJ11C.  
Type of service  
Your modem is designed to be used on standard-device telephone lines.  
Connection to telephone company-provided coin service (central office  
implemented systems) is prohibited. Connection to party lines service is  
subject to state tariffs. If you have any questions about your telephone line,  
such as how many pieces of equipment you can connect to it, the  
telephone company will provide this information upon request.  
Telephone company procedures  
The goal of the telephone company is to provide you with the best service it  
can. In order to do this, it may occasionally be necessary for them to make  
changes in their equipment, operations, or procedures. If these changes  
might affect your service or the operation of your equipment, the telephone  
company will give you notice in writing to allow you to make any changes  
necessary to maintain uninterrupted service.  
If problems arise  
If any of your telephone equipment is not operating properly, you should  
immediately remove it from your telephone line, as it may cause harm to  
the telephone network. If the telephone company notes a problem, they  
may temporarily discontinue service. When practical, they will notify you in  
advance of this disconnection. If advance notice is not feasible, you will be  
notified as soon as possible. When you are notified, you will be given the  
opportunity to correct the problem and informed of your right to file a  
complaint with the FCC. In the event repairs are ever needed on your  
modem, they should be performed by TOSHIBA Corporation or an  
authorized representative of TOSHIBA Corporation.  
Disconnection  
If you should ever decide to permanently disconnect your modem from its  
present line, please call the telephone company and let them know of this  
change.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
xii  
Qosmio F50  
Fax branding  
The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any  
person to use a computer or other electronic device to send any message  
via a telephone fax machine unless such a message clearly contains in a  
margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page, or on the first page of  
the transmission, the date and time it is sent, an identification of the  
business, other entity or individual sending the message and the telephone  
number of the sending machine or such business, other entity or individual.  
In order to program this information into your fax modem, you should  
complete the setup of your fax software before sending messages.  
Use only No. 26 AWG or larger telecommunication line cord.  
Instructions for IC CS-03 certified equipment  
1. The Industry Canada label identifies certified equipment. This  
certification means that the equipment meets certain  
telecommunications network protective, operational and safety  
requirements as prescribed in the appropriate Terminal Equipment  
Technical Requirements document(s). The Department does not  
guarantee the equipment will operate to the user’s satisfaction.  
Before installing this equipment, users should ensure that it is  
permissible to be connected to the facilities of the local  
telecommunications company. The equipment must also be installed  
using an acceptable method of connection.  
The customer should be aware that compliance with the above  
conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some situations.  
Repairs to certified equipment should be coordinated by a  
representative designated by the supplier. Any repairs or alterations  
made by the user to this equipment, or equipment malfunctions, may  
give the telecommunications company cause to request the user to  
disconnect the equipment.  
Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground  
connections of the power utility, telephone lines and internal metallic  
water pipe system, if present, are connected together. This precaution  
may be particularly important in rural areas.  
Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves, but  
should contact the appropriate electric inspection authority, or electrician,  
as appropriate.  
2. The user manual of analog equipment must contain the equipment’s  
Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) and an explanation notice similar to  
the following:  
The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) of the modem can vary - for the  
REN, please refer to the modem's label.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
xiii  
 
Qosmio F50  
The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) assigned to each terminal device  
provides an indication of the maximum number of terminals allowed to be  
connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an interface may  
consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that  
the sum of the Ringer Equivalence Numbers of all the devices does not  
exceed 5.  
3. The standard connecting arrangement (telephone jack type) for this  
equipment is jack type(s): USOC RJ11C.  
The IC registration number of the modem is shown below.  
Canada: 4005B-DELPHI  
Notes for Users in Australia and New Zealand  
Modem warning notice for Australia  
Modems connected to the Australian telecoms network must have a valid  
Austel permit. This modem has been designed to specifically configure to  
ensure compliance with Austel standards when the country/region selection  
is set to Australia. The use of other country/region settings while the  
modem is attached to the Australian PSTN would result in your modem  
being operated in a non-compliant manner. To verify that the country/region  
is correctly set, enter the command ATI which displays the currently active  
setting.  
To set the country/region permanently to Australia, enter the following  
command sequence:  
AT%TE=1  
ATS133=1  
AT&F  
AT&W  
AT%TE=0  
ATZ  
Failure to set the modem to the Australia country/region setting as shown  
above will result in the modem being operated in a non-compliant manner.  
Consequently, there would be no permit in force for this equipment, with the  
Telecoms Act 1991 prescribing a penalty of $12,000 for the connection of  
non-permitted equipment.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
xiv  
 
Qosmio F50  
Notes for use of this device in New Zealand  
■ The grant of a Telepermit for a device in no way indicates Telecom  
acceptance of responsibility for the correct operation of that device  
under all operating conditions. In particular the higher speeds at which  
this modem is capable of operating depend on a specific network  
implementation which is only one of many ways of delivering high  
quality voice telephony to customers. Failure to operate should not be  
reported as a fault to Telecom.  
■ In addition to satisfactory line conditions a modem can only work  
properly if:  
a/ It is compatible with the modem at the other end of the call, and;  
b/ The application using the modem is compatible with the application  
at the other end of the call - for example, accessing the Internet  
requires suitable software in addition to a modem.  
■ This equipment shall not be used in any manner which could constitute  
a nuisance to other Telecom customers.  
■ Some parameters required for compliance with Telecom’s PTC  
Specifications are dependent on the equipment (PC) associated with  
this modem. The associated equipment shall be set to operate within  
the following limits for compliance with Telecom Specifications:  
a/ There shall be no more than 10 call attempts to the same number  
within any 30 minute period for any single manual call initiation, and;  
b/ The equipment shall go on-hook for a period of not less than 30  
seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the  
next, and;  
c/ Automatic calls to different numbers shall be not less than 5  
seconds apart.  
■ Immediately disconnect this equipment should it become physically  
damaged, and arrange for its disposal or repair.  
■ The correct settings for use with this modem in New Zealand are as  
follows:  
ATB0 (CCITT operation)  
AT&G2 (1800Hz guard tone)  
AT&P1 (decadic dialing make-break ratio =33%/67%)  
ATS0=0 (disable auto answer)  
ATS6=4 (blind dial delay)  
ATS7=Less than 90 (time to wait for carrier after dialing)  
ATS10=Less than 150 (loss of carrier to hangup delay - the factory  
default of 15 is recommended)  
ATS11=90 (DTMF dialing on/off duration in milliseconds)  
ATX2 (dial tone detect, but not USA call progress detect)  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
xv  
Qosmio F50  
■ When used in Auto Answer mode, the S0 register must be set with to a  
value of either 3 or 4. This ensures:  
■ a person calling your modem will hear a short burst of ringing before  
the modem answers. This confirms that the call has been  
successfully switched through the network.  
■ caller identification information (which occurs between the first and  
second ring cadences) is not destroyed.  
■ The preferred method of dialing is to use DTMF tones (ATDT...) as this  
is faster and more reliable than pulse (decadic) dialing. If for some  
reason you must use decadic dialing, your communications program  
must be set up to record numbers using the following translation table  
as this modem does not implement the New Zealand “Reverse Dialing”  
standard.  
Number to be dialed: 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9  
Number to program into computer: 0 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1  
Note that where DTMF dialing is used, the numbers should be  
entered normally.  
■ The transmit level from this device is set at a fixed level and because of  
this there may be circumstances where the performance is less than  
optimal. Before reporting such occurrences as faults, please check the  
line with a standard Telepermitted telephone, and only report a fault if  
the phone performance is impaired.  
■ It is recommended that this equipment be disconnected from the  
Telecom line during electrical storms.  
■ When relocating the equipment, always disconnect the Telecom line  
connection before the power connection, and reconnect the power first.  
■ This equipment may not be compatible with Telecom Distinctive Alert  
cadences and services such as FaxAbility.  
NOTE THAT FAULT CALLOUTS CAUSED BY ANY OF THE ABOVE  
CAUSES MAY INCUR A CHARGE FROM TELECOM  
General conditions  
As required by PTC 100, please ensure that this office is advised of any  
changes to the specifications of these products which might affect  
compliance with the relevant PTC Specifications.  
The grant of this Telepermit is specific to the above products with the  
marketing description as stated on the Telepermit label artwork. The  
Telepermit may not be assigned to other parties or other products without  
Telecom approval.  
A Telepermit artwork for each device is included from which you may  
prepare any number of Telepermit labels subject to the general instructions  
on format, size and color on the attached sheet.  
The Telepermit label must be displayed on the product at all times as proof  
to purchasers and service personnel that the product is able to be  
legitimately connected to the Telecom network.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
xvi  
Qosmio F50  
The Telepermit label may also be shown on the packaging of the product  
and in the sales literature, as required in PTC 100.  
The charge for a Telepermit assessment is $337.50. An additional charge  
of $337.50 is payable where an assessment is based on reports against  
non-Telecom New Zealand Specifications. $112.50 is charged for each  
variation when submitted at the same time as the original.  
An invoice for $NZ1237.50 will be sent under separate cover.  
Following information is only for EU-member states:  
The use of the symbol indicates that this product may not be treated as  
household waste. By ensuring this product is disposed of correctly, you will  
help prevent potential negative consequences for the environment and  
human health, which could otherwise be caused by inappropriate waste  
handling of this product. For more detailed information about recycling of  
this product, please contact your local city office, your household waste  
disposal service or the shop where you purchased the product.  
This symbol may not stick depending on the country and region where you  
purchased.  
Disposing of computer and computer batteries  
■ Discard this computer in accordance with applicable laws and  
regulations. For further information, contact your local government.  
■ This computer contains rechargeable batteries. After repeated use, the  
batteries will finally lose their ability to hold a charge and you will need  
to replace them. Under certain applicable laws and regulation, it may be  
illegal to dispose of old batteries by placing them in the trash.  
■ Please be kind to our shared environment. Check with your local  
government authority for details regarding where to recycle old batteries  
or how to dispose of them properly. This product contains mercury.  
Disposal of this material may be regulated due to environmental  
considerations. For disposal, reuse or recycling information, please  
contact your local government.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
xvii  
Qosmio F50  
Optical disc drive safety instructions  
Be sure to check the international precautions at the end of this section.  
Panasonic  
DVD Super Multi UJ870  
■ The Super Multi DVD drive employs a laser system. To ensure proper  
use of this product, please read this instruction manual carefully and  
retain for future reference.  
Should the unit ever require maintenance, contact an authorized  
service location.  
■ Use of controls, adjustments or the performance of procedures other  
than those specified may result in hazardous radiation exposure.  
■ To prevent direct exposure to the laser beam, do not try to open the  
enclosure.  
Location of the required label  
SERIAL NO.  
MANUFACTURED:  
COMPLIES WITH FDA RADIATION  
PERFORMANCE STANDARDS, 21 CFR  
SUBCHAPTER J.  
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT  
LASER KLASSE 1  
Panasonic Communications Co., Ltd.  
1-62, 4-Chome Minoshima, Hakata-Ku  
Fukuoka, Japan  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
xviii  
 
Qosmio F50  
Pioneer  
Super Multi DVD DVR-TD08TBA/ DVR-TD08TBC  
■ The Super Multi DVD drive employs a laser system. To ensure proper  
use of this product, please read this instruction manual carefully and  
retain for future reference.  
Should the unit ever require maintenance, contact an authorized  
service location.  
■ Use of controls, adjustments or the performance of procedures other  
than those specified may result in hazardous radiation exposure.  
■ To prevent direct exposure to the laser beam, do not try to open the  
enclosure.  
Location of the required label  
SERIAL NO.  
MANUFACTURED:  
COMPLIES WITH FDA RADIATION  
PERFORMANCE STANDARDS, 21 CFR  
SUBCHAPTER J.  
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT  
LASER KLASSE 1  
PIONEER CORPORATION  
4-1, MEGURO 1-CHOME  
MEGURO-KU, TOKYO, 153-8654  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
xix  
Qosmio F50  
Hitach-LG Data Storage  
Super Multi DVD GSA-T50N/ GSA-T50F  
■ The Super Multi DVD drive employs a laser system. To ensure proper  
use of this product, please read this instruction manual carefully and  
retain for future reference.  
Should the unit ever require maintenance, contact an authorized  
service location.  
■ Use of controls, adjustments or the performance of procedures other  
than those specified may result in hazardous radiation exposure.  
■ To prevent direct exposure to the laser beam, do not try to open the  
enclosure.  
Location of the required label  
SERIAL NO.  
MANUFACTURED:  
COMPLIES WITH FDA RADIATION  
PERFORMANCE STANDARDS, 21 CFR  
SUBCHAPTER J.  
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT  
LASER KLASSE 1  
Hitachi-LG Data Storage, Inc.  
22-23, Kaigan 3-chome, Minato-ku,  
Yokyo, 108-0022 Japan  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
xx  
Qosmio F50  
International precautions  
CAUTION: This appliance contains a  
laser system and is classified as a  
“CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT.” To use  
this model properly, read the instruction  
manual carefully and keep this manual  
for your future reference. In case of any  
trouble with this model, please contact  
your nearest “AUTHORIZED service  
station.” To prevent direct exposure to the  
laser beam, do not try to open the  
enclosure.  
VORSICHT: Dieses Gerät enthält ein  
Laser-System und ist als  
“LASERSCHUTZKLASSE 1 PRODUKT”  
klassifiziert. Für den richtigen Gebrauch  
dieses Modells lesen Sie bitte die  
Bedienungsanleitung sorgfältig durch  
und bewahren diese bitte als Referenz  
auf. Falls Probleme mit diesem Modell  
auftreten, benachrichtigen Sie bitte die  
nächste “autorisierte Service-Vertretung”.  
Um einen direkten Kontakt mit dem  
Laserstrahl zu vermeiden darf das Gerät  
nicht geöffnet werden.  
ADVARSEL: Denne mærking er anbragt  
udvendigt på apparatet og indikerer, at  
apparatet arbejder med laserstråler af  
klasse 1, hviket betyder, at der anvendes  
laserstrlier af svageste klasse, og at man  
ikke på apparatets yderside kan bilve  
udsat for utilladellg kraftig stråling.  
APPARATET BOR KUN ÅBNES AF  
FAGFOLK MED SÆRLIGT KENDSKAB  
TIL APPARATER MED  
LASERSTRÅLER!  
Indvendigt i apparatet er anbragt den her  
gengivne advarselsmækning, som  
advarer imod at foretage sådanne  
indgreb i apparatet, at man kan komme til  
at udsatte sig for laserstråling.  
User’s Manual  
xxi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Qosmio F50  
OBS! Apparaten innehåller  
laserkomponent som avger laserstråining  
överstigande gränsen för laserklass 1.  
VAROITUS. Suojakoteloa si saa avata.  
Laite sisältää laserdiodin, joka lähetää  
näkymätöntä silmilie vaarallista  
lasersäteilyä.  
CAUTION: USE OF CONTROLS OR  
ADJUSTMENTS OR PERFORMANCE  
OF PROCEDURES OTHER THAN  
THOSE SPECIFIED IN THE OWNER’S  
MANUAL MAY RESULT IN  
HAZARDOUS RADIATION EXPOSURE.  
VORSICHT: DIE VERWENDUNG VON  
ANDEREN STEURUNGEN ODER  
EINSTELLUNGEN ODER DAS  
DURCHFÜHREN VON ANDEREN  
VORGÄNGEN ALS IN DER  
BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG  
BESCHRIEBEN KÖNNEN  
GEFÄHRLICHE  
STRAHLENEXPOSITIONEN ZUR  
FOLGE HABEN.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
xxii  
Preface  
Congratulations on your purchase of the Qosmio F50 series computer. This  
powerful notebook computer provides excellent expansion capability,  
includes multimedia functionality, and is designed to provide years of  
reliable, high-performance computing.  
This computer family includes a model with a built-in TV tuner. When you  
wish to display a TV program or play CD/DVD with this model before  
Windows starts, touch the TV panel or the CD/DVD panel (or the same  
panels on the remote control) respectively during Windows startup. When  
Windows is running, you can display or record a TV program using the My  
TV feature of Media Center.  
This manual tells how to set up and begin using your Qosmio F50  
computer. It also provides detailed information on configuring your  
computer, basic operations and care, using optional devices and  
troubleshooting.  
If you are a new user of computers or if you’re new to portable computing,  
first read over the Introduction and The Grand Tour chapters to familiarize  
yourself with the computer’s features, components and accessory devices.  
Then read Getting Started for step-by-step instructions on setting up your  
computer.  
If you are an experienced computer user, please continue reading the  
preface to learn how this manual is organized, then become acquainted  
with this manual by browsing through its pages. Be sure to read the Special  
features section of the Introduction, to learn about features that are  
uncommon or unique to this computer, as well as the section on HW Setup,  
to understand how to setup and configure these features.  
If you are going to install PC Cards or connect external devices such as a  
monitor, be sure to read Chapter 9, Optional Devices.  
Conventions  
This manual uses the following formats to describe, identify, and highlight  
terms and operating procedures.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
xxiii  
   
Qosmio F50  
Abbreviations  
On first appearance, and whenever necessary for clarity, abbreviations are  
enclosed in parentheses following their definition. For example: Read Only  
Memory (ROM). Acronyms are also defined in the Glossary.  
Icons  
Keys  
Icons identify ports, dials, and other parts of your computer. The indicator  
panel also uses icons to identify the components it is providing information  
on.  
The keyboard keys are used in the text to describe many computer  
operations. A distinctive typeface identifies the key top symbols as they  
appear on the keyboard. For example, ENTER identifies the ENTER key.  
Key operation  
Some operations require you to simultaneously use two or more keys. We  
identify such operations by the key top symbols separated by a plus sign (+).  
For example, CTRL + C means you must hold down CTRL and at the same  
time press C. If three keys are used, hold down the first two and at the same  
time press the third.  
When procedures require an action such as  
clicking an icon or entering text, the icon's name  
or the text you are to type in is represented in the  
typeface you see to the left.  
ABC  
Display  
Names of windows or icons or text generated by  
the computer that appear on its display screen  
are presented in the type face you see to the left.  
S
ABC  
Messages  
Messages are used in this manual to bring important information to your  
attention. Each type of message is identified as shown below.  
Pay attention! A caution informs you that improper use of equipment or  
failure to follow instructions may cause data loss or damage your  
equipment.  
Please read. A note is a hint or advice that helps you make best use of  
your equipment.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
xxiv  
Qosmio F50  
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which could result in death or  
serious injury, if you do not follow instructions.  
Terminology  
This term is defined in this document as follows:  
Start  
The word "Start" refers to the "  
Microsoft® Windows Vista®.  
" button in  
HDD or Hard disk  
drive  
Some models are equipped with a "Solid State  
Drive (SSD)" instead of a hard disk drive.  
In this manual, the word "HDD" or "Hard disk  
drive" also refers to the SSD unless otherwise  
stated.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
xxv  
General Precautions  
TOSHIBA computers are designed to optimize safety, minimize strain and  
withstand the rigors of portability. However, certain precautions should be  
observed to further reduce the risk of personal injury or damage to the  
computer.  
Be certain to read the general precautions below and to note the cautions  
included in the text of the manual.  
Provide adequate ventilation  
■ Always make sure your Computer and AC adaptor have adequate  
ventilation and are protected from overheating when the power is  
turned on or when an AC adaptor is connected to a power outlet (even if  
your Computer is in Sleep Mode). In this condition, observe the  
following:  
■ Never cover your Computer or AC adaptor with any object.  
■ Never place your Computer or AC adaptor near a heat source, such  
as anelectric blanket or heater.  
■ Never cover or block the air vents including those located at the  
base of the Computer.  
■ Always operate your Computer on a hard flat surface. Using your  
Computer on a carpet or other soft material can block the vents.  
■ Always provide sufficient space around the Computer.  
■ Overheating your Computer or AC adaptor could cause system failure,  
Computer or AC adaptor damage or a fire, possibly resulting in serious  
injury.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
xxvi  
   
Qosmio F50  
Creating a computer-friendly environment  
Place the computer on a flat surface that is large enough for the computer  
and any other items you are using, such as a printer.  
Leave enough space around the computer and other equipment to provide  
adequate ventilation. Otherwise, they may overheat.  
To keep your computer in prime operating condition, protect your work area  
from:  
■ Dust, moisture, and direct sunlight.  
■ Equipment that generates a strong electromagnetic field, such as  
stereo speakers (other than speakers that are connected to the  
computer) or speakerphones.  
■ Rapid changes in temperature or humidity and sources of temperature  
change such as air conditioner vents or heaters.  
■ Extreme heat, cold, or humidity.  
■ Liquids and corrosive chemicals.  
Stress injury  
Carefully read the Instruction Manual for Safety and Comfort. It contains  
information on the prevention of stress injuries to your hands and wrists  
that can be caused by extensive keyboard use. Instruction Manual for  
Safety and Comfort also includes information on work space design,  
posture and lighting that can help reduce physical stress.  
Heat injury  
■ Avoid prolonged physical contact with the computer. If the computer is  
used for long periods, its surface can become very warm. While the  
temperature will not feel hot to the touch, if you maintain physical  
contact with the computer for a long time, for example if you rest the  
computer on your lap or if you keep your hands on the palm rest, your  
skin might suffer a low-heat injury.  
■ If the computer has been used for a long time, avoid direct contact with  
the metal plate supporting the various interface ports as this can  
become hot.  
■ The surface of the AC adaptor can become hot when in use but this  
condition does not indicate a malfunction. If you need to transport the  
AC adaptor, you should disconnect it and let it cool before moving it.  
■ Do not lay the AC adaptor on a material that is sensitive to heat as the  
material could become damaged.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
xxvii  
     
Qosmio F50  
Pressure or impact damage  
Do not apply heavy pressure to the computer or subject it to any form of  
strong impact as this can damage the computer's components or otherwise  
cause it to malfunction.  
Mobile phones  
Please be aware that the use of mobile phones can interfere with the audio  
system. The operation of the computer will not be impaired in any way, but  
it is recommended that a minimum distance of 30cm is maintained between  
the computer and a mobile phone that is in use.  
Instruction Manual for Safety and Comfort  
All important information on the safe and proper use of this computer is  
described in the enclosed Instruction Manual for Safety and Comfort. Be  
sure to read it before using the computer.  
The cautions on use of a Qosmio F50 series computer  
1. Clean any dust accumulated on the computer's cooling vents.  
The cooling vents are located on the back and underside of the  
computer.  
When you use your computer in a dusty area, dirt and debris may  
accumulate on the cooling vents at the under side of your unit. If this  
occurs, the accumulated dust can cause insufficient heat dissipation which  
may result in the computer shutting down during use. Carefully clean the  
dust from the vents using a vacuum cleaner.  
2. Cooling vents on the underside and back of the computer.  
Sub woofer  
Cooling vent  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
xxviii  
       
Qosmio F50  
The above illustration is of the subwoofer equipped model. Models without  
the subwoofer have cooling vents in the subwoofer location pictured  
above. Models with the subwoofer do not have cooling vents in the  
subwoofer location pictured above.  
Cooling vent  
Cooling vents  
To prevent possible overheating of the CPU, make sure the cooling fan's  
air intake is not blocked. The fan draws in air by creating a vacuum. If the  
fan is blocked, it could cause the CPU to run at a lower performance level  
or cause the computer to shut down. Loose items such as notebook and  
tissue paper, plastic wrappers, or other similar materials can block the air  
intake, preventing air from reaching the CPU. Do not use the computer on  
surfaces with objects that can be drawn in by the cooling fan.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
xxix  
Chapter 1  
Introduction  
This chapter provides an equipment checklist, and it identifies the  
computer’s features, options and accessories.  
Some of the features described in this manual may not function properly if  
you use an operating system that was not pre-installed by TOSHIBA.  
Equipment checklist  
Carefully unpack your computer, taking care to save the box and packaging  
materials for future use.  
Hardware  
Check to make sure you have all the following items:  
■ Qosmio F50 Portable Personal Computer  
■ AC adaptor and power cord (2-pin plug or 3-pin plug)  
■ Battery pack (is pre-installed in some computer)  
■ Infrared transmitter cable  
■ Remote controller (is included with some models)  
■ Two AA manganese batteries (for Full size remote controller)  
■ CR2016 battery (for Slim size remote controller)  
■ Cleaning cloth (is included with some models)  
■ FM tuner antenna (is included with some models)  
■ Some models are included with either a Full size remote controller or  
Slim size remote controller.  
■ Use the cleaning cloth to wipe away dust, fingerprints and similar from  
the keyboard, palm rest and other parts. For precautions on use refer to  
the Using the cleaning cloth section in Chapter 4, Operating Basics.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-1  
         
Introduction  
Documentation  
■ Qosmio F50 Portable Personal Computer User’s Manual  
(User’s Manual)  
■ Instruction Manual for Safety and Comfort  
■ End User License Agreement  
If any of the items are missing or damaged, contact your dealer  
immediately.  
Software  
The following Windows® operating system and utility software are  
pre-installed.  
■ Microsoft® Windows Vista®  
■ TOSHIBA Value Added Package  
■ Ulead DVD MovieFactory®  
■ Fingerprint Utility  
■ Windows Mobility Center  
■ TOSHIBA Gesture Controller  
■ Toshiba Graphical Video Library  
■ TOSHIBA HD Console  
■ TOSHIBA Face Recognition  
■ TOSHIBA Disc Creator  
■ TOSHIBA Recovery Disc Creator  
■ TOSHIBA ConfigFreeTM  
■ TOSHIBA Assist  
■ CD/DVD Drive Acoustic Silencer  
■ TOSHIBA Password Utility  
■ TOSHIBA DVD PLAYER  
■ Online Manual  
■ Qosmio F50 User’s Manual (This manual)  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-2  
 
Introduction  
Hardware  
This section describes the hardware of your computer.  
The actual specifications may vary depending on the model you  
purchased.  
Processor  
Built-in  
The computer is equipped with one of the  
following Intel® processor.  
■ Intel® CoreTM 2 Duo Processor, which  
incorporates a 3MB level2 cache memory  
and also supports Enhanced Intel®  
SpeedStep® Technology.  
■ Intel® CoreTM 2 Duo Processor, which  
incorporates a 6MB level2 cache memory  
and also supports Enhanced Intel SpeedStep  
Technology.  
Some models in this series use Intel® Centrino® 2 processor technology  
which is based on three separate components, the Intel® CoreTM 2 Duo  
processor, Intel® WiFi Link 5300AGN-OR-5100AGN and the Intel®  
GM/PM45 Express Chipset.  
Legal Footnote (CPU)*1  
For more information on the CPU, please refer to the Legal Footnotes  
section in Chapter 11 or click the *1 above.  
User’s Manual  
1-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Introduction  
Memory  
Slots  
512, 1,024 or 2,048MB memory modules can be  
installed in the computer's two memory slots for a  
maximum of 4,096MB system memory. This  
computer can be equipped with memory modules  
of a maximum size of 4,096MB. The actual  
amount of useable system memory will be less  
than the installed memory modules.  
Video RAM  
The memory in a computer's graphics adaptor,  
used to store the image displayed on a bitmap  
display.  
Start -> Control Panel -> Appearance and  
Personalization -> Personalization -> Display  
Settings.  
The amount of Video RAM can be verified by  
clicking the Advanced Settings... button in the  
Display Settings window.  
The amount of Total Available Graphics memory  
will vary be between 1 and 2 MB depending upon  
system configuration.  
Legal Footnote (Memory (Main System))*2  
For more information regarding Memory (Main System), please refer to the  
Legal Footnotes section in Chapter 11 or click the *2 above.  
Toshiba Quad Core  
HD Processor  
A co-processor specialized for media streaming  
processes (real-time image processing such as  
image processing and image recognition) is  
installed.  
Power  
Battery pack  
The computer is powered by one rechargeable  
lithium-ion battery pack.  
Legal Footnote (Battery Life)*3  
For more information regarding Battery Life, please refer to the Legal  
Footnotes section in Chapter 11 or click the *3 above.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-4  
         
Introduction  
RTC battery  
AC adaptor  
The internal RTC battery backs up the Real Time  
Clock (RTC) and calendar.  
The AC adaptor provides power to the system  
and recharges the batteries when they are low. It  
comes with a detachable power cord which will  
either have a 2-pin or 3-pin plug enclosure.  
As the AC adaptor is universal, it can receive a  
range of AC voltages from 100 to 240 volts,  
however you should note that the output current  
varies among different models. Using the wrong  
adaptor can damage your computer. Refer to the  
AC adaptor section in Chapter 2, The Grand Tour.  
Disks  
Hard disk drive or  
Solid state drive  
This computer is equipped with the following  
types of hard disk drive(HDD). The capacity of  
each hard disk drive model is different.  
Some models are equipped with a "Solid State  
Drive (SSD)" instead of a hard disk drive.  
■ HDD  
■
200GB  
250GB  
320GB  
400GB  
500GB  
■
■
■
■
■ SSD  
■
■
64GB  
128GB  
Two HDD computer models are available, a  
model with a single hard disk drive and a model  
with two hard disk drives.  
Please note that part of the hard disk drives  
overall capacity is reserved as administration  
space.  
■ In this manual, the word "HDD" or "Hard disk drive" also refers to the  
SSD unless otherwise stated.  
■ SSD is a large-capacity storage media which uses Solid-State Memory  
in place of a magnetic disk of the hard disk.  
■ Under certain unusual conditions of prolonged non-use and/or  
exposure to high temperatures, the SSD may be vulnerable to data  
retention errors.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-5  
   
Introduction  
Legal Footnote (Hard Disk Drive (HDD) Capacity)*4  
For more information regarding Hard Disk Drive (HDD) Capacity, please  
refer to the Legal Footnotes section in Chapter 11 or click the *4 above.  
Optical disc drive  
DVD Super Multi  
drive  
The drive reads DVD-ROM's at a maximum 8x  
speed and CD-ROM's at a maximum 24x speed,  
and writes CD-R's at up to 16x speed, CD-RW's  
at up to 10x speed, DVD-R's and DVD+R's at up  
to 4x speed, DVD-RW's and DVD+RW's at up to  
4x speed, DVD-R (Dual layer) at up to 2x speed,  
DVD+R (Double Layer) at up to 2.4x speed and  
DVD-RAM at up to 3x speed, and supports the  
following formats:  
■ CD-R  
■ CD-RW  
■ DVD-ROM  
■ DVD-Video  
■ CD-DA  
■ CD-Text  
■ Photo CD™ (single/multi-session)  
■ CD-ROM Mode 1, Mode 2  
■ CD-ROM XA Mode 2 (Form1, Form2)  
■ Enhanced CD (CD-EXTRA)  
■ Addressing Method 2  
■ DVD-R  
■ DVD-R (Dual Layer)  
■ DVD-RW  
■ DVD+R  
■ DVD+R (Double Layer)  
■ DVD+RW  
■ DVD-RAM  
Some models are equipped with a full-size DVD  
Super Multi drive module that lets you run CD's  
or DVD's without using an adaptor.  
DVD Super Multi  
The drive reads DVD-ROM's at a maximum 8x  
drive with Labelflash speed and CD-ROM's at a maximum 24x speed,  
and writes CD-R's and CD-RW's at up to 24x  
speed, DVD-R's, DVD+R's and DVD+RW's at up  
to 8x speed, DVD-RW's, DVD-R (Dual Layer)  
and DVD+R (Double Layer) at up to 6x speed,  
DVD-RAM at up to 5x speed. This drive supports  
the same formats as the DVD Super Multi drive.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-6  
 
Introduction  
Display  
The computer's internal display panel supports high-resolution video  
graphics and can be set to a wide range of viewing angles for maximum  
comfort and readability.  
Display panel  
15.4" TFT LCD screen, 32 million colors, with a  
resolutions  
■ 1280 horizontal X 800 vertical pixels WXGA  
■ 1440 horizontal X 900 vertical pixels WXGA+  
Legal Footnote (LCD)*5  
For more information regarding the LCD, please refer to the Legal  
Footnotes section in Chapter 11 or click the *6 above.  
Graphics controller  
The graphics controller maximizes display  
performance. Refer to the Display Controller and  
Video modes section in Appendix B for more  
information.  
Legal Footnote (Graphics Processor Unit ("GPU"))*6  
For more information regarding the Graphics Processor Unit ("GPU"),  
please refer to the Legal Footnotes section in Chapter 11 or click the *7  
above.  
Keyboard  
Built-in  
The internal keyboard provides the embedded  
numeric overlay keys, dedicated cursor control  
overlay keys,  
and  
Keys. The keyboard  
is compatible with the IBM® enhanced keyboard.  
Refer to Chapter 5, The Keyboard, for details.  
Pointing Device  
Built-in Touch Pad  
The integrated Touch Pad and control buttons in  
the palm rest allow control of the on-screen  
pointer and support functions such as the  
scrolling of windows.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-7  
           
Introduction  
Ports  
External monitor  
This port provides 15-pin, analog VGA port.This  
port allows you to connect an external monitor to  
the computer.  
Universal Serial Bus The computer supports multiple Universal Serial  
(USB 2.0)  
Bus ports that comply with the USB 2.0 standard.  
The ports with the ( ) has a USB Sleep and  
Charge function.  
One of the USB ports has an eSATA (External  
Serial ATA) function.  
■ Please note that it is not possible to confirm the operation of all  
functions of all USB devices that are available. In view of this it may be  
noted that some functions associated with a specific device might not  
operate properly.  
i.LINK™ (IEEE1394)  
This port allows high-speed data transfer to take  
place between the computer and external  
devices such as digital video cameras.  
Slots  
ExpressCard™  
The internal ExpressCard slot is a Universal slot.  
This slot supports ExpressCard/54 and  
ExpressCard/34 modules.  
Bridge media  
This slot lets you insert an SD™/SDHC™  
memory card, miniSD™/microSD™ Card,  
Memory Stick® (Duo™/PRO™/PRO Duo™),  
xD-Picture Card™ and MultiMediaCard™. Refer  
to Chapter 9, Optional Devices.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-8  
             
Introduction  
Multimedia  
Sound system  
The integrated sound system provides support  
for the computer's internal speakers and  
microphone, also allowing an external  
microphone and headphones to be connected  
via the appropriate jacks.  
Web Camera  
Web Camera is a device that allows you to  
record video or take photographs with your  
computer. You can use it for video chatting or  
video conferences using a communication tool  
such as Windows Live Messenger. Camera  
Assistant Software will help you to add various  
video effects to your video or photograph.  
Please refer to the Web Camera section in  
Chapter 4, Operating Basics.  
TV antenna port  
HDMI out port  
Connect the antenna cable to this port to watch  
or record TV programs on your computer.  
The dimensions and shape of the TV antenna  
port vary for different regions.  
HDMI out port can connect with Type A  
connector HDMI cable.  
HDMI cable can send video and audio signals. In  
addition to this, it can send and receive control  
signals.  
By connecting a TV which supports HDMI  
Control to this port, the remote control for the  
connected TV can be used to operate some of  
the computer functions.  
Refer to the REGZA Link (PC Control) section in  
C
Headphone, S/PDIF  
and Line out jack  
This jack lets you connect digital speakers or a  
stereo headphone (16 ohm minimum). When you  
connect a digital speaker or headphones, the  
internal speaker is automatically disabled.  
This jack can be used also as S/PDIF jack and  
enables connection of optical digital  
correspondence apparatus.  
Microphone and  
Line in jack  
A 3.5mm mini microphone jack enables  
connection of a three-conductor mini jack for  
stereo microphone input, and connection of a  
stereo device for audio input.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-9  
       
Introduction  
TV Tuner  
FM Tuner  
TV Tuner enables watching and recording TV  
programs. Some models are equipped with the  
TV Tuner.  
Connecting the included FM Tuner antenna to  
this jack enables reception of FM  
broadcasts.Some models are equipped with the  
FM tuner jack.  
Infrared receiver  
window  
This is a sensor window that receives signals  
from the remote controller which is provided with  
your computer.  
Models which do not include a remote controller  
are not equipped with an infrared received so the  
computer cannot be operated with a remote  
controller.  
Infrared transmitter  
cable port  
Connect the Infrared transmitter cable to this  
port. Connecting the set top box or other external  
device to the computer using the infrared  
transmitter cable allows the external device to be  
operated using the computer and specialized  
remote control.  
Full size remote  
controller  
Some models are equipped with the Full size  
remote controller. Use this device to navigate  
when watching TV or playing CDs/DVDs.  
Slim size remote  
controller  
Use this device to navigate when playing  
CDs/DVDs.This device is stored within the  
ExpressCard slot.Some models are equipped  
with the Slim size remote controller.  
■ Some models are included with a Full size remote controller or Slim  
size remote controller.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-10  
   
Introduction  
Communications  
Modem  
Some models are equipped with the integrated  
modem. The integrated modem provides  
capability for data and fax communications that  
support the V.90 (V.92) standards and includes a  
modem jack for connection to the telephone line.  
Please note that both the V.90 and V.92  
standards are only supported in the USA,  
Canada, United Kingdom, France, Germany and  
Australia - only the V.90 standard is supported in  
other regions. You should also be aware that the  
speed of data and fax transfer will depend on the  
analog telephone line conditions.  
The integrated model is only installed as a  
standard device in some markets.  
LAN  
The computer has built-in support for Ethernet  
LAN (10 megabits per second, 10BASE-T), Fast  
Ethernet LAN (100 megabits per second,  
100BASE-TX) and Gigabit Ethernet LAN (1000  
megabits per second, 1000BASE-T).  
It is pre-installed as a standard device in some  
markets.  
BluetoothTM  
Some computers in this series have Bluetooth  
wireless communication function which  
eliminates the need for cables between  
electronic devices such as computers and  
printers and mobile phones. When it is enabled,  
Bluetooth provides the wireless personal area  
network environment which is safe and  
trustworthy, that is quick and easy.  
Wireless LAN  
Some computers in this series are equipped with  
a Wireless LAN module that is compatible with  
other LAN systems based on Direct Sequence  
Spread Spectrum/Orthogonal Frequency Division  
Multiplexing radio technology that complies with  
the IEEE 802.11 Standard.  
■ The transmission speed over the wireless LAN and the distance over  
which wireless LAN can reach may vary depending on surrounding  
electromagnetic environment, obstacles, access point design and  
configuration, and client design and software/hardware configurations.  
The Transmit Rate (at X Mbit/s) is the theoretical maximum speed  
under the IEEE802.11 (a/b/g/n) standards. The actual transmission  
speed will be lower than the theoretical maximum speed.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-11  
       
Introduction  
Legal Footnote (Wireless LAN)*7  
For more information regarding Wireless LAN, please refer to the Legal  
Footnotes section in Chapter 11 or click the *8 above.  
Wireless  
communication  
switch  
This switch turns the Wireless LAN and Bluetooth  
functions on and off. Please note that all models  
are provided with a Wireless communication switch  
and some models are equipped with both Wireless  
LAN and Bluetooth functionality.  
Security  
Security lock slot  
Connects a security lock to anchor the computer  
to a desk or other large object.  
Special features  
The following features are either unique to TOSHIBA computers or are  
advanced features which make the computer more convenient to use.  
Access each function using the following procedures.  
*1 To access the Power Options, click Start -> Control Panel -> System  
and Maintenance -> Power Options.  
USB Sleep and  
Charge function  
This feature supplies USB bus power (DC5V) to  
the USB port even when the power of the  
computer is turned OFF. This can be specified in  
the HW Setup. It can only be used for ports that  
support the USB Sleep and Charge function  
(hereinafter called "compatible ports").  
To run the HW Setup program, click Start -> All  
Programs -> TOSHIBA -> Utilities -> HWSetup.  
Hot keys  
Hot keys are specific key combinations that let  
you quickly change the system configuration  
directly from the keyboard without running a  
system program.  
Display automatic  
This feature automatically cuts off power to the  
computer's display panel when there is no  
keyboard input for a specified time, with power  
being restored the next time a key is pressed.  
This can be specified in the Power Options.  
*1  
power off  
HDD automatic  
This feature automatically cuts off power to the  
hard disk drive when it is not accessed for a  
specified time, with power being restored when  
the hard disk drive is next accessed. This can be  
specified in the Power Options.  
*1  
power off  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-12  
                 
Introduction  
System automatic  
Sleep/Hibernation  
This feature automatically shuts down the system  
into either Sleep Mode or Hibernation Mode when  
there is no input or hardware access for a  
specified time. This can be specified in the Power  
Options.  
*1  
Mode  
Keypad overlay  
A ten-key numeric keypad is integrated into the  
keyboard. Please refer to the Keypad overlay  
section in Chapter 5, The Keyboard, for  
information on using this feature.  
Power on password Two levels of password security, supervisor and  
user, are available to prevent unauthorized  
access to your computer.  
Instant security  
A specific hot key function automatically locks the  
system providing data security.  
Intelligent power  
A microprocessor in the computer's intelligent  
power supply detects the battery's charge,  
automatically calculates the remaining battery  
capacity and protects electronic components  
from abnormal conditions such as a voltage  
overload from the AC adaptor. This can be  
specified in the Power Options.  
*1  
supply  
*1  
This feature lets you configure the computer in  
order to save battery power. This can be  
specified in the Power Options.  
Battery save mode  
Low battery  
automatic  
When battery power is exhausted to the point that  
computer operation cannot be continued, the  
system automatically enters Hibernation Mode  
and shuts itself down. This can be specified in the  
Power Options.  
*1  
Hibernation Mode  
*1  
To protect against overheating, the processor has  
an internal temperature sensor so that, if the  
computer's internal temperature rises to a certain  
level, the cooling fan is turned on or the  
processing speed is lowered. This can be  
specified in the Power Options.  
Heat dispersal  
If the processor's temperature reaches an unacceptably high level with  
either setting, the computer will automatically shuts down to prevent any  
damage - in this instance all unsaved data in memory will be lost.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-13  
         
Introduction  
Hibernation Mode  
This feature lets you turn off the power to the  
computer without exiting from your software. The  
contents of main memory are automatically  
saved to the hard disk drive so that when you  
next turn the power on again, you can continue  
working right where you left off. Refer to the  
Turning off the power section in Chapter 3,  
Getting Started, for more details.  
Sleep Mode  
If you have to interrupt your work, you can use  
this feature to allow you to turn off power to the  
computer without exiting from your software. Data  
is maintained in the computer's main memory so  
that when you next turn on the power, you can  
continue working right where you left off.  
TOSHIBA Value Added Package  
This section describes the TOSHIBA Component features pre-installed on  
the computer.  
TOSHIBA Power  
Saver  
TOSHIBA Power Saver provides you with the  
features of more various power supply  
managements.  
TOSHIBA Button  
Support  
This utility controls the following computer panel  
functions.  
The applications associated with each of the  
following panels can be assigned by the user.  
■ Panels: Assign applications to the Mute,  
Illumination On/Off, Camera, DOLBY®  
panels.  
TOSHIBA Zooming  
Utility  
This utility allows you to enlarge or reduce the  
icon size on the Windows Desktop, or the zoom  
factor associated with specific supported  
applications.  
TOSHIBA PC  
Diagnostic Tool  
The TOSHIBA PC Diagnostic Tool will display  
basic system configuration information and allow  
the functionality of some of the computer's built-  
in hardware devices to be tested.  
TOSHIBA Password The TOSHIBA Password utility allows you to set  
a password in order to restrict access to the  
computer.  
Utility  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-14  
         
Introduction  
TOSHIBA Flash  
Cards  
The TOSHIBA Flash Cards provide a quick way  
to modify selected system functions and to  
launch applications.  
■ Hot key function  
■ TOSHIBA utility launcher function  
HW Setup  
This utility allows you to customize your  
hardware settings according to the way you work  
with the computer and the peripherals you use.  
TOSHIBA  
Accessibility  
The TOSHIBA Accessibility utility provides  
support to movement impaired users when they  
need to use the TOSHIBA Hot-key functions. In  
use, the utility allows you to make the FN key  
'sticky', that is you can press it once, release it,  
and they press one of the 'F' keys in order to  
access its specific function. When set, the FN  
key will remain active until another key is  
pressed.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-15  
Introduction  
Utilities and Applications  
This section describes the pre-installed utilities that come with the  
computer and details how to start them. For further information on their  
operation, please refer to each utility's online manual, help files or  
README.TXT file.  
Fingerprint Utility  
Some models of this computer series support a  
fingerprint utility, which is installed for the  
purpose of enrolling and recognizing fingerprints  
which can then be linked to a username and  
password in order to remove the need to input  
these details from the keyboard. Just by swiping  
an enrolled finger against the fingerprint sensor,  
the following functions will be enabled:  
■ Logon to Windows and access a security  
enabled homepage through Internet Explorer.  
■ Files and folders can be encrypted/decrypted  
and third party access to them is prevented.  
■ Disable the password-protected screen-saver  
when returning from a power-saving mode  
such as Sleep Mode.  
■ Authentication of the User Password (and, if  
applicable, the HDD(Hard Disk Drive)  
Password) when booting up the computer  
(Pre-OS Authentication).  
■ Single-Swipe Sign-on feature  
■ Fingerprint security cannot be used in models that do not have a  
fingerprint module installed.  
TOSHIBA Face  
Recognition  
TOSHIBA Face Recognition uses a face  
verification library to verify the face data of users  
when they log in to Windows. If the verification is  
successful, the user will be logged into Windows  
automatically. The user can thus avoid having to  
enter a password or the like, which makes the  
login process easier.  
TOSHIBA HD  
Console  
The TOSHIBA HD Console displays the usage  
for each core in the TOSHIBA Quad Core HD  
Processor and allows applications which use the  
TOSHIBA Quad Core HD Processor to be  
started. The TOSHIBA HD Console is displayed  
in the Windows Sidebar. TOSHIBA HD Console  
is equipped with some models.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-16  
 
Introduction  
TOSHIBA Gesture  
Controller  
TOSHIBA Gesture Controller is software which  
allows the computer's Web camera to be used  
with gestures in place of mouse and remote  
controller operations to control the TOSHIBA  
DVD PLAYER when watching or listening to  
video or music. To start this software, follow the  
steps and details below:1.To start the TOSHIBA  
Gesture Controller, click Gesture Interface  
Launch button in the TOSHIBA HD Console on  
the Windows Sidebar.2.The Gesture Interface  
Launch button display will change to Gesture  
Interface Running, the TOSHIBA Gesture  
Controller will start and the TOSHIBA Gesture  
Controller window will be displayed. TOSHIBA  
Gesture Controller software is equipped with  
some models. Please refer to the help file of  
software for details.  
Toshiba Graphical  
Video Library  
This software allows you to display a list of all the  
files and subfolders within a specified folder,  
index videos and play files. The Index Viewer can  
also be started in order to view the results of  
video indexing. Please refer to the help file of  
software for details. To start this software, click  
Start -> All Programs -> Windows Media  
Center -> TOSHIBA -> Video Library. TOSHIBA  
Graphical Video Library software is equipped  
with some models.  
Bluetooth Stack for  
This software enables communication between  
Windows by Toshiba the computer and external Bluetooth devices  
such as printers and mobile phones.  
Bluetooth functions cannot be used in models that do not have a Bluetooth  
module installed.  
TOSHIBA Assist  
TOSHIBA Assist is a graphical user interface that  
provides access to specific tools, utilities and  
applications that make the use and configuration  
of the computer easier.  
TOSHIBA ConfigFree TOSHIBA ConfigFree is a suite of utilities that  
improve the ease and control of communication  
devices and network connections, help in the  
identification of communication problems and  
allow the creation of profiles if you need to switch  
between different locations and communication  
networks. To access this utility, click Start -> All  
Programs -> TOSHIBA -> ConfigFree.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-17  
     
Introduction  
TOSHIBA Disc  
Creator  
You can create CD's and DVD's in a number of  
formats including audio CD's that can be played  
on a standard CD player, and data CD's/DVD's  
which can store copies of the files and folders on  
your computer's hard disk drive. This software  
can be used on models with a DVD Super Multi  
drive.  
To start this utility, click Start -> All Programs ->  
TOSHIBA -> CD&DVD Applications -> Disc  
Creator.  
TOSHIBA DVD-RAM This utility has the function of Physical Format  
Utility  
and Write-Protect to DVD-RAM. This utility is  
contained the setup module of TOSHIBA Disc  
Creator. To start this utility, click Start -> All  
Programs -> TOSHIBA -> CD&DVD  
Applications -> DVD-RAM Utility.  
Ulead DVD  
MovieFactory for  
TOSHIBA  
Ulead DVD MovieFactory for TOSHIBA allows  
users to instantly create DVD video or slideshow  
discs via a user-friendly wizard interface with  
specific task oriented features.  
The Labelflash feature is also supported which  
allows text and images to be printed on the label  
surface of Labelflash compatible media without  
using a printer. Some models supports the  
Labelflash function.  
Labelflash features cannot be used in models that do not have a DVD  
Super Multi drive with Labelflash.  
In order to determine if the optical disc drive installed in your computer  
supports Labelflash follow the steps as detailed below:  
1. Click Start -> All Programs -> DVD MovieFactory for TOSHIBA ->  
Ulead DVD MovieFactory for TOSHIBA Launcher to launch DVD  
MovieFactory.  
2. Click Print Disc Label -> Label Printing. Ulead Label@Once is  
started.  
3. Click the General tab.  
4. Choose optical disc drive for Printer.  
If the drive name is displayed in Step 4, your computer's optical disc drive  
supports Labelflash.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-18  
 
Introduction  
Windows Mobility  
Center  
This section describes the Windows Mobility  
Center. Mobility Center is a utility for accessing  
several mobile PC settings quickly in one  
window. A default maximum of eight tiles are  
provided by the operating system, and the  
additional two tiles are added to your Mobility  
Center.  
■ Lock Computer:  
This can be used to lock your computer without  
turning it off. This has the same function as the  
Lock button at the bottom of the right pane in the  
start menu.  
■ TOSHIBA Assist:  
This can be used to open TOSHIBA Assist if it is  
already installed in your computer.  
TOSHIBA DVD  
PLAYER  
This software is provided for playback of DVD  
Video.It has an on-screen interface and  
functions. Click Start -> All Programs ->  
TOSHIBA DVD PLAYER.  
Frame dropping, audio skipping or out of synch audio and video may occur  
during playback of some DVD Video titles. Make sure to connect the  
computer's AC adaptor when playing a DVD Video. Power-saving features  
may interfere with smooth playback.  
CD/DVD Drive  
Acoustic Silencer  
The CD/DVD Drive Acoustic Silencer utility  
allows you to configure the read speed at which  
the optical disc drive will operate. In use you can  
select either Normal Mode, which will operate  
the drive at its maximum speed for quick data  
access, or Quiet Mode, which operates the drive  
at single speed for audio CD playback and which  
can lessen the operational noise. This utility does  
not have any function when using DVD's.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-19  
Introduction  
Optinal accessories  
You are able to add a number of options and accessories in order to make  
your computer even more powerful and convenient to use. For reference,  
the following list details some of the items that are available from your  
reseller or TOSHIBA dealer:  
Memory expansion  
1,024MB or 2,048MB memory module  
(DDR2-800) can easily be installed in the  
computer.  
Battery Pack  
An additional battery pack can be purchased for  
use as either a spare or replacement. Please  
refer to Chapter 6, Power for futher information.  
Universal AC  
Adaptor  
If you frequently use your computer at more than  
one site, it may be convenient to purchase an  
additional AC adaptor to be kept at each site in  
order to remove the need to always carry the  
adaptor with you.  
USB FDD Kit  
The USB floppy diskette drive accommodates  
either a 1.44MB or 720KB floppy diskette through  
connection to one of the computer's USB ports.  
In use, please be aware that, while you cannot  
format 720KB floppy diskettes under Windows  
Vista®, you are able to read and write to diskettes  
that have already been formatted.  
Battery Charger  
The optional battery charger allows you to  
charge extra battery packs outside of having to  
use the computer.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1-20  
       
Chapter 2  
The Grand Tour  
This chapter identifies the various components of the computer - it is  
recommended that you become familiar with each before you operate the  
computer.  
Legal Footnote (Non-applicable Icons)*9  
For more information regarding Non-applicable Icons, please refer to the  
Legal Footnotes section in Chapter 11 or click the *9 above.  
Please handle your computer carefully to avoid scratching or damaging the  
surface.  
Front with the display closed  
The following figure shows the computer’s front with its display panel in the  
closed position.  
WLAN LED  
Infraredreceiver  
window  
Wireless  
communication  
switch  
Figure 2-1 Front of the computer with display closed  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-1  
         
The Grand Tour  
Wireless  
communication  
switch  
Slide this switch to the right to turn on Wireless  
LAN and Bluetooth functions. Slide it to the left to  
turn off the functions.  
All models are provided with a Wireless  
communication switch although only some  
models are equipped with both Wireless LAN  
and Bluetooth functions.  
■ Turn Wi-Fi® and Bluetooth functionalities off when near a person who  
may have a cardiac pacemaker implant or other medical electric  
device. Radio waves may affect pacemaker or medical device  
operation, possibly resulting in serious injury. Follow the instruction of  
your medical device when using any Wi-Fi or Bluetooth functionality.  
■ Always turn off Wi-Fi or Bluetooth functionality if the computer is near  
automatic control equipment or appliances such as automatic doors or  
fire detectors. Radio waves can cause malfunction of such equipment,  
possibly resulting in serious injury.  
■ Do not use the Wi-Fi or Bluetooth functionalities near a microwave  
oven or in areas subject to radio interference or magnetic fields.  
Interference from a microwave oven or other source can disrupt Wi-Fi  
or Bluetooth operation.  
This is a sensor window that receives signals  
from the remote control which is provided with  
your computer.  
Infrared receiver  
window  
Models which do not include a remote controller are not equipped with an  
infrared received so the computer cannot be operated with a remote  
controller.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-2  
 
The Grand Tour  
Left side  
The following figure shows the computer's left side.  
Headphones/  
Bridge Media  
Slot  
i.LINK  
(IEEE1394)  
S/PDIF,  
Line Out  
Universal  
Microphone  
/Line in  
DVD Super  
Multidrive  
Serial Bus  
(USB 2.0) port  
Figure 2-2 The left side of the computer  
Optical disc drive  
The computer is configured with a DVD Super  
Multi drive.  
Universal Serial Bus Two Universal Serial Bus ports, which comply  
(USB 2.0) ports  
with the USB 2.0 standard, are provided on the  
left hand side of the computer. The ports with the  
icon ( ) has USB Sleep and Charge function.  
Keep foreign metal objects, such as screws, staples and paper clips, out of  
the USB connectors. Foreign metal objects can create a short circuit,  
which can cause damage and fire, possibly resulting in serious injury.  
Please note that it is not possible to confirm the operation of all functions of  
all USB devices that are available. In view of this it may be noted that  
some functions associated with a specific device might not operate  
properly.  
This slot lets you insert an SD™/SDHC™  
memory card, miniSD™/microSD™ Card,  
Bridge media slot  
Memory Stick® (Duo™/PRO™/PRO Duo™),  
xD-Picture Card™ and MultiMediaCard™. Refer  
to Chapter 9, Optional Devices.  
Keep foreign metal objects, such as screws, staples and paper clips, out of  
the Bridge media slot. Foreign metal objects can create a short circuit,  
which can cause damage and fire, possibly resulting in serious injury.  
User’s Manual  
2-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
The Grand Tour  
Headphone, S/PDIF  
and Line out jack  
A 3.5 mm mini headphone jack that lets you  
connect digital speakers or a stereo headphone  
(16 ohm minimum). When you connect a digital  
speaker or headphones, the internal speaker is  
automatically disabled.  
This jack can be used also as S/PDIF jack and  
enables connection of optical digital  
correspondence apparatus.  
Microphone and  
Line in jack  
A 3.5 mm mini microphone jack enables  
connection of a three-conductor mini jack for  
monaural microphone input, and connection of a  
stereo device for audio input.  
i.LINK (IEEE1394)  
port  
This port allows you to connect an external  
device, such as a digital video camera, to the  
computer for high-speed data transfer.  
Right side  
The following figure shows the computer’s right side.  
USB  
Infrared  
transmitter  
cable port  
Express  
Card Slot  
HDMI  
Security  
Lock  
Figure 2-3 The right side of the computer  
Security lock slot  
A security cable can be attached to this slot and  
then connected to a desk or other large object in  
order to deter theft of the computer.  
Universal Serial Bus The Universal Serial Bus port, which complies  
(USB 2.0) port  
with the USB 2.0 standard, is provided on the  
right side of the computer.  
ExpressCard slot  
This slot allows you to install a single  
ExpressCard device.  
Slim size remote controller is contained in the  
ExpressCard slot. Some models are equipped  
with a Slim size remote controller.  
User’s Manual  
2-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
The Grand Tour  
Keep foreign metal objects, such as screws, staples and paper clips, out of  
the ExpressCard slot and PC Card slot. Foreign metal objects can create a  
short circuit, which can cause damage and fire, possibly resulting in  
serious injury.  
HDMI out port  
HDMI out port can connect with Type A  
connector HDMI cable.One HDMI cable can  
send video and audio signals. In addition to this,  
it can send and receive control signals.  
By connecting a TV which supports HDMI  
Control to this port, the remote control for the  
connected TV can be used to operate some of  
the computer functions.Refer to the REGZA Link  
section in Chapter 9, Optional Devices, for more  
details.  
Infrared transmitter  
cable port  
Connect the Infrared transmitter cable to this  
port.Connecting the set top box or other external  
device to the computer using the infrared  
transmitter cable allows the external device to be  
operated using the computer and specialized  
remote control.  
Back  
The following figure shows the computer’s back.  
External  
monitor port  
eSATA/USB  
combo port  
TV antenna port  
DC in jack  
USB  
LAN jack  
Modem Jack or  
FM antenna port  
or no port  
Figure 2-4 The back of the computer  
User’s Manual  
2-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
The Grand Tour  
TV antenna port  
DC IN 19V jack  
Connect the antenna cable to this port to watch  
TV programs on your computer or record them.  
The dimensions and shape of the TV antenna  
port vary for different regions.  
The AC adaptor connects to this jack in order to  
power the computer and charge its internal  
batteries. Please note that you should only use  
the model of AC adaptor supplied with the  
computer at the time of purchase - using the  
wrong AC adaptor can cause damage to the  
computer.  
Cooling vents  
The cooling vents help keep the processor from  
overheating.  
Do not block the cooling vents. Keep foreign metal objects, such as  
screws, staples and paper clips, out of the cooling vents. Foreign metal  
objects can create a short circuit, which can cause damage and fire,  
possibly resulting in serious injury.  
Universal Serial Bus (USB 2.0) portOne Universal Serial Bus port,  
(USB 2.0) ports  
which complies to the USB 2.0 standard, is  
provided on the left hand side of the computer.  
The ports with the icon ( ) has USB Sleep and  
Charge function.  
eSATA/USB combo  
port  
This Universal Serial Bus port, which complies to  
the USB 2.0 standard, is provided on the back of  
the computer. The ports with the icon ( ) has  
USB Sleep and Charge function. This port has  
eSATA (External Serial ATA) function.  
External monitor  
port  
This port allows you to connect an external  
monitor to the computer.  
LAN jack  
This jack lets you connect to a LAN. The adaptor  
has built-in support for Ethernet LAN (10  
megabits per second, 10BASE-T), Fast Ethernet  
LAN (100 megabits per second, 100BASE-TX)  
and Gigabit Ethernet LAN (1000 megabits per  
second, 1000BASE-T). The LAN has two  
indicators. Refer to Chapter 4, Operating Basics,  
for details.  
■ Do not connect any cable other than a LAN cable to the LAN jack. It  
could cause damage or malfunction.  
■ Do not connect the LAN cable to a power supply. It could cause  
damage or malfunction.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-6  
       
The Grand Tour  
Link indicator  
(green)  
This indicator glows green when the computer is  
connected to a LAN and the LAN is functioning  
properly.  
LAN active indicator This indicator glows yellow when data is being  
(yellow)  
exchanged between the computer and the LAN.  
Modem jack  
The modem jack allows you use to attach a  
modular cable in order to connect the internal  
modem directly to a telephone line.  
Some models are equipped with a built-in  
modem.  
■ Connection to any communication line other than an analog phone line  
could cause a computer system failure.  
■ Connect the built-in modem only to ordinary analog phone lines.  
■ Never connect the built-in modem to a digital line (ISDN).  
■ Never connect the built-in modem to the digital connector on a  
public telephone or to a digital private branch exchange (PBX).  
■ Never connect the built-in modem to a key telephone system for  
residences or offics.  
■ Avoid using your computer modem with the telephone cable connected  
during an electrical storm. There may be a remote risk of electric shock  
from lightning.  
FM tuner jack  
A FM tuner jack enables FM tuner antenna  
connection. Some models are equipped with an  
FM tuner jack.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-7  
     
The Grand Tour  
Underside  
The following figure shows the underside of the computer. You should  
ensure that the display is closed before the computer is turned over to  
avoid causing any damage.  
Memory  
Battery  
Hard disk  
drive  
Subwoofer  
Cooling Vent  
Figure 2-5 The underside of the computer  
The above illustration is of the subwoofer equipped model. Models without  
the subwoofer have cooling vents in the subwoofer location pictured  
above. Models with the subwoofer do not have cooling vents in the  
subwoofer location pictured above.  
Memory module  
slots  
The memory module slots are located here. The  
memory module slots allow for the installation,  
replacement and removal of additional memory  
modules. Please refer to the Additional memory  
module section in Chapter 9, Optional Devices  
for more information.  
Battery safety lock  
Slide this latch into its 'Unlock' position in order to  
release the battery pack ready for removal.  
Battery release latch Slide and hold this latch into its 'Unlock' position  
in order to release the battery pack ready for  
removal.  
For more detailed information on removing the  
battery pack please refer to Chapter 6, Power.  
User’s Manual  
2-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The Grand Tour  
Battery pack  
The battery pack provides power to the computer  
when the AC adaptor is not connected. For more  
detailed information on the use and operation of  
the battery pack please refer to Chapter 6,  
Power.  
Speaker (subwoofer) The subwoofer will reproduce of the low  
frequency sounds generated.  
Cooling vents  
The computer's cooling vents help keep the  
processor from overheating.  
Front with the display open  
This section shows the computer with the display panel open. In order to  
open the display, simply push the display latch on the front of the computer,  
lift the display panel up and position it at a comfortable viewing angle for  
you.  
Web Camera LED  
Web Camera  
Wireless LAN antennas  
Wireless LAN antenna  
(Not shown)  
(Not shown)  
Microphone  
Display Screen  
Stereo speaker (right)  
Bluetooth antenna  
(Not shown)  
Touchpad  
LCD Sensor  
Finger Print  
Sensor  
(Not shown)  
Stereo speaker  
(left)  
Touchpad  
button  
Front operation  
panel  
System  
Indicators  
Volume dial  
Figure 2-6 The front of the Touch Pad model with the display open  
Display hinge  
The display hinge allows the display panel to be  
position at a variety of easy-to-view angles.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-9  
         
The Grand Tour  
Stereo speakers  
The speakers emit sound generated by your  
software as well as audio alarms, such as low  
battery condition, generated by the system.  
Keep foreign objects out of the speakers. Never allow metal objects, such  
as screws, staples and paper clips, to enter the computer or keyboard.  
Foreign metal objects can create a short circuit, which can cause computer  
damage and fire, possibly resulting in serious injury.  
Display screen  
Please be aware that, when the computer is  
operating on the AC adaptor, the image  
displayed on the internal screen will be  
somewhat brighter than when it operates on  
battery power. This difference in brightness  
levels is intended to save power when operating  
on batteries. For more information on the  
computer's display, please refer to the Display  
Controller and Video modes section in Appendix  
B.  
Front operation  
Nine panels are available for use:  
panel (nine panels)  
CD/DVD, Play/Pause, Stop, Previous, Next,  
Mute, Illumination On/Off, Camera and DOLBY.  
These panels allow you to manage Audio/Video,  
run applications and access utilities.  
Refer to Chapter 8, AV functions for details.  
Power button  
Touch Pad  
Press this button to turn the computer's power on  
and off.  
The Touch Pad mouse control device located in  
the center of the palm rest is used to control the  
movement of the on-screen pointer. For more  
information, please refer to the Using the Touch  
Pad section in Chapter 4, Operating Basics.  
Touch Pad control  
buttons  
The control buttons located below the Touch Pad  
allow you to select menu items or manipulate text  
and graphics as designated by the on-screen  
pointer.  
Fingerprint Sensor  
This sensor enables you to enroll and recognize  
a fingerprint.For detailed information on  
Fingerprint Sensor, refer to Chapter 4, Using the  
Fingerprint Sensor. Some models are equipped  
with an Fingerprint Sensor.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-10  
   
The Grand Tour  
System indicators  
Web Camera  
These LED indicators allow you to monitor the  
status of various computer functions and are  
described in more detail within the System  
indicators section.  
Web Camera is a device that allows you to  
record video or take photographs with your  
computer. You can use it for video chatting or  
video conferences using a communication tool  
such as Windows Live Messenger. Camera  
Assistant Software will help you to add various  
video effects to your video or photograph.  
Enables the transmission of video and use of  
video chat via the internet using specialized  
applications.  
The effective pixel count for this web camera is  
1.31 million (maximum photograph size:  
1280x1024 pixels).  
Please refer to the Web Camera section in  
Chapter 4, Operating Basics.  
Web Camera LED  
LCD Sensor switch  
The Web Camera LED glows when the Web  
Camera is operating.  
Please remove the protective plastic-film before  
using the Web Camera.  
This switch senses when the display panel is  
either closed or opened and activates the Panel  
Power Off/On feature as appropriate. For  
example, when you close the display panel the  
computer enters Hibernation Mode and shuts  
itself down and then, when you next open the  
display, the computer will automatically start up  
and return you to the application you were  
previously working on.  
You can specify within the Power Options. To  
access it, click Start -> Control Panel -> System  
and Maintenance -> Power Options.  
Do not put any magnetic objects close to this switch as they may cause the  
computer to automatically enter Hibernation Mode and shut down even if  
the Panel Power Off feature is disabled.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-11  
The Grand Tour  
Volume control dial  
Use this dial to adjust the volume of the internal  
stereo speakers and optional external stereo  
headphones (if connected).  
Move the Volume control dial to the right to  
decrease the volume and to the left to increase  
the volume.  
Microphone  
A built-in microphone allows you to import and  
record sounds for your application - please refer  
to the Sound system section in Chapter 4,  
Operating Basics for more information.  
Bluetooth antenna  
Some computers in this series are equipped with  
a Bluetooth antenna.  
Wireless LAN  
antennas  
Some computers in this series are equipped with  
a Wireless LAN antennas.  
System indicators  
The LED system indicators for specific computer operations glow when  
those operations are in progress.  
Figure 2-7 System indicators  
DC IN  
The DC IN indicator normally glows blue when  
power is being correctly supplied from the AC  
power adaptor. However, If the output voltage  
from the adaptor is abnormal, or if the computer's  
power supply malfunctions, this indicator will  
flash amber.  
Power  
Battery  
The Power indicator normally glows blue when  
the computer is turned on. However, if you turn  
the computer off into Sleep Mode, this indicator  
will flash amber - approximately one second on,  
two seconds off - both while the system is  
shutting down and while it remains turned off.  
The Battery indicator shows the condition of the  
battery's charge - blue indicates the battery is  
fully charged, amber indicates the battery is  
charging, and flashing amber indicates a low  
battery condition. Please refer to Chapter 6,  
Power for more information on this feature.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-12  
                 
The Grand Tour  
Hard Disk Drive  
The Hard Disk Drive indicator glows blue  
whenever the computer is accessing the built-in  
hard disk drive or the other drives.  
Bridge media slot  
The Bridge media slot indicator glows blue  
when the computer is accessing the Bridge  
media slot.  
Keyboard indicators  
The following figures show the positions of the CAPS LOCK indicator and  
the keypad overlay indicators which show the following conditions:  
■ When the CAPS LOCK indicator glows, the keyboard will produce  
capitals when any letter is typed.  
■ When the Arrow Mode indicator glows, the keypad overlay allows you to  
use cursor functions.  
■ When the Numeric Mode indicator glows, the keypad overlay allows  
you to enter numbers.  
CAPS LOCK indicator  
Figure 2-8 Keypad indicators  
CAPS LOCK  
This indicator glows green when letter keys are  
locked into their uppercase format.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-13  
   
The Grand Tour  
Arrow Mode  
When the Arrow Mode indicator lights green,  
you can use the gray labeled keys on the keypad  
overlay as cursor keys. Please refer to the  
Keypad overlay section in Chapter 5, The  
Keyboard for more information.  
Numeric Mode  
When the Numeric Mode indicator lights green,  
you can use the gray labeled keys on the keypad  
overlay for number entry. Please refer to the  
Keypad overlay section in Chapter 5, The  
Keyboard for more information.  
Optical disc drives  
The computer is configured with a DVD Super Multi drive. A Serial ATA  
interface controller is used for CD/DVD-ROM operation. When the  
computer is accessing a CD/DVD, an indicator on the drive glows.For  
further information on loading and unloading discs, please refer to the  
Using TOSHIBA Face Recognition section in Chapter 4, Operating Basics.  
Region codes for DVD drives and media  
DVD Super Multi drives and their associated media are manufactured  
according to the specifications of six marketing regions. When you  
purchase DVD-Video, make sure it matches your drive, otherwise it will not  
play properly.  
Code  
Region  
1
2
3
4
Canada, United States  
Japan, Europe, South Africa, Middle East  
South East Asia, East Asia  
Australia, New Zealand, Pacific Islands, Central  
America, South America, Caribbean  
5
6
Russia, Indian Subcontinent, Africa, North Korea,  
Mongolia  
China  
Writable discs  
This section describes the types of writable CD/DVD discs. Check the  
specifications of your drive to see the types of discs it can write. Use  
TOSHIBA Disc Creator to write compact discs. Please refer to Chapter 4,  
Operating Basics for further information.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-14  
   
The Grand Tour  
CDs  
■ CD-R discs can be written only once. The recorded data cannot be  
erased or changed.  
■ CD-RW discs including multi speed CD-RW discs, high-speed CD-RW  
discs and ultra-speed CD-RW discs can be recorded more than once.  
DVDs  
■ DVD-R, DVD+R, DVD-R (Dual Layer) and DVD+R (Double Layer) discs  
can be written only once. The recorded data cannot be erased or  
changed.  
■ DVD-RW, DVD+RW and DVD-RAM discs can be recorded more than  
once.  
Formats  
The drive supports the following formats. DVD Super Multi driveThe drive  
supports the formats CD-ROM, DVD-ROM, DVD-Video, CD-DA, CD-Text,  
Photo CDTM (single/multi-session), CD-ROM Mode 1, Mode 2, CD-ROM XA  
Mode 2 (Form1, Form2), Enhanced CD (CD-EXTRA), Addressing Method  
2, CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW, DVD+R, DVD+R DL,  
DVD+RW and DVD-RAM.  
Some types and formats of DVD-R (Dual Layer) and DVD+R (Double  
Layer) discs may be unreadable.  
DVD Super-Multi ROM drive  
The full-size DVD-ROM module allows you to record data to recordable  
CD's and DVD's as well as run either 12cm (4.72") CD's, and DVD's, and  
8cm (3.15") CD's and DVD's without using an adaptor.  
The speed is slower at the center of a disc and faster at the outer edge.  
DVD read  
8 speed (maximum)  
8 speed (maximum)  
6 speed (maximum)  
6 speed (maximum)  
8 speed (maximum)  
6 speed (maximum)  
8 speed (maximum)  
5 speed (maximum)  
24 speed (maximum)  
24 speed (maximum)  
24 speed (maximum,  
Ultra-speed media)  
DVD-R write  
DVD-R DL write  
DVD-RW write  
DVD+R write  
DVD+R DL write  
DVD+RW write  
DVD-RAM write  
CD read  
CD-R write  
CD-RW write  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-15  
The Grand Tour  
AC adaptor  
The AC adaptor can automatically adjust to any voltage ranging from 90 to  
260 volts and to a frequency of either 50 or 60 hertz, enabling you to use  
this computer in almost any country/region. The adaptor converts AC  
power to DC power and reduces the voltage supplied to this computer.  
To recharge the battery, simply connect the AC adaptor to a power source  
and to the computer. Please refer to Chapter 6, Power for further  
information.  
Figure 2-9 The AC adaptor (2-pin plug)  
Figure 2-10 The AC adaptor (3-pin plug)  
■ Depending on the model in question, either a 2-pin or 3-pin  
adaptor/power lead will be bundled with the computer.  
■ Do not use a 3-pin to 2-pin conversion plug.  
■ The supplied power cord conforms to safety rules and regulations in  
the region the product is bought and should not be used outside of this  
region. In order to use the adaptor/computer in other regions, you  
should please buy a power cord that conforms to the safety rules and  
regulations in that particular region.  
Always use the TOSHIBA AC adaptor that was included with your  
computer, or use AC adaptors specified by TOSHIBA to avoid any risk of  
fire or other damage to the computer. Use of an incompatible AC adaptor  
could cause fire or damage to the computer possibly resulting in serious  
injury. TOSHIBA assumes no liability for any damage caused by use of an  
incompatible adaptor.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-16  
   
Chapter 3  
Getting Started  
This chapter provides basic information to start using your computer. It  
covers the following topics:  
■ If the battery pack is not pre-installed in the computer that you  
purchased, please install the battery pack before you start using the  
computer.  
Please refer to Chapter6-9, Replacing the battery pack for further  
information about installing the battery pack.  
■ All users should be sure to read the section Starting up for the first time.  
■ Be sure to read the enclosed Instruction Manual for Safety and Comfort  
for information on the safe and proper use of this computer. It is  
intended to help you be more comfortable and productive while using a  
notebook computer. By following the recommendations in it you may  
reduce your chance of developing a painful or disabling injury to your  
hand, arms, shoulders or neck.  
■ Connecting the AC adaptor  
■ Opening the display  
■ Turning on the power  
■ Starting up for the first time  
■ Turning off the power  
■ Restarting the computer  
■ System Recovery Options  
■ Creating Optical Recovery Discs  
■ Restoring the pre-installed software from the Recovery hard disk drive  
■ Restoring the pre-installed software from your created Recovery Discs  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-1  
     
Getting Started  
■ Use a virus-check program and make sure it is updated regularly.  
■ Never format storage media without checking its content - formatting  
destroys all stored data.  
■ It is a good idea to periodically back up the internal hard disk drive or  
other main storage device to external media. General storage media is  
not durable or stable over long periods of time and under certain  
conditions may result in data loss.  
■ Before you install a device or application, save any data in memory to  
the hard disk drive or other storage media. Failure to do so may result  
in the loss of data.  
Connecting the AC adaptor  
Attach the AC adaptor when you need to charge the battery or you want to  
operate from AC power. It is also the fastest way to get started, because  
the battery pack will need to be charged before you can operate from  
battery power.  
The AC adaptor can be connected to any power source supplying from 90  
to 260 volts and 50 or 60 hertz. For details on using the AC adaptor to  
charge the battery pack, refer to Chapter 6, Power.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-2  
   
Getting Started  
■ Always use the TOSHIBA AC adaptor that was included with your  
computer or use AC adaptors specified by TOSHIBA to avoid any risk  
of fire or other damage to the computer. Use of an incompatible AC  
adaptor could cause fire or damage to the computer possibly resulting  
in serious injury. TOSHIBA assumes no liability for any damage caused  
by use of an incompatible adaptor.  
■ Never plug the AC adaptor into a power source that does not  
correspond to both the voltage and the frequency specified on the  
regulatory label of the unit. Failure to do so could result in a fire or  
electric shock, possibly resulting in serious injury.  
■ Always use or purchase power cables that comply with the legal  
voltage and frequency specifications and requirements in the country of  
use. Failure to do so could result in a fire or electric shock, possibly  
resulting in serious injury.  
■ The supplied power cord conforms to safety rules and regulations in  
the region the product is bought and should not be used outside this  
region. For use in other regions, please buy power cords that conform  
to safety rules and regulations in the particular region.  
■ Do not use a 3-pin to 2-pin conversion plug.  
■ When you connect the AC adaptor to the computer, always follow the  
steps in the exact order as described in the User’s Manual. Connecting  
the power cable to a live electrical outlet should be the last step  
otherwise the adaptor DC output plug could hold an electrical charge  
and cause an electrical shock or minor bodily injury when touched. As  
a general safety precaution, avoid touching any metal parts.  
■ Never place your computer or AC adaptor on a wooden surface,  
furniture, or any other surface that could be marred by exposure to heat  
since the computer base and AC adaptor's surface increase in  
temperature during normal use.  
■ Always place your computer or AC adaptor on a flat and hard surface  
that is resistant to heat damage.  
Refer to the enclosed Instruction Manual for Safety and Comfort for  
detailed precautions and handling instructions.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-3  
Getting Started  
1. Connect the power cord to the AC adaptor.  
Figure 3-1 Connecting the power cord to the AC adaptor (2-pin plug)  
Figure 3-2 Connecting the power cord to the AC adaptor (3-pin plug)  
Either a 2-pin or 3-pin adaptor/cord will be included with the computer  
depending on the model.  
2. Connect the AC adaptor's DC output plug to the DC IN 19V jack on the  
back of the computer.  
DC IN 19V Jack  
Figure 3-3 Connecting the adaptor to the computer  
3. Plug the power cord into a live wall outlet - the Battery and DC IN  
indicators on the front of the computer should glow.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-4  
Getting Started  
Opening the display  
The display panel can be opened to a wide range of angles for optimal  
viewing.  
While holding down the palm rest with one hand so that the main body of  
the computer is not raised, slowly lift the display panel - this will allow the  
angle of the display panel to be adjusted to provide optimum clarity.  
Display panel  
Figure 3-4 Opening the display  
Use reasonable care when opening and closing the display panel. Opening  
it vigorously or slamming it shut could damage the computer.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-5  
   
Getting Started  
■ As the display panel cannot be opened until 180 degrees, please be  
careful of the angle when flipping open the display panel.  
■ Be careful not to open the display panel too far as this could put stress  
on the display panel’s hinges and cause damage.  
■ Do not press or push on the display panel.  
■ Do not lift the computer by the display panel.  
■ Do not close the display panel with pens or any other objects left in  
between the display panel and the keyboard.  
■ When opening or closing the display panel, place one hand on the  
palm rest to hold the computer in place and use the other hand to  
slowly open or close the display panel (Do not use excessive force  
when opening or closing the display panel).  
Turning on the power  
This section describes how to turn on the power - the Power indicator will  
then indicate the status. Please refer to the Monitoring of power condition  
section in Chapter 6, Power for more information.  
■ After you turn on the power for the first time, do not turn it off until you  
have set up the operating system. Please refer to the section Starting  
up for the first time for more information.  
■ Volume cannot be adjusted during Windows Setup.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-6  
   
Getting Started  
1. Open the computer's display panel.  
2. Press the computer's power button.  
Power button  
Figure 3-5 Turning on the power  
Starting up for the first time  
The Microsoft Windows Vista® Startup Screen will be the first screen  
displayed when you turn on the power. Follow the on-screen instructions on  
each screen in order to properly install the operating system.  
When it is displayed, be sure to read the Software License Terms  
carefully.  
Turning off the power  
The power can be turned off in one of three modes, either Shut Down  
Mode, Hibernation Mode or Sleep Mode.  
Shut Down Mode  
When you turn off the power in Shut Down Mode no data will be saved and  
the computer will boot to the operating system's main screen the next time  
it is turned on.  
1. If you have entered data, either save it to the hard disk drive or to other  
storage media.  
2. Make sure all disk/disc activity has stopped before removing the  
CD/DVD or floppy diskette.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-7  
         
Getting Started  
■ Make sure the Hard Disk Drive indicator is off. If you turn off the power  
while a disk (disc) is being accessed, you may lose data or damage the  
disk.  
■ Never turn off the power while an application is running. Doing so could  
cause loss of data.  
■ Never turn off the power, disconnect an external storage device or  
remove storage media during data read/write. Doing so can cause data  
loss.  
3. Click Start.  
4. Click the arrow button (  
) located in the power management buttons  
(
) and select Shut Downfrom the menu.  
5. Turn off any peripheral devices connected to your computer.  
Do not turn the computer or peripheral devices back on immediately - wait  
a short period to avoid any potential damage.  
Sleep Mode  
If you have to interrupt your work, you are able to turn off the power without  
exiting from your software by placing the computer into Sleep Mode. In this  
mode data is maintained in the computer's main memory so that when you  
turn on the power again, you can continue working right where you left off.  
When you have to turn off your computer aboard an aircraft or in places  
where electronic devices are regulated or controlled, always completely  
shut down the computer. This includes turning off any wireless  
communication switches or devices, and canceling settings that reactivate  
the computer automatically, such as a timer recording function. Failure to  
completely shut down the computer in this way could allow the operating  
system to reactivate and run pre-programmed tasks or preserve unsaved  
data, which could interfere with aviation or other systems, possibly causing  
serious injury.  
■ Before entering Sleep Mode, be sure to save your data.  
■ Do not install or remove a memory module while the computer is in  
Sleep Mode. The computer or the memory module could be damaged.  
■ Do not remove the battery pack while the computer is in Sleep Mode  
(unless the computer is connected to an AC power source). Data in  
memory could be lost.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-8  
   
Getting Started  
■ When the AC adaptor is connected, the computer will go into Sleep Mode  
according to the settings in the Power Options (to access it, Start ->  
Control Panel -> System and Maintenance -> Power Options).  
■ To restore the operation of the computer from Sleep Mode, press and  
hold the power button or any key on the keyboard for a short amount of  
time. Please note that keyboard keys can only be used if the Wake-up  
on Keyboard option is enabled within the HW Setup utility.  
■ If the computer enters Sleep Mode while a network application is  
active, the application might not be restored when the computer is next  
turned on and the system returns from Sleep Mode.  
■ To prevent the computer from automatically entering Sleep Mode,  
disable Sleep Mode within the Power Options (to access it, Start ->  
Control Panel -> System and Maintenance -> Power Options).  
■ To use the Hybrid Sleep function, configure it in the Power Options.  
Benefits of Sleep Mode  
The Sleep Mode feature provides the following benefits:  
■ Restores the previous working environment more rapidly than does the  
Hibernation Mode feature.  
■ Saves power by shutting down the system when the computer receives  
no input or hardware access for the time period set by the System  
Sleep Mode feature.  
■ Allows the use of the panel power off feature.  
Executing Sleep Mode  
You can also enable Sleep Mode by pressing FN + F3 - please refer to  
Chapter 5, The Keyboard, for further details.  
You can enter Sleep Mode in one of four ways:  
■ Click Start then click the power button (  
) located in the power  
management buttons (  
).  
Please note that this feature must be enabled within the Power Options  
(to access it, click Start -> Control Panel -> System and Maintenance  
-> Power Options).  
■ Click Start then click the arrow button (  
) and select Sleepfrom the  
menu.  
■ Close the display panel. Please note that this feature must be enabled  
within the Power Options (to access it, click Start -> Control Panel ->  
System and Maintenance -> Power Options).  
■ Press the power button. Please note that this feature must be enabled  
within the Power Options (to access it, click Start -> Control Panel ->  
System and Maintenance -> Power Options).  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-9  
Getting Started  
When you turn the power back on, you can continue where you left when  
you shut down the computer.  
■ When the computer is in Sleep Mode, the Power indicator will blink  
amber.  
■ If you are operating the computer on battery power, you can lengthen  
the overall operating time by turning it off into Hibernation Mode - Sleep  
Mode will consume more power while the computer is off.  
Sleep Mode limitations  
Sleep Mode will not function under the following conditions:  
■ Power is turned back on immediately after shutting down.  
■ Memory circuits are exposed to static electricity or electrical noise.  
Hibernation Mode  
The Hibernation Mode feature saves the contents of memory to the hard  
disk drive when the computer is turned off so that, the next time it is turned  
on, the previous state is restored. Please note that the Hibernation Mode  
feature does not save the status of any peripheral devices connected to the  
computer.  
■ Save your data. While entering Hibernation Mode, the computer saves  
the contents of memory to the hard disk drive. However, for safety  
sake, it is best to save your data manually.  
■ Data will be lost if you remove the battery or disconnect the AC adaptor  
before the save is completed. Wait for the Hard Disk Drive indicator to  
go out.  
■ Do not install or remove a memory module while the computer is in  
Hibernation Mode. Data will be lost.  
Benefits of Hibernation Mode  
The Hibernation Mode feature provides the following benefits:  
■ Saves data to the hard disk drive when the computer automatically  
shuts down because of a low battery condition.  
■ You can return to your previous working environment immediately when  
you turn on the computer.  
■ Saves power by shutting down the system when the computer receives  
no input or hardware access for the time period set by the System  
Hibernate feature.  
■ Allows the use of the panel power off feature.  
Starting Hibernation Mode  
You can also enable Hibernation Mode by pressing FN + F4 - please refer  
to Chapter 5, The Keyboard, for further details.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-10  
 
Getting Started  
To enter Hibernation Mode, follow the steps below.  
1. Click Start.  
2. Click the arrow button (  
) in the power management buttons  
(
) and select Hibernatefrom the menu.  
Automatic Hibernation Mode  
The computer can be configured to enter Hibernation Mode automatically  
when you press the power button or close the lid. In order to define these  
settings, you can follow the steps as described below:  
1. Click Start and click the Control Panel.  
2. Click System and Maintenance and click Power Options.  
3. Click Choose what the power button does or Choose what closing  
the lid does.  
4. Enable the desired Hibernation Mode settings for When I press the  
power button and When I close the lid.  
5. Click the Save changes button.  
Data save in Hibernation Mode  
When you turn off the power in Hibernation Mode, the computer will take a  
moment to save the current data in memory to the hard disk drive. During  
this time, the Hard Disk Drive indicator will glow.  
After you turn off the computer, and the content of memory has been saved  
to the hard disk drive, turn off the power to any peripheral devices.  
Do not turn the computer or devices back on immediately. Wait a moment  
to let all capacitors fully discharge.  
Restarting the computer  
Certain conditions require that you reset the computer, for example if:  
■ You change certain computer settings.  
■ An error occurs and the computer does not respond to your keyboard  
commands.  
If you need to restart the computer, there are three ways this can be  
achieved:  
■ Click Start then click the arrow button (  
) in the power management  
buttons ( ) and select Restartfrom the menu.  
■ Press CTRL, ALT and DEL simultaneously (once) to display the menu  
window, then select Restart from the Shut down options.  
■ Press the power button and hold it down for five seconds. Once the  
computer has turned itself off, wait between ten and fifteen seconds  
before turning the power on again by pressing the power button.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-11  
   
Getting Started  
System Recovery Options  
About 1.5GB hidden partition is allocated on the hard disk drive for the  
System Recovery Options.  
This partition stores files which can be used to repair the system in the  
event of a problem.  
The System Recovery Options feature will be unusable if this partition is  
deleted.  
System Recovery Options  
The System Recovery Options feature is installed on the hard disk when  
shipped from the factory. The System Recovery Options menu includes  
tools to repair startup problems, run diagnostics or restore the system.  
See the Windows Help and Support content for more information about  
Startup Repair.  
The System Recovery Options can also be run manually to repair  
problems.  
The procedure is as follows. Follow the instructions shown on the  
on-screen menu.  
1. Turn off the computer.  
2. While holding the F8 key, turn on the computer.  
3. The Advanced Boot Options menu will be displayed.  
Use the arrow keys to select Repair Your Computer and press  
ENTER.  
4. Follow the on-screen instructions.  
The Windows Vista® CompletePC Backup feature can be used on  
Windows Vista® Business Edition and Ultimate Edition.  
System Recovery  
This section describes the creation of Recovery Discs and their use.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-12  
   
Getting Started  
Creating Optical Recovery Discs  
This section describes how to create Recovery Discs.  
■ Be sure to connect the AC adaptor when you create Recovery Discs.  
■ Be sure to close all other software programs except the Recovery Disc  
Creator.  
■ Do not run software such as screen savers which can put a heavy load  
on the CPU.  
■ Operate the computer at full power.  
■ Do not use power-saving features.  
■ Do not write to the disc when the virus check software is running. Wait  
for it to finish, then disable virus detection programs including any  
software that checks files automatically in the background.  
■ Do not use utilities, including those intended to enhance hard disk drive  
access speed. They may cause unstable operation and damage data.  
■ Do not shut down/log off or Sleep/Hibernate while writing or rewriting  
the disc.  
■ Set the computer on a level surface and avoid places subjected to  
vibrations such as airplanes, trains, or cars.  
■ Do not use on unstable tables or other any other unstable surfaces.  
A recovery image of the software on your computer is stored on the hard  
disk drive, and can be copied to DVD media by using the following steps:  
1. Select either blank DVD media.  
2. The application will allow you to choose from a variety of different media  
onto which the recovery image can be copied including DVD-R, DVD-R  
DL, DVD-RW, DVD+R, DVD+R DL and DVD+RW.  
Please note that some of the above media may not be compatible with the  
optical disc drive installed into your computer. You should therefore verify  
the optical disc drive supports the blank media you have chosen before  
proceeding.  
3. Turn on your computer and allow it to load the Windows Vista®  
operating system from the hard disk drive as normal.  
4. Insert the first blank media into the optical disc drive tray.  
5. Double click the Recovery Disc Creator icon on the Windows Vista®  
desktop, or select the application from Start Menu.  
6. After Recovery Disc Creator starts, select the type of media and the title  
you wish to copy, and then click the Create button.  
If your optical disc drive can only write to CDs, select 'CD' as the 'Disc Set'  
within the Recovery Disc Creator application.Otherwise, if your optical disc  
drive can write both CDs and DVDs, select the type of media you want to  
create.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-13  
Getting Started  
Restoring the pre-installed software from the Recovery hard disk  
drive  
A portion of the total hard disk drive space is configured as a hidden  
recovery partition. This partition stores files which can be used to restore  
pre-installed software in the event of a problem.  
If you subsequently set up your hard disk drive again, do not change,  
delete or add partitions in a manner other than specified in the manual,  
otherwise you may find that space for the required software is not available.  
In addition, if you use a third-party partitioning program to reconfigure the  
partitions on your hard disk drive, you may find that it becomes impossible  
to setup your computer.  
When the sound mute feature has been activated by pressing the Mute  
panel (Fn+ESC), be sure to disable this to allow sounds to be heard before  
starting the restore process. Please refer to Chapter 5, The Keyboard, for  
further details.  
You can not use System Recovery Options if restoring the pre-installed  
software without System Recovery Options.  
When you reinstall the Windows operating system, the hard disk will be  
reformatted and all data will be lost.  
1. Turn off your computer.  
2. While holding down 0 (zero) key on the keyboard, turn on your  
computer.  
3. A menu will be displayed from which you should follow the on-screen  
instructions.  
Restoring the pre-installed software from your created Recovery  
Discs  
If the pre-installed files are damaged, you are able to either use the  
Recovery Discs you have created or the hard disk drive recovery process  
to restore the computer to the state it was in when you originally received it.  
To perform this restoration, follow the steps below:  
When the sound mute feature has been activated by pressing the FN +  
ESC key, be sure to disable this to allow sounds to be heard before starting  
the restore process. Please refer to Chapter 5,The Keyboard, for further  
details.  
You can not use System Recovery Options if restoring the pre-installed  
software without System Recovery Options.  
When you reinstall the Windows operating system, the hard disk will be  
reformatted and all data will be lost.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-14  
   
Getting Started  
1. Load the Recovery Discs into the optical disc drive and turn off the  
computer's power.  
2. While holding down F12 key on the keyboard, turn on your computer -  
when the Qosmiologo screen appears, release the F12 key.  
For 2HDD Model, If HDD1 is first, go to step 3. If HDD1 is not first, do as  
follows:  
■ Select Enter Setup.  
■ Press the F9 key to set to default settings, and select the Yes.  
■ When the "In Touch with Tomorrow TOSHIBA" prompt appears,  
press the F12 key to display the Boot menu. Continue with step 3.  
3. Use the up and down cursors key to select the CD-ROM icon from the  
menu. Please refer to the Boot Priority section in Chapter 7, HW Setup  
for further information.  
4. A menu will be displayed from which you should follow the on-screen  
instructions.  
When removing pre-installed drivers / utilities or when installing, you can  
setup the respective drivers / utilities from the following folder.  
C:\TOSAPINS\***  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-15  
Chapter 4  
Operating Basics  
This chapter describes the basic operations of your computer, highlights  
the precautions that should be taken when using it.  
Using the Touch Pad  
To use the Touch Pad, simply touch and move your fingertip across it in the  
direction you want the on-screen pointer to go.  
TouchPad  
Touchpad  
Control buttons  
Figure 4-1 Touch Pad and Touch Pad control buttons  
The two buttons below the Touch Pad are used like the buttons on a  
standard mouse - press the left button to select a menu item or to  
manipulate text or graphics designated by the pointer, and press the right  
button to display a menu or other function depending on the software you  
are using.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-1  
             
Operating Basics  
You can also tap the Touch Pad to perform functions similar to those of the  
left button on a standard mouse.  
Click: Tap once  
Double-click: Tap twice  
Drag and drop: Tap to select the item(s) you want to move, leave your  
finger on the Touch Pad after the second tap and then move the item(s)  
to their new destination.  
AV Controller  
The following functions are available in this computer for operating the  
Media Center.  
This section describes an overview of each function. Please refer to  
Chapter 8, AV functions for more information.  
■ Front operation panel  
■ Remote Controller  
Front operation panel  
The Front operation panel is located above the keyboard.  
AV related functions, such as CD/DVD, Play/Pause, Stop, Previous, Next,  
Mute, Illumination On/Off, Camera and DOLBY are available.  
Remote controller  
Some models are provided with a remote controller. It can operate AV  
related functions.  
Using the Fingerprint Sensor  
Sone models has a fingerprint utility installed for the purpose of enrolling  
and recognizing fingerprints. By enrolling the ID and password onto the  
fingerprint authentication feature, it is no longer necessary to input the  
password from the keyboard. Fingerprint feature enables you to:  
■ Logon to Windows and access a security enabled homepage through  
Internet Explorer.  
■ Files and folders can be encrypted/decrypted and third party access to  
them prevented.  
■ Disable the password-protected screen-saver when returning from a  
power-saving mode such as Sleep Mode.  
■ Authentication of the User Password (and, if applicable, the HDD (Hard  
Disk Drive) Password) when booting up the computer (Pre-OS  
Authentication).  
■ Single-Swipe Sign On feature  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-2  
     
Operating Basics  
Fingerprint cannot be used in models that do not have a fingerprint module  
installed.  
How to Swipe your Finger  
Using the following steps when swiping fingers for fingerprint registration or  
authentication will help to minimize authentication failures:  
Align the first joint of the finger to the center of the sensor. Lightly touch the  
sensor and swipe finger levelly towards you until the sensor surface  
becomes visible. In performing this process, you should also take care to  
ensure that the center of your fingerprint is on the sensor.  
The following illustrations show the recommended way to swipe your finger  
over the fingerprint sensor.  
Sensor  
Sensor  
Figure 4-2 Swipe the finger  
■ Avoid swiping with your finger stiff or pressed too hard onto the sensor,  
and take care to ensure that the center of the fingerprint is touching the  
sensor before swiping. Either of these conditions may cause fingerprint  
reading to fail.  
■ Check the center of the fingerprint whorl before swiping and then  
ensure this is swiped along the center line of the sensor.  
■ There is a possibility of authentication failures if the finger is swiped too  
quickly or too slowly - follow any on-screen instructions to adjust the  
speed used during the swipe process.  
Points to note about the Fingerprint Sensor  
Please be aware of the following considerations when using the fingerprint  
sensor. A failure to follow these guidelines might result in damage to the  
sensor, sensor failure, fingerprint recognition problems or a lower  
fingerprint recognition success rate.  
■ Do not scratch or poke the sensor with your nails or any hard or sharp  
objects.  
■ Do not press the sensor strongly.  
■ Do not touch the sensor with a wet finger or any wet objects - keep the  
sensor surface dry and free from water vapor.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-3  
Operating Basics  
■ Do not touch the sensor with a soiled or dirty finger as minute foreign  
particles of dust and dirt may scratch it.  
■ Do not paste stickers or write on the sensor.  
■ Do not touch the sensor with a finger or any other object which may  
have a build-up of static electricity on it.  
Observe the following before you place your finger on the sensor whether  
for fingerprint enrollment/registration or recognition.  
■ Wash and dry your hands thoroughly.  
■ Remove static electricity from your fingers by touching any metal  
surface. Static electricity is a common cause of sensor failures,  
especially when the weather is dry.  
■ Clean the sensor with a lint-free cloth - do not use detergent or any  
other chemicals to clean the sensor.  
■ Avoid the following finger conditions for enrollment or recognition as  
they may result in fingerprint enrollment errors or a drop in the  
fingerprint recognition success rate  
■ Soaked or swollen finger, for example as may occur after taking a  
bath.  
■ Injured finger  
■ Wet finger  
■ Soiled or oily finger  
■ Extremely dry skin condition on finger  
Observe the following to improve the fingerprint recognition success rate.  
■ Enroll two or more fingers.  
■ Enroll additional fingers if a recognition failure often occurs when using  
already enrolled fingers.  
■ Check the condition of your finger - any conditions which have changed  
since enrollment, such as injury, rough skin, and extremely dry, wet,  
soiled, dirty, oily, soaked or swollen fingers, may lower the recognition  
success rate. Also if the fingerprint is worn down or the finger becomes  
thinner or fatter, the recognition success rate may be lowered.  
■ As the fingerprint for each finger is different and unique you should  
ensure that only the registered or enrolled fingerprint or fingerprints are  
used for identification.  
■ Check the position and speed at which you swipe your finger across the  
sensor - please refer to the preceding drawing.  
■ The fingerprint sensor compares and analyzes the unique  
characteristics in a fingerprint. However, there may be instances where  
certain users are unable to register their fingerprints due to insufficient  
unique characteristics in their fingerprints.  
■ The recognition success rate may differ from user to user.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-4  
Operating Basics  
Setup Procedure  
Please use the following procedure when first using fingerprint  
authentication.  
Fingerprint Registration  
You should initially enroll the required authentication data using the  
Fingerprint Enrollment Wizard.  
■ In use, the fingerprint authentication system will use the same  
username and password as defined within the Windows operating  
system. If no Windows password has been configured, you must do  
this before starting the fingerprint registration process.  
■ This sensor has the memory space for at least twenty-one fingerprint  
patterns. You might be able to register more fingerprint patterns  
depending on the sensor memory usage.  
1. To run this program, click Start -> All Programs -> TrueSuite Access  
Manager -> TrueSuite Access Manager.  
You are also able to start the Fingerprint Enrollment Wizard by using the  
following methods.  
■ Right-click the TrueSuite Access Manager icon in the Taskbar and  
choose Open.  
2. The Verify screen will be displayed, enter the Windows logon password  
and click the Next button.  
3. On the User's Fingers screen click the box above the finger you wish  
to register.  
If any of the previously enrolled fingerprints is selected again, the latest  
information will be enrolled and any previous information over-written.  
4. The Fingerprint Enrollment screen will be displayed and the tutorial  
will begin. First click "Replay video" and confirm the proper movement  
for the finger you wish to register. Then confirm the message displayed  
on this screen and ensure that there is a check mark in the Run  
Interactive Tutorial box. Once this has been done, click Next.  
5. At the Scanning Practice screen, you are able to practice swiping  
(three times) your finger to ensure you use the correct method. Click  
"Try again" to if you wish to practice again. You have finished practicing,  
click Next button.  
6. Register your fingerprint on the Fingerprint Image Capture screen.Let  
the computer read the finger to be registered 3 times. An image of your  
fingerprint will be shown on the screen each time the fingerprint is  
successfully read.  
Once the fingerprint is successfully read for the third time, the message  
Successfully combinedwill be displayed beneath the fingerprint  
images and will close the window automatically.  
7. When the Store To Sensor screen is displayed, check Store  
fingerprint to Sensor. Click Finish to complete fingerprint registration.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-5  
 
Operating Basics  
It is strongly recommended that you register 2 or more fingerprints. Repeat  
the procedure from step 3 to register another fingerprint.  
How to Delete the Fingerprint Data  
Saved fingerprint data is stored in special non-volatile memory inside the  
fingerprint sensor. Therefore, if you give the computer to someone else, or  
dispose of it in any way, the following process is recommended to delete  
your fingerprint information:  
1. To run this program, click Start -> All Programs -> TrueSuite Access  
Manager -> TrueSuite Access Manager.  
2. The Verify screen will be displayed. Swipe your registered finger to  
User’s Fingers.  
3. The User's Fingers screen is displayed.  
■ To delete all registered fingerprints  
1. Click Delete All Fingerprints.  
2. The user selection screen will be displayed, select which user's  
fingerprint data to delete and click Ok.  
■ Selecting "Delete current user's fingerprints" will delete the  
fingerprint data for the currently logged in user.  
■ Selecting "Delete all users' fingerprints" will delete the fingerprint  
data for all users, however this item can only be selected if the  
currently logged in user has administrator privileges.  
3. "Are you sure you want to delete this fingerprint?" will be displayed  
on the screen, click Yes button.  
■ To delete individual fingerprints.  
1. Click the fingerprint mark above the registered finger.  
2. "Are you sure you want to delete this fingerprint?" will be displayed  
on the screen, click Yes button.  
In use, please be aware of the following limitations of the fingerprint sensor:  
■ A warning message will be displayed when recognition is abnormal or  
recognition is not successful within a fixed duration.  
■ The fingerprint sensor compares and analyzes the unique  
characteristics in a fingerprint. However, there may be instances where  
certain users are unable to register their fingerprints due to insufficient  
unique characteristics in their fingerprints.  
■ The recognition success rate may differ from user to user.  
■ Toshiba does not guarantee that this fingerprint recognition technology  
will be error-free.  
■ Toshiba does not guarantee that the fingerprint sensor will recognize  
the enrolled user or accurately screen out unauthorized users at all  
times. Toshiba is not liable for any failure or damage that might arise out  
of the use of this fingerprint recognition software or utility.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-6  
Operating Basics  
Points to note about the Fingerprint Utility software  
You are able to backup saved fingerprint data and information within the  
PasswordBank by using the Import or Export User Data facility under the  
fingerprint management software. However, please be aware that any  
encrypted files cannot be backup within FileSafe using this function - in  
these instances it is recommended that you backup these files to external  
media using standard file copy processes.  
The Encrypting File System (EFS) is a Windows Vista® feature.  
If a file is encrypted using EFS, it cannot be encrypted further using the  
fingerprint authentication function.  
Windows Logon via Fingerprint Authentication  
If required, you are also able to use fingerprint authentication in place of the  
usual Windows logon process using your username and password.This  
method is especially useful where there are many users using the same  
computer as it removes the need for actual user selection when the system  
is started.  
Fingerprint Authentication Procedure  
1. Start up the computer.  
2. At the Windows Welcome screen, choose any of the enrolled fingers  
and swipe the fingerprint on the sensor - if the authentication process is  
successful, the user will automatically be logged in to Windows.  
f the fingerprint authentication process fails you will need to log into  
Windows using the appropriate username and password. In addition, you  
should use this manual login process if fingerprint authentication fails for  
three consecutive tries - a warning message will be displayed when  
authentication is not normal or is not successful within a fixed duration.  
Fingerprint Pre-OS Authentication  
General  
The fingerprint authentication system can be used to replace the keyboard  
based password authentication system that is used when the computer is  
turned on.  
If you do not want to use the fingerprint authentication system for password  
authentication while booting up the computer, instead you prefer using the  
keyboard entry method, simply press the BACK SPACE key when the  
Fingerprint Pre-OS Authentication screen is displayed.  
Using this process will switch the password input screen across to the  
keyboard based entry screen.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-7  
Operating Basics  
■ You must ensure that you use the TOSHIBA Password Utility to  
register a User Password before using the Fingerprint Pre-OS  
Authentication and its extended function to allow fingerprints to be used  
to access the computer when it is turned on.  
■ If the fingerprint authentication process fails five times, a preset time  
limit is exceeded, or you press the BACK SPACE key, [Password =]  
will be displayed on the screen and you will have to enter either the  
User Password or Supervisor Password manually in order to start the  
computer.  
■ When swiping your finger, please ensure that you do it slowly and at a  
constant speed. If you find that this does not improve the authentication  
rate, you should try to adjust the speed at which the finger is swiped.  
■ If there are any changes in the environment or settings related to  
authorization, you will be required to provide authorization information  
such as a User Password (and, if applicable, the HDD(Hard Disk Drive)  
password).  
How to Enable Fingerprint Pre-OS Authentication Settings  
It is necessary to first enroll your fingerprint with the Fingerprint Application  
prior to enabling and configuring the Fingerprint Pre-OS Authentication  
System. You should check that your fingerprint is enrolled before  
configuring the settings (please refer to the Manual for Fingerprint  
Registration/Enrollment for further instructions).  
1. To run this program, click Start -> All Programs -> TrueSuite Access  
Manager -> TrueSuite Access Manager with Admin Privileges.  
2. UserAccountControl screen is displayed, click the Allow button.This  
setting can only be changed if the currently logged in user has  
administrator privileges.  
3. Swipe a registered finger on the fingerprint sensor.  
4. Click the Setting menu at the TrueSuiteAccessManager screen.  
5. Administrator Setting screen is displayed, check the "Enable Pre-OS  
Fingerprint Authentication" check box and then click OK.  
6. Click the Exit button at the TrueSuiteAccessManager screen.  
Fingerprint Single-Swipe Sign-on Feature  
General  
This is a feature that allows the user to complete the authentication for both  
the User/BIOS Password and logging onto Windows using only one  
fingerprint authentication when booting up. It is necessary to register the  
User/BIOS Password and Windows Logon Password before using the  
Fingerprint Power-on Security and this Fingerprint Single Sign-on Feature.  
Please use the TOSHIBA Password Utility to register your User/BIOS  
Password. If Windows Logon is not the default for your system, see Manual  
to register your Windows Logon Password.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-8  
Operating Basics  
Only one fingerprint authentication is required to replace the User/BIOS  
Password and the Windows Logon Password.  
How to Enable Fingerprint Single-Swipe Sign-on Feature  
It is necessary to first enroll your fingerprint with the TrueSuite Access  
Manager prior to enabling and configuring the Fingerprint Single Sign-on  
feature. You should check that your fingerprint is enrolled before  
configuring the settings (please refer to the Manual for Fingerprint  
Registration/Enrollment for further instructions).  
1. To run this program, click Start -> All Programs -> TrueSuite Access  
Manager -> TrueSuite Access Manager with Admin Privileges.  
2. UserAccountControl screen is displayed, click the Allow button. This  
setting can only be changed if the currently logged in user has  
administrator privileges.  
3. Swipe a registered finger on the fingerprint sensor.  
4. Click the Settings at the TrueSuiteAccessManager screen.  
5. Administrator Settings screen is displayed, check the "Enable Pre-OS  
Fingerprint Authentication" and "Enable Single Sign-On Fingerprint  
Authentication" check box and then click OK.  
6. Click the Exit button at the TrueSuiteAccessManager screen.  
Fingerprint utility limitations  
TOSHIBA does not guarantee that the fingerprint utility technology will be  
completely secure or error-free, or that it will accurately screen out  
unauthorized users at all times. TOSHIBA is not liable for any failure or  
damage that might arise out of the use of the fingerprint software.  
■ The fingerprint sensor compares and analyzes the unique  
characteristics in a fingerprint. However, there may be instances where  
certain users are unable to register their fingerprints due to insufficient  
unique characteristics in their fingerprints.  
■ The recognition success rate may differ from user to user.  
Web Camera  
Some models are equipped with a Web Camera.  
Web Camera is a device that allows you to record video or take  
photographs with your computer. You can use it for video chatting or video  
conferences using a communication tool such as Windows Live  
Messenger. Camera Assistant Software will help you to add various  
video effects to your video or photograph.  
Enables the transmission of video and use of video chat via the internet  
using specialized applications.  
The effective pixel count for this web camera is 1.31 million (maximum  
photograph size: 1280x1024 pixels).  
Please refer to the Camera Assistant Software Online Help for details.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-9  
   
Operating Basics  
Microphone  
Web Camera  
Web Camera LED  
Figure 4-3 Web Camera  
■ Please unstick the protective plastic-film before using the Web  
Camera.  
■ Do not point the web camera directly at the sun.  
■ Do not touch or press strongly on the web camera lens. Doing so may  
reduce image quality. Use an eyeglass cleaner (cleaner cloth) or other  
soft cloth to clean the lens if it becomes dirty.  
■ Setting the [Size] to more than "800x600" will cause a larger amount of  
data to be written to the hard disk drive and may interfere with smooth  
recording.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-10  
Operating Basics  
Using TOSHIBA Face Recognition  
This feature uses a face verification library to verify the face data of users  
when they log in Windows. The user can thus avoid having to enter a  
password or the like, which makes the login process easier.  
■ TOSHIBA Face Recognition does not guarantee the correct  
identification of a user. Changes to the likeness of a registrant, such as  
hairstyle changes, wearing a cap, or wearing glasses may affect the  
recognition rates when such changes occur after the registrant had  
registered.  
■ TOSHIBA Face Recognition may incorrectly recognize faces that are  
similar to a registrant.  
■ For high security purposes, TOSHIBA Face Recognition is not a  
suitable substitute for Windows passwords. When security is a high  
priority, use your established Windows passwords to log in.  
■ Bright background light and/or shadows may prevent a registrant from  
being recognized correctly. In that case, log in using your Windows  
password. If recognition of a registrant fails repeatedly, refer to your  
computer documentation to learn ways to improve recognition  
performance.  
■ TOSHIBA Face Recognition records face data in a log when face  
recognition fails. When transferring ownership or disposing of your  
computer, please uninstall the application or delete all the logs created  
by the application. For details on how to do this, see help file.  
Disclaimer  
Toshiba does not guarantee that the face recognition utility technology will  
be completely secure or error-free. Toshiba does not guarantee that the  
face recognition utility will accurately screen out unauthorized users at all  
times. Toshiba is not liable for any failure or damage that might arise out of  
the use of the face recognition software or utility.  
TOSHIBA, ITS AFFILIATES AND SUPPLIERS SHALL HAVE NO  
RESPONSIBILITY FOR DAMAGE TO OR LOSS OF ANY BUSINESS,  
PROFITS, PROGRAMS DATA, NETWORK SYSTEMS OR REMOVABLE  
STORAGE MEDIA ARISING OUT OF OR RESULTING FROM THE USE  
OF THE PRODUCT, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY  
THEREOF.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-11  
   
Operating Basics  
How to register the Face Recognition Data  
Take a picture for facial verification purposes, and register the data needed  
when you log in. To register the data needed when you log in, follow the  
steps as described below:  
1. To launch this utility, click Start -> All Programs -> TOSHIBA ->  
Utilities -> TOSHIBA Face Recognition.  
■ The Registration screen is displayed for a logged-in user whose face  
has not been registered.  
■ The Management screen is displayed for a logged-in user whose face  
has already been registered.  
2. Click the Register face button in the Management screen. The  
Registration screen is displayed.  
■ If you wish to practice, click on the Next button in the Registration  
screen.  
■ If you do not wish to practice, click on the Skip button in the  
Registration screen.  
3. Click the Next button to start the guide.  
4. First, take a picture while moving your neck slightly to the left and right.  
5. Now take a picture while moving your neck down and up. Or click the  
Back button to practice the guide once more.  
6. Click the Next button to start image-capturing process.  
Adjust the position of your face so that it fits within the face-shaped  
frame.  
7. Once your face has been positioned properly, the recording will  
commence.  
Start moving your neck very slightly to the left and right, and then move  
your neck down and up.  
8. Registration will end after you have repeatedly moved your neck left,  
right, down and up.  
When the register succeeds, below message will be displayed on the  
screen: " Registration successful. Now we'll do the verification test.  
Click the Next button."  
Click the Next button to perform the verification test.  
9. Perform the verification test. Face the screen as you do when you  
register.  
■ If verification fails, click the Back button and re-register. Please refer to  
step 8 from step 6.  
10. If verification is successful, click the Next button and register an  
account.  
11. Register the account. Fill in the account registration fields. Fill in the all  
fields.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-12  
Operating Basics  
12. The Management screen is displayed.  
The registered account name will be displayed. Clicking on it will cause  
the captured image of your face to be displayed on the left.  
How to Delete the Face Recognition Data  
Delete image data, account information, and personal record data created  
during registration. To delete the Face Recognition Data, follow the steps  
as described below:  
1. To launch this utility, click Start -> All Programs -> TOSHIBA ->  
Utilities -> TOSHIBA Face Recognition.  
The Management screen is displayed.  
2. Select a user which is deleted in the Management screen.  
3. Click the Delete button. "You are about to delete the user data.  
Would you like to continue?" will be displayed on the screen.  
■ If you do not want the data to be deleted, click the No button and  
you will then be returned to the Management screen.  
■ Clicking on the Yes button will remove the selected user from the  
Management screen.  
How to launch the help file  
For further information on this utility, please refer to the help file.  
1. To launch the help file, click Start -> All Programs -> TOSHIBA ->  
Utilities -> TOSHIBA Face Recognition Help.  
Windows Logon via TOSHIBA Face Recognition  
This section explains how to login to Windows with TOSHIBA Face  
Recognition. Two authentication modes are provided.  
■ AUTO Mode Login screen: If the face authentication tile is selected by  
default, you can log in without using the keyboard or mouse.  
■ 1:1 Mode Login screen: This mode is essentially the same as AUTO  
mode, but the Select Account screen will appear before the Display  
Captured Image screen, and you will need to select the user account  
to be authenticated in order to start the authentication process.  
AUTO Mode Login screen  
1. Turn on the computer.  
2. The Select Tiles screen will be displayed.  
3. Select Start face recognition (  
).  
4. "Please turn your face to the camera" will be displayed.  
5. Verification will be performed. If the authentication is successful, the  
image data taken in step 4 will be faded in and placed over one another.  
■ If an error occurs during authentication, you will be returned to the  
Select Tiles screen.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-13  
Operating Basics  
6. Windows Welcome screen will be displayed, and will be logged in  
automatically to Windows.  
1:1 Mode Login screen  
1. Turn on the computer.  
2. The Select Tiles screen will be displayed.  
3. Select Start face recognition (  
).  
4. The Select Account screen will be displayed.  
5. Select the account, and click the Arrow button.  
6. "Please turn your face to the camera" will be displayed.  
7. Verification will be performed. If the authentication is successful, the  
image data taken in step 6 will be faded in and placed over one another.  
■ If an error occurs during authentication, you will be returned to the  
Select Tiles screen.  
8. Windows Welcome screen will be displayed, and will be logged in  
automatically to Windows.  
■ If authentication was successful, but an authentication error  
subsequently occurred during the login to Windows, you will be asked  
to provide your account information.  
Using optical disk drives  
The full-size drive provides high-performance execution of CD/DVD-ROM-  
based programs. You can run either 12 cm (4.72") or 8 cm (3.15")  
CD/DVDs without an adaptor. A Serial ATA interface controller is used for  
CD/DVD-ROM operation. When the computer is accessing a CD/DVD-  
ROM, an indicator on the drive glows.  
Use the DVD playback application to view DVD-Video discs.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-14  
 
Operating Basics  
Loading discs  
To load CD/DVD's, follow the steps as listed below and refer to figures 4-4  
to 4-6.  
1. When the computer's power is on, press the eject button to open the  
disc tray slightly.  
Eject button  
Figure 4-4 Pressing the eject button  
2. Grasp the disc tray gently and pull until it is fully opened.  
Disc Tray  
Figure 4-5 Pulling the disc tray open  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-15  
Operating Basics  
3. Lay the CD/DVD, label side up, in the disc tray.  
Laser lens  
Figure 4-6 Inserting a CD/DVD  
When the disc tray is fully opened, the edge of the computer will extend  
slightly over the area where you insert the media. Therefore, when loading  
a CD or DVD, you will need to turn it slightly at an angle when you place it  
in the disc tray. After loading the CD/DVD you should ensure that it is  
properly positioned over the central spindle and that it lies flat within the  
tray.  
■ Do not touch either the laser lens or the area immediately around it -  
doing so could cause misalignment and may damage the drive.  
■ Make sure that no foreign objects are inserted into or otherwise enter  
the drive.  
Check the disc tray, especially the area behind the front edge, to  
ensure that there are no foreign objects or material present before  
closing the drive.  
4. Press the center of the CD/DVD gently until you feel it click into place  
on the center spindle. The disc should be slightly below the top of the  
spindle and flush with the spindle base.  
5. Press the center of the disc tray in order to close it - the tray will click  
into place when it is locked.  
If the CD/DVD is not seated properly when the disc tray is closed, you may  
find that the media itself might become damaged, and/or the disc tray  
might not open fully when you next press the eject button.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-16  
Operating Basics  
Removing discs  
To remove CD/DVD's, follow the steps as listed below.  
Do not press the eject button while the computer is accessing the media in  
the drive, instead wait for the indicator to go out before you open the disc  
tray. In addition, if the CD/DVD media is spinning when you open the tray,  
wait for it to fully stop before you remove it.  
1. When the computer's power is on, press the eject button to open the  
disc tray slightly and then gently pull it out of the system until it is fully  
opened.  
After the disc tray has opened slightly, you should wait for a moment to  
ensure the CD/DVD media has stopped spinning before you fully open the  
tray.  
2. The CD/DVD media will extend slightly over the sides of the disc tray in  
order that you can hold it. Grasp it carefully by its edges and lift it  
vertically off of the central spindle and out of the tray.  
Figure 4-7 Removing a CD/DVD  
3. Press the center of the disc tray in order to close it - the tray will click  
into place when it is locked.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-17  
Operating Basics  
How to remove a CD/DVD when the disc tray will not open  
Pressing the eject button will not open the disc tray when the computer is  
turned off although, in these circumstances, you can open the tray by  
inserting a slender object such as a straightened paper clip about 15mm  
into the eject hole just to the right of the drive's eject button.  
Disc Tray LED  
Eject hole  
Eject button  
Figure 4-8 Manual release with the eject hole  
You must ensure that you turn off the power before you use the eject hole.  
If the CD/DVD media is spinning when you open the disc tray, it may fly off  
of the spindle and cause injury.  
Writng CD/DVD on DVD Super Multi drives  
The optical drive installed on this computer cannot write multiple sessions  
on DVD-R Dual Layer disc sessions. Once a disc has been written to once,  
it will be finalized. Once finalized, no further writing to the disc will be  
possible regardless of what portion of the total disc capacity was used.  
You can use the DVD-R drive to write data to either CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-R,  
DVD-R (Dual Layer), DVD-RW, DVD+R, DVD+R (Double Layer),  
DVD+RW, DVD-RAM, or DVD-R (Dual Layer) discs.  
TOSHIBA Disc Creator and Ulead DVD MovieFactory are provided as  
writing software with this computer.  
Ulead DVD MovieFactory can be used to write files in video format.  
TOSHIBA Disc Creator can be used to write data.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-18  
 
Operating Basics  
■ Please refer to the Writable discs, Chapter 2 for details about the types  
of writable CD and DVD discs that can be supported by this computer.  
■ Do not turn off the power to the optical disc drive while the computer is  
accessing it as this may cause you to lose data.  
■ CD-R/RW media cannot be accessed using the Create CD/DVD option  
in Media Center.  
■ To write data to CD-R/-RW media, use the TOSHIBA Disc Creator  
feature that is installed on your computer.  
When writing information to media using an optical drive, you should  
always ensure that you connect the AC adaptor to a live power socket. It is  
possible that, if data is written while powered by the battery pack, the write  
process may sometimes fail due to low battery power - in these instances  
data loss may occur.  
Important message  
Before you write or rewrite to any of the media supported by the DVD  
Super Multi drive, please read and follow all of the setup and operating  
instructions in this section. If you fail to do so, you may find that theDVD  
Super Multi drive drive may not function properly, and you may fail to write  
or rewrite information successfully - this may cause you to either lose data  
or incur other damage to the drive or media.  
Disclaimer  
TOSHIBA does not bear responsibility for the following:  
■ Damage to any CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-R, DVD-R (Dual Layer), DVD-RW,  
DVD+R, DVD+R (Double Layer), DVD+RW or DVD-RAM disc that may  
be caused by writing or rewriting with this product.  
■ Any change or loss of the recorded contents of CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-R,  
DVD-R (Dual Layer), DVD-RW, DVD+R, DVD+R (Double Layer),  
DVD+RW or DVD-RAM media that may be caused by writing or  
rewriting with this product, or for any business profit loss or business  
interruption that may be caused by the change or loss of the recorded  
contents.  
■ Damage that may be caused by using third party equipment or  
software.  
Given the technological limitations of current optical disc writing drives, you  
may experience unexpected writing or rewriting errors due to disc quality or  
problems with hardware devices. In view of this, it is good practice to make  
two or more copies of important data, in case of any undesired change or  
loss of the recorded contents.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-19  
Operating Basics  
Before writing or rewriting  
■ Based on TOSHIBA's limited compatibility testing, we suggest the  
following manufacturers of CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-R, DVD-R (Dual  
Layer), DVD-RW, DVD+R, DVD+R (Double Layer), DVD+RW or DVD-  
RAM media, however, it must be noted that disc quality can affect write  
or rewrite success rates. Please also be aware that in no event does  
TOSHIBA guarantee the operation, quality or performance of any disc.  
CD-R:  
TAIYO YUDEN CO., Ltd.  
MITSUBISHI KAGAKU MEDIA CO., LTD.  
Ricoh Co., Ltd.  
Hitachi Maxell,Ltd.  
CD-RW: (Multi-Speed and High-Speed)  
MITSUBISHI KAGAKU MEDIA CO., LTD.  
Ricoh Co., Ltd.  
CD-RW: (Ultra-Speed)  
MITSUBISHI KAGAKU MEDIA CO., LTD.  
DVD-R:  
DVD Specifications for Recordable Disc for General Version 2.0  
TAIYO YUDEN Co.,Ltd. (for 8x and 16x speed media)  
MITSUBISHI KAGAKU MEDIA CO., LTD. (for 4x, 8x and 16x speed  
media)  
Hitachi Maxell,Ltd. (for 8x and 16x speed media)  
DVD-R (Dual Layer):  
MITSUBISHI KAGAKU MEDIA CO., LTD. (for 4x and 8x speed media)  
DVD-R for Labelflash:  
FUJIFILM CORPORATION (for 16x speed media)  
DVD+R:  
MITSUBISHI KAGAKU MEDIA CO., LTD. (for 8x and 16x speed  
media)  
Ricoh Co., Ltd. (for 8x and 16x speed media)  
TAIYO YUDEN CO., Ltd. (for 8x and 16x speed media)  
DVD+R (Double Layer):  
MITSUBISHI KAGAKU MEDIA CO., LTD. (for 2.4x and 8x speed  
media)  
DVD+R for Labelflash:  
FUJIFILM CORPORATION (for 16x speed media)  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-20  
Operating Basics  
DVD-RW:  
DVD Specifications for Recordable Disc for Version 1.1 or version 1.2  
Victor Company of Japan, Ltd. (JVC) (for 2x, 4x and 6x speed media)  
MITSUBISHI KAGAKU MEDIA CO., LTD. (for 2x, 4x and 6x speed  
media)  
DVD+RW:  
Ricoh Co., Ltd. (for 2.4x, 4x and 8x speed media)  
MITSUBISHI KAGAKU MEDIA CO., LTD. (for 2.4x, 4x and 8x speed  
media)  
DVD-RAM:  
DVD Specifications for DVD-RAM Disc for Version 2.0, Version 2.1  
or Version 2.2  
Matsushita Electric Industrial Co.,Ltd. (for 3x and 5x speed media)  
Hitachi Maxell,Ltd. (for 3x and 5x speed media)  
■ DVD Super Multi drive cannot use discs that allow writing faster than  
16x speed (DVD-R and DVD+R media), 8x speed (DVD-R (Dual  
Layer), DVD+RW and DVD+R (Double Layer) media), 6x speed (DVD-  
RW media), 5x speed (DVD-RAM media).  
■ Some types and formats of DVD-R (Dual Layer) and DVD+R (Double  
Layer) discs may be unreadable.  
■ 2.6GB and 5.2GB DVD-RAM media cannot be read from or written to.  
■ DISC created in DVD-R (Dual Layer) format4 (Layer Jump Recording)  
cannot be read.  
■ If the disc is poor in quality, or is dirty or damaged, writing or rewriting  
errors may be noted - ensure that you check all discs for dirt or damage  
before you use them.  
■ The actual number of rewrites to CD-RW, DVD-RW, DVD+RW or DVD-  
RAM media will be affected by the quality of the disc itself and the way  
in which it is used.  
■ There are two types of DVD-R media available, authoring discs and  
general use discs. Do not attempt to use authoring discs as only  
general use discs can be written to by a computer drive.  
■ You can use both DVD-RAM discs that can be removed from a cartridge  
and DVD-RAM discs designed without a cartridge.  
■ You may find that other computer DVD-ROM drives or other DVD  
players may not be able to read DVD-R, DVD-R (Dual Layer), DVD-RW,  
DVD+R, DVD+R (Double Layer) or DVD+RW discs.  
■ Data written to a CD-R, DVD-R, DVD-R (Dual Layer), DVD+R or  
DVD+R (Double Layer) discs cannot be deleted either in whole or in  
part.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-21  
Operating Basics  
■ Data deleted/erased from a CD-RW, DVD-RW, DVD+RW or DVD-RAM  
disc cannot be recovered. You must check the content of the disc  
carefully before you delete it, taking care that, if multiple drives that can  
write data to discs are connected, you do not delete data from the  
wrong one.  
■ In writing to DVD-R, DVD-R (Dual Layer), DVD-RW, DVD+R, DVD+R  
(Double Layer), DVD+RW or DVD-RAM media, some space is required  
for file management, so you may not be able to write to the full capacity  
of the disc.  
■ Since the disc is based on the DVD standard, it might be filled with  
dummy data if the written data is less than about 1GB. Therefore, in  
these circumstance, even if you write only a small amount of data, it  
might take additional time to fill in the dummy data.  
■ When multiple drives that can write data to discs are connected, be  
sure that you do not write to or delete data from the wrong drive.  
■ Be sure to connect the AC adaptor to the computer before you write or  
rewrite any information.  
■ Before you enter either Sleep Mode or Hibernation Mode, take care to  
ensure that any DVD-RAM writing has been completed. In this instance,  
writing is finished if you can eject the DVD-RAM media.  
■ Be sure to close all other software programs except for the writing  
software itself.  
■ Do not run software such as a screen saver which can put a heavy load  
on the processor.  
■ Operate the computer at its full power settings - do not use any power-  
saving features.  
■ Do not write information while virus checking software is running,  
instead wait for it to finish, then disable the virus protection applications,  
including any software that checks files automatically in the  
background.  
■ Do not use any hard disk utilities, including those that are intended to  
enhance hard disk drive access speeds, as they may cause unstable  
operation and damage data.  
■ CD-RW (Ultra Speed +) media should not be used as data may be lost  
or damaged.  
■ You should always write from the computer's hard disk drive onto the  
CD/DVD - do not try to write from shared devices such as a server or  
any other network device.  
■ Writing with software other than TOSHIBA Disc Creator has not been  
confirmed, therefore operation with other software applications cannot  
be guaranteed.  
When writing or rewriting  
Please observe the following points while you write or rewrite data to CD-R,  
CD-RW, DVD-R, DVD-R (Dual Layer), DVD-RW, DVD+R, DVD+R (Double  
Layer), DVD+RW or DVD-RAM media:  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-22  
Operating Basics  
■ Always copy data from the hard disk drive to the optical media - do not  
use the cut-and-paste function as the original data will be lost if there is  
a write error.  
■ Do not perform any of the following actions:  
■ Change users in the Windows Vista® operating system.  
■ Operate the computer for any other function, including such tasks as  
using a mouse or Touch Pad, or closing/opening the display panel.  
■ Start a communication application such as a modem.  
■ Apply impact or vibration to the computer.  
■ Install, remove or connect external devices, including such items as  
a SD/SDHC memory card, miniSD/microSD Card, ExpressCard,  
Memory Stick/Memory Stick PRO/Memory Stick PRO Duo, xD  
picture card, MultiMediaCard, USB device, external monitor, i.LINK  
device, or an optical digital device.  
■ Use the audio/video control button to reproduce music or voice.  
■ Open the optical disc drive.  
■ Do not use shut down, log off, Sleep Mode or Hibernation Mode  
functions while writing or rewriting.  
■ Make sure that the write/rewrite operation is completed before going  
into either Sleep Mode or Hibernation Mode (writing is completed if you  
can remove an optical media on the DVD Super Multi drive).  
■ If the media is of poor quality, or is dirty or damaged, writing or rewriting  
errors may occur.  
■ Set the computer on a level surface and avoid places subject to  
vibration such as airplanes, trains or cars. In addition, do not use the  
computer on an unstable surface such as a stand.  
■ Keep mobile phones and other wireless communication devices away  
from the computer.  
TOSHIBA Disc Creator  
Please be aware of the following limitations when you use the TOSHIBA  
Disc Creator:  
■ DVD Video cannot be created using TOSHIBA Disc Creator.  
■ DVD Audio cannot be created using TOSHIBA Disc Creator.  
■ You cannot use TOSHIBA Disc Creator's 'Audio CD for Car or Home  
CD Player' function to record music to DVD-R, DVD-R (Dual Layer),  
DVD-RW, DVD+R, DVD+R (Double Layer) or DVD+RW media.  
■ Do not use the 'Disc Backup' function of TOSHIBA Disc Creator in order  
to copy DVD Video or DVD-ROM material that has copyright protection.  
■ DVD-RAM discs cannot be backed up using the 'Disc Backup' function  
of TOSHIBA Disc Creator.  
■ You cannot back up CD-ROM, CD-R or CD-RW media to DVD-R, DVD-  
R (Dual Layer) or DVD-RW media using the 'Disc Backup' function of  
TOSHIBA Disc Creator.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-23  
 
Operating Basics  
■ You cannot back up CD-ROM, CD-R or CD-RW media to DVD+R,  
DVD+R (Double Layer) or DVD+RW media using the 'Disc Backup'  
function of TOSHIBA Disc Creator.  
■ You cannot back up DVD-ROM, DVD Video, DVD-R, DVD-R (Dual  
Layer), DVD-RW, DVD+R, DVD+R (Double Layer) or DVD+RW to CD-  
R or CD-RW media using the 'Disc Backup' function of TOSHIBA Disc  
Creator.  
■ TOSHIBA Disc Creator cannot record in packet format.  
■ You might not be able to use the 'Disc Backup' function of TOSHIBA  
Disc Creator to back up a DVD-R, DVD-R (Dual Layer), DVD-RW,  
DVD+R, DVD+R (Double Layer) or DVD+RW disc that was made with  
other software on a different optical media recorder.  
■ If you add data to a DVD-R, DVD-R (Dual Layer), DVD+R or DVD+R  
(Double Layer) disc that you have already recorded to, you might not be  
able to read the added data under some circumstances. For example, it  
cannot be read under 16-bit operating systems, such as Windows 98SE  
and Windows Me, while in Windows NT4 you will need Service Pack 6  
or later, and in Windows 2000, you will need Service Pack 2. In addition  
to this, some DVD-ROM and DVD-ROM / CD-R/RW drives cannot read  
this added data regardless of the operating system.  
■ TOSHIBA Disc Creator does not support recording to DVD-RAM discs -  
to achieve this you should use Windows Explorer or another similar  
utility.  
■ When you back up a DVD disc, be sure that the source drive supports  
recording to DVD-R, DVD-R (Dual Layer), DVD-RW, DVD+R, DVD+R  
(Double Layer) or DVD+RW media - if this is not the case then the  
source disc might not be backed up correctly.  
■ When you back up a DVD-R, DVD-R (Dual Layer), DVD-RW, DVD+R,  
DVD+R (Double Layer) or DVD+RW disc, be sure to use the same type  
of disc.  
■ You cannot partially delete any data written to a CD-RW, DVD-RW or  
DVD+RW disc.  
Data Verification  
To verify that data has been written or rewritten correctly to a data CD/DVD  
you should follow the steps below before you begin the write/rewrite  
process:  
1. Select Settings for Each Mode -> Data Disc in the Setting menu.  
2. Display the setting dialog box by one of the following two steps:  
■ Click the Recording settings button (  
) for writing on the main  
toolbar in the Data Disc mode.  
■ Select Setting for Each Mode -> Data Disc in the Setting menu.  
3. Mark the Verify written data check box.  
4. Select File Open or Full Compare mode.  
5. Click the OK button.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-24  
Operating Basics  
How to learn more about TOSHIBA Disc Creator  
Please refer to the Help files for additional TOSHIBA Disc Creator  
information.  
■ Opening the TOSHIBA Disc Creator Manua  
lStart -> All Programs -> TOSHIBA -> CD&DVD Applications -> Disc  
Creator Help  
®
When Using Ulead DVD MovieFactory for TOSHIBA  
How to make a Labelflash DVD  
Simplified steps for making a Labelflash DVD:  
1. Insert a Labelflash disc in optical disc drive.  
Set PRINTING SIDE for underside.  
2. Click Start -> All Programs -> DVD MovieFactory for TOSHIBA ->  
Ulead DVD MovieFactory for TOSHIBA Lancher to launch DVD  
MovieFactory.  
3. Click Print Disc Label -> Label Printing. Ulead Label@Once is  
started.  
4. Click the General tab.  
5. Choose optical disc drive for Printer. e.g.<E:>  
6. Add and customize the look of your images and text.  
7. Click Labelflash setting and choose Draw Quality.  
8. Click Print.  
How to make a DVD-Video  
Method 1: Simplified steps for making a DVD-Video from video data  
captured from a DV-Camcorder:  
1. Click Start -> All Programs -> DVD MovieFactory for TOSHIBA ->  
Ulead DVD MovieFactory for TOSHIBA Launcher to launch DVD  
MovieFactory.  
2. Insert a DVD-RW or DVD+RW disc in Burner.  
3. Click Video Disc -> Burn Video to Disc to launch Direct Recording  
dialog box, choose DVD-Video/+VR to invoke Straight Capture to  
Disc Page.  
4. Choose DVD-Video format.  
5. Choose the capture source is DV.  
6. Press Capture button.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-25  
Operating Basics  
Method 2: Simplified steps for making a DVD-Video from adding video  
source:  
1. Click Start -> All Programs -> DVD MovieFactory for TOSHIBA ->  
Ulead DVD MovieFactory for TOSHIBA Launcher to launch DVD  
MovieFactory.  
2. Click Video Disc -> New Project to invoke 2nd Launcher, choose your  
project type, then invoke DVD MovieFactory.  
3. Add source from HD Disk by click Add Video files button to invoke  
browser dialog box.  
4. Choose the source video then go to Next page to apply Menu.  
5. After choose the menu template, press Next button to go to Burning  
Page.  
6. Choose the output type then press Burn button.  
®
How to learn more about Ulead DVD MovieFactory  
Please refer to the Help and Manual files for additional Ulead DVD  
MovieFactory information.  
Opening the Ulead DVD MovieFactory Manual Start -> All Programs ->  
DVD MovieFactory for TOSHIBA -> User Manual -> DVD MovieFactory  
User Manual  
Important information for use  
Note the following limitations when you write Video DVD:  
1. Editing digital video  
■ Log in with Administrator rights to use DVD MovieFactory.  
■ Make sure that your computer is running on AC power when using  
DVD MovieFactory.  
■ Operate the computer at Full Power. Do not use power-saving  
features.  
■ While you are editing DVD, you can display preview. However, if  
another application is running. The preview might not display  
properly.  
■ DVD MovieFactory cannot edit or play copy protected content.  
■ Do not enter Sleep or Hibernation Mode while using DVD  
MovieFactory.  
■ Do not operate DVD MovieFactory immediately after turning on the  
computer. Please wait until all Disc Drive activity has stopped.  
■ When recording to a DV-Camcorder, to ensure you capture all of  
your data, let the camcorder record for a few seconds before you  
begin recording your actual data.  
■ CD recorder, JPEG functions, DVD-Audio, mini DVD and Video CD  
functions are not supported in this version.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-26  
Operating Basics  
■ While recording video to DVD, please close all other programs.  
■ Do not run software like a screen saver because it can put a heavy  
load on the CPU.  
■ Do not support mp3 decode and encode.  
2. Before recording the video to DVD  
■ When you record DVD disc, please use only discs recommended by  
the Drive manufacturer.  
■ Do not set the working drive to a slow device like a USB1.1 hard  
disk drive or it will fail to write DVD.  
■ Do not perform any of the following actions:  
■ Operate the computer for any other function, including using a  
mouse or Touch Pad, or closing/opening the display panel.  
■ Bump or cause vibration to the computer.  
■ Use the Mode control button and Audio/Video control button to  
reproduce music or voice.  
■ Open the DVD drive.  
■ Install, remove or connect external devices, including the  
following: SD/SDHC memory card, USB device, external display,  
i.LINK devices, optical digital devices.  
■ Please verify your disc after recording important data.  
■ DVD-R/+R/+RW disc cannot be written in VR format.  
■ Not support to output VCD and SVCD format.  
3. About Straight to Disc  
■ Not support to record on DVD-R/+R disc  
■ Not support to record DVD+VR format by HDV  
■ HDV support to burn DVD-Video only  
■ DVD-VR format not support to add Menu  
4. About recorded DVDs  
■ Some DVD-ROM drives for personal computers or other DVD  
players may not be able to read DVD-R/+R/-RW/-RAM discs.  
■ If you use an over-used rewritable disc, the full formatting might be  
locked. Please use a brand new disc.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-27  
Operating Basics  
TOSHIBA DVD Player  
Please be aware of the following limitations when you use the TOSHIBA  
DVD PLAYER:  
Notes on use  
■ Frame dropping, audio skipping or out of synch audio and video may  
occur during playback of some DVD Video titles.  
■ Close all other applications when using the "TOSHIBA DVD PLAYER".  
Do not open any other applications or carry out any other operations  
during DVD Video playback. Playback may stop or not function properly  
in some situations.  
■ Unfinalized DVDs created on home DVD recorders may not be playable  
on the computer.  
■ Use DVD-Video discs with a region code which is either "the same as  
the factory default setting" or "ALL".  
■ Do not playback DVD discs Video while watching or recording television  
programs using other applications. Doing so may cause DVD Video  
playback or television program recording errors. In addition, if  
prescheduled recording starts during DVD Video playback it may cause  
DVD Video playback or television program recording errors. Please  
view DVD Video during times when there is no recording prescheduled.  
■ The resume function cannot be used with some discs on the "TOSHIBA  
DVD PLAYER".  
■ It is recommended the AC adaptor be connected when playing  
DVDVideo. Power saving features may interfere with smooth playback.  
When playing DVD-Video using battery power, set the Power Options to  
"High performance".  
■ Screen savers will not display while playing a movie in the "TOSHIBA  
DVD PLAYER". The computer will also not go into Sleep Mode,  
Hibernation Mode or shutdown while using "TOSHIBA DVD PLAYER".  
■ Do not configure the Display automatic power off function to run while  
the "TOSHIBA DVD PLAYER" is running.  
■ Do not switch to Hibernation or Sleep Mode when running the  
"TOSHIBA DVD PLAYER".  
■ Do not lock the computer using the Windows logo (  
) + L keys or  
the Fn + F1 keys when running the "TOSHIBA DVD PLAYER".  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-28  
Operating Basics  
Display Devices & Audio  
1. "TOSHIBA DVD PLAYER" will only run when "Colors" is set to "Highest  
(32 bit)". The "Colors" setting can be adjusted on the "Monitor" tab in  
the "Display Settings". To open the Display Settings, click Start ->  
Control Panel -> Appearance and Personalization ->  
Personalization -> Display Settings.  
2. If the DVD Video image is not displayed on an external display or  
television, stop the "TOSHIBA DVD PLAYER", and change the screen  
resolution in "Resolution" on the "Monitor" tab in the "Display Settings".  
However, video cannot be output to some external displays and  
televisions due to output or playback conditions.  
3. When viewing DVD-Video on an external display or TV, change the  
display device before playing. DVD-Video cannot be displayed  
simultaneously (in clone mode) on both the computer's display panel  
and an external display.  
4. Do not change the screen resolution while running the "TOSHIBA DVD  
PLAYER".  
TOSHIBA DVD PLAYER  
1. "TOSHIBA DVD PLAYER" software is supported for playback of DVD-  
Video and DVD-VR.  
2. The "TOSHIBA DVD PLAYER" does not have a parental control  
function.  
3. In order to protect copyrights, the Windows Print Screen function is  
disabled when "TOSHIBA DVD PLAYER" is running.  
4. (Print Screen functions are disabled even when running other  
applications besides "TOSHIBA DVD PLAYER" and when "TOSHIBA  
DVD PLAYER" is minimized.) Please close the "TOSHIBA DVD  
PLAYER" to use the Print Screen function.  
5. Carry out the installation/uninstallation of the "TOSHIBA DVD PLAYER"  
under a user account with administrator rights.  
6. Do not change Windows Users while "TOSHIBA DVD PLAYER" is  
running.  
7. For some DVD Video discs, using the control window to change the  
audio track will also change the subtitle track.  
Starting TOSHIBA DVD PLAYER  
Use the following procedure to start "TOSHIBA DVD PLAYER".  
1. Insert an DVD-Video in the DVD Super Multi drive while Windows  
Vista® is running. When an DVD-Video disc is set in the DVD drive, the  
following application selection screen may appear. If this occurs, select  
Play DVD movie, then click OK to launch the TOSHIBA DVD PLAYER.  
2. Touch the CD/DVD panel on the Front operation panel. Or select Start ->  
All Programs -> TOSHIBA DVD PLAYER to start "TOSHIBA DVD  
PLAYER".  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-29  
Operating Basics  
Operating TOSHIBA DVD PLAYER  
Notes on Using "TOSHIBA DVD PLAYER".  
1. Screen display and available features may vary amongst DVD-Videos  
and scenes.  
2. Only operation buttons (including remote controller and Front operation  
panels) which correspond to currently available and active features will  
be useable during DVD playback.  
3. If the menu is opened in the Display Area using the Control window's  
Top Menu or Menu buttons, touch pad and mouse menu operations  
may not be able to be used.  
Open TOSHIBA DVD PLAYER HELP  
TOSHIBA DVD PLAYER features and instructions are also explained in  
detail in "TOSHIBA DVD PLAYER Help".Use the following procedure to  
open "TOSHIBA DVD PLAYER Help".  
■ Click the "Help" button ( ) in the Display Area.  
Media care  
This section provides tips on protecting data stored on your CD's, DVD's  
and floppy diskettes. Handle your media with care. Following the simple  
precautions listed below will increase the lifetime of your media and protect  
the data stored on it.  
CD/DVDs  
1. Store your CD's and DVD's in the containers they originally came in to  
protect them and keep them clean.  
2. Do not bend the CD's or DVD's.  
3. Do not write on, apply a sticker to, or otherwise mar the surface of the  
CD or DVD that contains the data.  
4. Hold the CD or DVD by its outside edge or the edge on the center hole -  
any fingerprints on the surface of the disc can prevent the drive from  
properly reading data.  
5. Do not expose the CD or DVD to direct sunlight, extreme heat or cold.  
6. Do not place heavy objects on your CD's or DVD's.  
7. If your CD's or DVD's become dusty or dirty, wipe them with a clean dry  
cloth from the center hole outwards - do not wipe in a circular direction.  
If necessary, you can use a cloth that has been lightly dampened in  
water or a neutral cleaner but you must not use benzine, thinner or any  
similar cleaning solution.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-30  
     
Operating Basics  
Floppy diskettes  
The USB floppy diskette drive is available only as an option.  
1. Store your floppy diskettes in the container they came in to protect them  
and keep them clean. If a floppy diskette becomes dirty, clean it with a  
soft, lightly dampened cloth - do not use cleaning fluid.  
2. Never open the shutter or touch the magnetic surface of your floppy  
diskette - doing this could permanently damage it and lose data.  
3. Always handle floppy diskettes with care to prevent the loss of stored  
data.  
4. Always apply the floppy diskette label in the correct location and never  
apply a new label on top of an existing one - in this instance the label  
could come loose and damage the floppy diskette drive.  
5. Never use a pencil for writing on a floppy diskette label as the dust from  
the pencil lead could cause a system malfunction if it found its way onto  
the computer's components. In this instance, always use a felt-tipped  
pen and write the label first before applying it to the floppy diskette.  
6. Never put a floppy diskette in a location where water or other liquid may  
make contact with it, or where it is excessively damp - either of these  
conditions could cause data loss.  
7. Never use a wet or damp floppy diskette - this could damage the floppy  
diskette drive or other devices within the computer.  
8. Data may be lost if the floppy diskette is twisted, bent, or exposed to  
direct sunlight, extreme heat or cold.  
9. Do not place heavy objects on your floppy diskettes.  
10. Do not eat, smoke, or use items such as erasers near your floppy  
diskettes as foreign particles inside the jacket of the floppy diskette can  
damage the magnetic surface.  
11. Magnetic energy can destroy the data on your floppy diskettes. In view  
of this you should keep your floppy diskettes away from speakers,  
radios, televisions and other sources of magnetic fields.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-31  
 
Operating Basics  
TV Tuner  
Use the My TV feature of Media Center in Windows mode to watch TV  
programs or record them.  
The dimensions and shape of the TV antenna port vary for different  
regions.  
■ Some computer models are equipped with a tuner capable of receiving  
digital broadcasts. These tuners can receive DVB-T digital broadcasts.  
Digital broadcasts cannot be received in regions where DVB-T digital  
broadcasts are not available.  
■ Simultaneous reception and recording cannot be used when the  
set-top box is connected and the above settings are made.  
■ According to the government regulations, it is not permitted to bring  
PAL/SECAM TV tuners into Korea.  
Using the TV Tuner  
Antenna  
■ The quality of sounds and pictures greatly depends on the radio  
propagation conditions.  
■ When you use your computer in areas where the radio waves are  
weak, which results in poor radio receiving conditions, contact the  
dealer you purchased it from, or use a commercially available  
antenna booster. Please refer to the manual provided with the  
booster for details.  
Connecting the Cable  
This section describes how to connect the antenna cable to your computer.  
Connecting the antenna cable  
When lightning occurs, do not touch the antenna line. This may cause an  
electric shock.  
If you have to operate your computer during a thunderstorm and are  
connecting the TV tuner to an outside antenna, you should operate your  
computer using AC power mode. The AC adaptor offers some protection  
against (but does not entirely prevent) possible electric shock caused by  
lightning. For complete protection, do not operate your computer during a  
thunderstorm.  
User’s Manual  
4-32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Operating Basics  
1. Save data, shutdown Windows and turn off the power.  
2. Connect the antenna cable to the TV antenna port of your computer.  
TV antenna port  
Antenna cable  
Figure 4-9 Connecting the antenna cable  
When you have been using a descrambler to receive the programs on  
cable TV or satellite broadcasting, connect the set-top box and splitter to  
the coaxial cable and the antenna cable.  
Sound system  
This section describes some of the audio control functions.  
Adjusting System Volume  
You can control the overall level of sound using Windows Volume Mixer.  
To launch Volume Mixer, follow the steps below.  
1. Locate the Speaker icon on the task tray.  
2. Right-click the Speaker icon on the task tray.  
3. Select Open Volume Mixer from the menu.  
Click the Device button to display available playback devices. Select  
Speakers to use the internal speakers for listening. Adjust speaker volume  
by moving the slider up or down to raise or lower the volume. Click the  
Mute button  
to mute the sound.  
You may see another control under Applications in Volume Mixer. It is the  
control for an application which is currently running. The Windows Sounds  
is always displayed since it controls the system sounds’ volume.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-33  
     
Operating Basics  
Changing System Sounds  
System sounds are assigned to inform you when certain events happen.  
This section explains how select an existing scheme or save one you have  
modified.  
To launch the configuration dialog window for system sounds, follow the  
steps below.  
1. Right-click the Speaker icon on the task tray.  
2. Select Sounds from the menu.  
Realtek HD Audio Manager  
You can confirm and change the audio configuration using the Realtek  
Audio Manager. To launch the Realtek Audio Manager, click Start ->  
Control Panel -> Hardware and Sound -> Realtek HD Audio Manager.  
When you first launch the Realtek Audio Manager, you will see following  
device tabs. Speakers is the default output device. Microphone is the  
default input device. To change the default device, click the Set Default  
Device button under the chosen device tab.  
■ Speakers is the default output device. Select it when using the internal  
speakers or headphones.  
■ Digital Output should be selected when connecting the optical cable to  
the Headphone, S/PDIF and Line out jack for playing digital sound on  
digital audio equipment. Digital Output can only be used by connecting  
an optical audio cable.  
■ HDMI Output should be selected when connecting the HDMI cable to  
the HDMI jack for playing digital sound on digital audio equipment.  
■ Microphone is the default input device. It should be selected when  
using the computer’s internal microphone or an external microphone  
connected to the Microphone and Line in jack to record sound.  
If an external microphone or audio cable is connected to the Microphone  
and Line in jack, the Realtek HD Audio Manager Connector Settings dialog  
will be displayed allowing selection of either "Line In" or "Mic In" input.  
Information  
Click the information button  
to view hardware information, software  
information, and language setting.  
Speaker Configuration  
Click the playback button  
to confirm the internal speakers or the  
headphone sound is coming from the right direction.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-34  
Operating Basics  
Sound Effects  
This section explains how to select various sound effects.  
■ Environment - simulates reverberations of sound for familiar  
environments around us. You can select an existing preset in the menu.  
■ Equalizer - raises or lowers a frequency of sound to simulate a popular  
genre of music. You can select an existing preset in the menu.  
■ Karaoke - cancels the specific frequency of sound and results in the  
Vocal Cancellation. Clicking the Karaoke icon, lowers the vocal sound  
within music. Using the arrow buttons will adjust the musical key of the  
sound.  
Microphone Effects  
Microphone Effects are only found within Microphone window.  
■ Noise Suppression reduces background noise and fan noise.  
■ Acoustic Echo Cancellation reduces feedback and feedback echo.  
Default Format  
You can change the sample rate and bit depth of sound.  
Dolby Sound Room®  
Dolby Sound Room provides stunning personal surround sound from any  
pair of speakers or headphones. Ideal when using surround sound  
speakers is not practical, Dolby Sound Room enables an enveloping  
entertainment experience.  
Dolby Sound Room technologies:  
■ Dolby Headphone - Personal surround sound using any set of  
headphones so that listeners feel like the action is happening all around  
them.  
■ Sound Space Expander - Widens the sound experience to "wrap"  
around the listener.  
■ Natural Bass - Extends the bass response of any speakers by up to an  
octave.  
To open the user interface of Dolby Sound Room, steps as detailed below:  
1. Click the right button of a mouse on the speaker icon on the Windows  
Taskbar, and select Playback Devices in the sub menu.  
2. On the Playback tab, select Speakers, and click Properties.  
3. Click the Dolby tab.  
Modem  
This section describes how to connect and disconnect the internal modem  
to and from a telephone jack.  
User’s Manual  
4-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Operating Basics  
■ Connection to any communication line other than an analog phone line  
could cause a computer system failure.  
■ Connect the built-in modem only to ordinary analog phone lines.  
■ Never connect the built-in modem to a digital line (ISDN).  
■ Never connect the built-in modem to the digital connector on a  
public telephone or to a digital private branch exchange (PBX).  
■ Never connect the built-in modem to a key telephone system for  
residences or offices.  
■ Avoid using your computer modem with the telephone cable connected  
during an electrical storm. There may be a remote risk of electric shock  
from lightning.  
■ Modem functions cannot be used in models which are not equipped  
with a modem.  
■ This information is applicable to the models equipped with a built-in  
modem.  
■ Some models are equipped with a modem jack or FM antenna port.  
Region selection  
Telecommunication regulations vary from one region to another, so you will  
need to make sure the internal modem’s settings are correct for the region  
in which it will be used.  
The built-in modem can be used only in specified countries and regions.  
Using the modem in an area not specified for use may cause a system  
failure. Check the specified areas carefully before using it.  
To select a region, follow the steps as detailed below:  
1. Click Start -> All Programs -> TOSHIBA -> Networking -> Modem  
Region Select.  
If it is available, do not use the Country/Region Select function included as  
part of the modem setup utility within the Control Panel - if you change the  
country/region setting this way you may find that the change does not take  
effect.  
2. The Region Selection icon will appear in the Windows Taskbar.  
3. Click the icon with the primary (left) mouse button to display a list of  
regions that the modem supports, together with a sub-menu which  
details telephony location information - a check mark will appear next to  
the currently selected region and telephony location.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-36  
 
Operating Basics  
4. Select either a region from the region menu or a telephony location from  
the sub-menu.  
■ When you click a region it becomes the modem's default selection  
for any new dialling locations that are created within the Windows  
Control Panel (Phone and Modem Options).  
■ When you select a telephony location, the corresponding region is  
automatically selected and becomes the modem's default setting.  
Properties menu  
Click the icon with the secondary (right) mouse button in order to display a  
Properties menu on the screen.  
Setting  
Within the Properties menu you are able to either enable or disable the  
following settings:  
AutoRun Mode  
Allows you to configure whether the Modem Region Select utility starts  
automatically whenever you start up the operating system.  
Open the Dialing Properties dialog box after selecting region  
Allows you to configure whether the dialing properties dialog box will be  
displayed automatically after you have selected a region.  
Location list for region selection  
Displays a sub-menu appears which details location information.  
Open dialog box, if the modem and Telephony Current  
Location region code do not match  
Displays a warning if the current settings for both region code and  
telephony location are different.  
Modem Selection  
If the computer cannot recognize the internal modem, a dialog box is  
displayed from which you should select the appropriate communications  
port for your modem to use.  
Dialing Properties  
You should select this item in order to display the dialing properties.  
If you are using the computer in Japan, the Telecommunications Business  
Law requires that you select Japan region mode. It is illegal to use the  
modem in Japan with any other selection.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-37  
 
Operating Basics  
Connecting the modular cable  
To connect the modem's modular cable, follow the steps as detailed below:  
■ Connection to any communication line other than an analog phone line  
could cause a computer system failure.  
■ Connect the built-in modem only to ordinary analog phone lines.  
■ Never connect the built-in modem to a digital line (ISDN).  
■ Never connect the built-in modem to the digital connector on a  
public telephone or to a digital private branch exchange (PBX).  
■ Never connect the built-in modem to a key telephone system for  
residences or offices.  
■ Avoid using your computer modem with the telephone cable connected  
during an electrical storm. There may be a remote risk of electric shock  
from lightning.  
1. Plug the end of the modular cable into the computer's modem jack.  
2. Plug the other end of the modular cable into a telephone jack.  
RJ11  
Figure 4-10 Connecting the internal modem  
Do not pull on the cable or move the computer while the cable is  
connected.  
Disconnecting the modular cable  
To disconnect the modular cable, follow the steps as detailed below:  
1. Pinch the lever on the plug in the telephone jack and pull it out from  
within the connector.  
2. Pinch the lever on the plug in the computer's modem jack and pull it out  
from within the computer.  
FM tuner  
This section describes how to connect the FM tuner antenna to the  
computer's FM antenna port.  
Use the FM Radio of Windows Media Center to listen to FM radio.  
Some models are equipped with a modem jack or FM antenna port.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-38  
   
Operating Basics  
Using the FM tuner  
To connect the FM tuner antenna, follow the steps as detailed below:  
1. Plug the FM tuner antenna into the computer's FM tuner jack.  
Figure 4-11 Connecting the FM tuner jack  
2. For how to set the FM software and for more information, please refer to  
Listen to radio section in Chapter8.  
Wireless communications  
The computer's wireless communication function supports both Wireless  
LAN and Bluetooth devices.  
All models are provided with Wireless Communication switch. Some  
models are equipped with both Wireless LAN and Bluetooth functions.  
Wireless LAN  
The Wireless LAN is compatible with other LAN systems based on Direct  
Sequence Spread Spectrum/Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing  
radio technology that complies with the IEEE802.11 Wireless LAN  
standard.  
■ Frequency Channel Selection of 5GHz for IEEE 802.11a or n draft 2.0  
■ Frequency Channel Selection of 2.4GHz for 802.11b/g or n draft 2.0  
■ Roaming over multiple channels  
■ Card power management  
■ Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) data encryption based on an 128-bit  
encryption algorithm  
■ Wi-Fi Protected Access™ (WPA™) support  
■ Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) data encryption  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-39  
     
Operating Basics  
The transmission speed over the wireless LAN, and the distance over  
which the wireless LAN can reach, may vary depending on surrounding  
electromagnetic environment, obstacles, access point design and  
configuration, client design and software/hardware configurations. The  
transmission rate described is the theoretical maximum speed as specified  
under the appropriate standard - the actual transmission speed will be  
lower than the theoretical maximum speed.  
Setting  
1. Please make sure that the Wireless Communication Switch is turned  
on.  
2. Click Start and then click Connect To to display Connect to a network  
window.  
3. Click Set up a connection or network.  
4. Follow the wizard. You will need the name of the wireless network  
together with security settings. Consult the documentation  
accompanied with your router or ask your wireless network  
administrator for the settings.  
Security  
■ TOSHIBA strongly recommend that you enable encryption functionality,  
otherwise your computer will be open to illegal access by an outsider  
using a wireless connection. If this occurs, the outsider may illegally  
access your system, eavesdrop, or cause the loss or destruction of  
stored data.  
■ TOSHIBA is not liable for the loss of data due to eavesdropping or  
illegal access through the wireless LAN and the damage thereof.  
Bluetooth wireless technology  
Bluetooth™ wireless technology eliminates the need for cables, such as  
desktop computers, between your PC and other electronic devices,  
example of printers and mobile phones.  
You cannot use the computer's built-in Bluetooth functions and an external  
Bluetooth adaptor simultaneously.  
For reference, Bluetooth wireless technology has the following features:  
Worldwide operation  
The Bluetooth radio transmitter and receiver operate in the 2.4GHz band,  
which is license-free and compatible with radio systems in most countries  
in the world.  
Radio links  
You can easily establish links between two or more devices, with these  
links being maintained even if the devices are not within a line-of-sight of  
each other.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-40  
 
Operating Basics  
Security  
Two advanced security mechanisms ensure a high level of security:  
■ Authentication prevents access to critical data and makes it impossible  
to falsify the origin of a message.  
■ Encryption prevents eavesdropping and maintains link privacy.  
BluetoothTM Stack for Windows® by TOSHIBA  
Please note that this software is specifically designed for the following  
operating systems:  
■ Microsoft® Windows Vista®  
Information regarding the use of this software with these operating systems  
is listed below, with further details being contained with the electronic help  
files supplied with the software.  
This Bluetooth Stack is based on the Bluetooth Version  
1.1/1.2/2.0+EDR/2.1+EDR pecification. However, TOSHIBA cannot  
confirm the compatibility between any computing products and/or other  
electronic devices that use Bluetooth, other than TOSHIBA notebook  
computers.  
Release Notes related to the Bluetooth® Stack for Windows®  
by TOSHIBA  
1. Fax application software:  
Please be aware that there is some fax application software that you  
cannot use on this BluetoothTM Stack.  
2. Multi-user considerations:  
On Windows Vista®, the use of Bluetooth is not supported in a  
multi-user environment. This means that, when you use Bluetooth,  
other users that are logged into the same computer will not be able to  
use this type of functionality.  
Product Support:  
The latest information regarding operating system support, language  
support or available upgrades can be found on our web site  
http://www.toshiba-europe.com/computers/tnt/bluetooth.htm in Europe or  
www.pcsupport.toshiba.com in the United States.  
Wireless communication switch  
You can enable or disable Wireless communication (Wireless LAN and  
Bluetooth) function, with the on/off switch. No transmissions are sent or  
received when the switch is off. Slide the switch to the left to turn it off and  
to the right to turn it on.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-41  
 
Operating Basics  
■ Do not use the Wireless LAN (Wi-Fi), WiMax or Bluetooth  
functionalities near a microwave oven or in areas subject to radio  
interference or magnetic fields. Interference from a microwave oven or  
other source can disrupt Wi-Fi, WiMax or Bluetooth operation.  
■ Turn Wi-Fi, WiMax and Bluetooth functionalities off when near a person  
who may have a cardiac pacemaker implant or other medical electric  
device. Radio waves may affect pacemaker or medical device  
operation, possibly resulting in serious injury. Follow the instruction of  
your medical device when using any Wi-Fi, WiMax or Bluetooth  
functionality.  
■ Always turn off Wi-Fi, WiMax or Bluetooth functionality if the computer  
is near automatic control equipment or appliances such as automatic  
doors or fire detectors. Radio waves can cause malfunction of such  
equipment, possibly resulting in serious injury.  
■ It may not be possible to make a network connection to a specified  
network name using the ad hoc network function.  
If this occurs, the new network(*) will have to be configured for all  
computers connected to the same network in order to re-enable  
network connections.  
* Please be sure to use new network name.  
Wireless communication indicator  
The wireless communication indicator shows the status of the computer's  
wireless communication functions.  
Indicator status  
Indication  
Indicator off  
The wireless communication switch is off - no  
wireless functionality is available.  
Indicator glows  
Wireless communication switch is on. Wireless  
LAN or Bluetooth is turned on by an application.  
If you used the Taskbar to disable the wireless LAN, restart the computer or  
perform the following procedure to re-enable it: Start -> Control Panel ->  
System and Maintenance -> System -> Device Manager -> Network  
adapters and right click the wireless device then choose enable.  
LAN  
The computer has built-in support for Ethernet LAN (10 megabits per  
second, 10BASE-T), Fast Ethernet LAN (100 megabits per second,  
100BASE-TX) and Gigabit Ethernet LAN (1000 megabits per second,  
1000BASE-T). This section describes how to connect/disconnect to a LAN.  
Do not install or remove a memory module while Wake-up on LAN is  
enabled.  
User’s Manual  
4-42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Operating Basics  
■ The Wake-up on LAN function consumes power even when the system  
is off. Leave the AC adaptor connected while using this feature.  
■ The Link speed (10/100/1000 megabits per second) changes  
automatically depending on the network conditions (connected device,  
cable or noise and so on).  
LAN cable types  
The computer must be configured properly before connecting to a LAN.  
Logging onto a LAN using the computer's default settings could cause a  
malfunction in LAN operation. Check with your LAN administrator  
regarding set-up procedures.  
If you are using Gigabit Ethernet LAN (1000 megabits per second,  
1000BASE-T), be sure to connect with a CAT5E cable or higher. You  
cannot use a CAT3 or CAT5 cable.  
If you are using Fast Ethernet LAN (100 megabits per second, 100BASE-  
TX), be sure to connect with a CAT5 cable or higher. You cannot use a  
CAT3 cable.  
If you are using Ethernet LAN (10 megabits per second, 10BASE-T), you  
can connect with a CAT3 or higher cable.  
Connecting the LAN cable  
To connect the LAN cable, follow the steps as detailed below:  
■ Connect the AC adaptor before connecting the LAN cable. The AC  
adaptor must remain connected during LAN use. If you disconnect the  
AC Adaptor while the computer is accessing a LAN, the system may  
hang up.  
■ Do not connect any other cable to the LAN jack except the LAN cable.  
Otherwise, malfunctions or damage may occur.  
■ Do not connect any power supplying device to the LAN cable that is  
connected to the LAN jack. Otherwise, malfunctions or damage may  
occur.  
1. Turn off the power to the computer and to all external devices  
connected to the computer.  
2. Plug one end of the cable into the LAN jack. Press gently until you hear  
the latch click into place.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-43  
   
Operating Basics  
LAN Active (Amber)  
LAN cable  
Figure 4-12 Connecting the LAN cable  
3. Plug the other end of the cable into a LAN hub connector or router.  
Check with your LAN administrator and hardware or software vendor  
before using or configuring a network connection.  
When the computer is exchanging data with the LAN, the LAN Active  
indicator glows yellow. When the computer is connected to a LAN hub but  
is not exchanging data, the Link indicator glows.  
Disconnecting the LAN cable  
To disconnect the LAN cable, follow the steps as detailed below:  
Make sure the LAN Active indicator (yellow LED) is out before you  
disconnect the computer from the LAN.  
1. Pinch the lever on the connector in the computer’s LAN jack and pull  
out the connector.  
2. Disconnect the cable from the LAN hub or router in the same manner.  
Check with your LAN administrator and hardware or software vendor  
before disconnecting from the hub.  
Cleaning the computer  
To help ensure long, trouble-free operation, keep the computer free of dust  
and dirt, and use care with all liquids around it.  
■ Be careful not to spill liquids into the computer. If the computer does get  
wet, turn the power off immediately and let the computer dry completely -  
in these circumstance you should get the computer inspected by an  
authorized service provider in order to assess the scope of any damage.  
■ Clean the plastics of the computer using a slightly water dampened  
cloth.  
■ You can clean the display screen by spraying a small amount of glass  
cleaner onto a soft, clean cloth and then wiping the screen gently with  
the cloth.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-44  
     
Operating Basics  
Using the cleaning cloth  
Some models include 1 cleaning cloth.  
The cleaning cloth can be used to wipe away dust and fingerprints from the  
keyboard and palm rest area of your computer.  
■ When wiping the keyboard, palm rest and display panel, do so gently  
without using excessive pressure.  
■ Do not use the cleaning cloth when it is dirty or wet.  
■ Do not use the cleaning cloth soaked with water, detergents or volatile  
organic solvents.  
It is recommended that you wash the cloth if it gets soiled using a gentle,  
mild detergent and rinse it well. Allow it to air dry completely before using it  
again on your computer.  
Never spray cleaner directly onto the computer or let liquid run into any  
part of it. Never use harsh or caustic chemical products to clean the  
computer.  
■ Use the cleaning cloth to wipe away dust, fingerprints and similar from  
the keyboard, palm rest and other parts. For precautions on use refer to  
the Using the cleaning cloth section in Chapter4, Operating Basics.  
Moving the computer  
While the computer is designed for rugged durability you should exercise a  
few simple precautions when moving it in order to help ensure trouble-free  
operation.  
■ Make sure all disk/disc activity has ended before moving the computer -  
check that the HDD and other indicators on the front of the computer  
are off.  
■ If a CD or DVD is in the drive, remove it and make sure that the disc tray  
is securely closed.  
■ Turn off (shut down) the computer.  
■ Disconnect the AC adaptor and all peripherals before moving the  
computer.  
■ Close the display panel.  
■ Do not pick up the computer by its display panel.  
■ Before carrying your computer, shut it down, disconnect the AC adaptor  
and allow it to cool down - a failure to follow this instruction may result in  
minor heat injury.  
■ Be careful not to subject the computer to impact or shock - a failure to  
follow this instruction could result in damage to computer, computer  
failure or loss of data.  
■ Never transport your computer with any cards installed - this may cause  
damage to either the computer and/or the card resulting in product  
failure.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-45  
   
Operating Basics  
■ Always use a suitable carry case when transporting the computer.  
■ When carrying your computer, be sure to hold it securely so that it does  
not fall or hit anything.  
■ Do not carry your computer by holding any of its protruding elements.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-46  
Chapter 5  
The Keyboard  
The computer's keyboard layouts are compatible with a 104/105-key  
enhanced keyboard - by pressing some keys in combination, all of the  
104/105-key enhanced keyboard functions can be performed on the  
computer.  
The number of keys available on your keyboard will depend on which  
country/region your computer is configured for, with keyboards being  
available for numerous languages.  
In use there are six different types of keys, specifically typewriter keys,  
function keys, soft keys, Hot keys, Windows special keys and the keypad  
overlay.  
Typewriter keys  
The typewriter keys produce the upper-case and lower-case letters,  
numbers, punctuation marks, and special symbols that appear on the  
screen. However, there are some differences between using a typewriter  
and using a computer keyboard:  
■ Letters and numbers produced in computer text vary in width. Spaces,  
which are created by a 'space character' may also vary depending on  
line justification and other factors.  
■ The lowercase l (el) and the number 1 (one), together with the  
uppercase O (oh) and the 0 (zero), are not interchangeable on  
computers as they are on a typewriter.  
■ The CAPS LOCK function key locks only the alphabetic characters into  
upper-case while the Shift Lock function on a typewriter places all keys  
in the shifted position.  
■ The SHIFT keys, the Tab key, and the BACK SPACE key perform the  
same function as their typewriter counterparts but also have special  
computer functions.  
Never remove the key caps on your keyboard. Doing so could cause  
damage to the parts under the key caps.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-1  
           
The Keyboard  
Function keys: F1 … F12  
The function keys (not to be confused with the special FN key) are the  
twelve keys at the top of your keyboard - these keys function differently  
from other keys.  
F1 through F12 are called function keys because they execute  
programmed functions when pressed and, when used in combination with  
the FN key, those keys marked with icons also execute specific functions  
on the computer. Please refer to the section, Soft keys: FN key  
combinations, in this chapter for further information, taking care to note that  
the function executed by individual keys will depend on the software you  
are using.  
Soft keys: FN key combinations  
The FN (function) is unique to TOSHIBA computers and is used in  
combination with other keys to form soft keys. Soft keys are key  
combinations that enable, disable or configure specific features.  
Please note that some software may disable or interfere with soft-key  
operations, and that the soft-key settings are not restored when the  
computer returns from Sleep Mode.  
Emulating keys on an enhanced keyboard  
Figure 5-1 A 104-key enhanced keyboard layout  
This computer's keyboard is designed to provide all the features of the 104-  
key enhanced keyboard.  
Since the keyboard is smaller and has fewer keys, some of the enhanced  
keyboard functions must be simulated using two keys instead of one on the  
larger keyboard.  
The FN key can be combined with the following keys to simulate functions  
similar to those of keys on the 104/105 key enhanced keyboard which are  
not on this computer's keyboard.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-2  
           
The Keyboard  
Press FN + F10 or FN + F11 to access the computer's integrated keypad.  
When activated, the keys with grey markings on their bottom edge become  
either numeric keypad keys (FN + F11) or cursor control keys (FN + F10).  
Please refer to the Keypad overlay section in this chapter for more  
information on how to operate these keys, taking care to note that the  
power on default for both settings is off.  
Press FN + F12 (ScrLock) to lock the cursor on a specific line. The power  
on default is off.  
Press FN + ENTER to simulate ENTER on the enhanced keyboard’s  
numeric keypad.  
Hot keys  
Hot keys (pressing FN + a function or ESC key) let you enable or disable  
certain features of the computer.  
Mute: Pressing FN + ESC turns the volume on and off.  
Lock: Pressing FN + F1 enters ''Lock computer mode''. To restore your  
desktop, you need to log on again.  
Power Plan: Pressing FN + F2 changes the power settings.  
User’s Manual  
5-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                       
The Keyboard  
Sleep: Pressing FN + F3 switches the system to Sleep mode.  
Hibernate: Pressing FN + F4 switches the system to Hibernate mode.  
Output: Pressing FN + F5 changes the active display device.  
Brightness (Down): Pressing FN + F6 decreases the computer's display  
panel brightness in individual steps.  
Brightness (Up): Pressing FN + F7 increases the computer's display panel  
brightness in individual steps.  
Wireless: Pressing FN + F8 switches the active wireless devices if the  
wireless communication switch is switched on.  
If no wireless communication device is installed, no dialog box will appear.  
Touch Pad: Pressing FN + F9 enables or disables the Touch Pad function.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-4  
                               
The Keyboard  
Zoom: Pressing FN + Space changes the display resolution.  
TOSHIBA Zooming Utility (reduce): Pressing FN + 1 reduces the icon  
size on the desktop or the font sizes within one of the supported application  
windows.  
TOSHIBA Zooming Utility (enlarge): Pressing FN + 2 enlarges the icon  
size on the desktop or the font sizes within one of the supported application  
windows.  
FN Sticky key  
You can use the TOSHIBA Accessibility Utility to make the FN key sticky,  
that is, you can press it once, release it, and then press an "F Number"  
key. To start the TOSHIBA Accessibility utility, click Start -> All Programs  
-> TOSHIBA -> Utilities -> Accessibility.  
Windows special keys  
The keyboard provides two keys that have special functions in Windows:  
Windows Start Button activates the Start menu and the other, the  
application key, has the same function as the secondary mouse button.  
This key activates the Windows Start menu.  
This key has the same function as the secondary (right) mouse button.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-5  
                 
The Keyboard  
Keypad overlay  
Your computer's keyboard does not have a separate numeric keypad but  
includes a numeric keypad overlay which functions like one - this is located  
in the center of the keyboard with the relevant keys having grey letters at  
their front edge. The overlay provides the same functions as the numeric  
keypad on a standard 104/105-key enhanced keyboard.  
Turning on the overlays  
The numeric keypad overlay can be used for numeric data input or cursor  
and page control.  
Arrow mode  
To turn on Arrow Mode, press FN + F10 - the Arrow mode indicator lights  
and you are able to access cursor and page control functions by using the  
keys. You are able to press FN + F10 again to turn off this overlay function.  
Numeric mode  
To turn on Numeric Mode, press FN + F11 - the Numeric Mode indicator  
lights and you are able to access numeric characters by using the keys.  
You are able to press FN + F11 again to turn off this overlay function.  
Figure 5-2 The numeric keypad overlay  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-6  
             
The Keyboard  
Temporarily using normal keyboard (overlay on)  
While using the overlay, you can temporarily access the normal keyboard  
functions without having to turn the overlay off:  
1. Hold FN and press any other key - this key will operate as if the overlay  
were off.  
2. Type upper-case characters by holding FN + SHIFT and pressing a  
character key.  
3. Release FN to continue using the selected overlay function.  
Temporarily using overlay (overlay off)  
While using the normal keyboard function, you can temporarily use the  
keypad overlay without having to turn it on:  
1. Press and hold down FN.  
2. Check the keyboard indicators as pressing the FN key will turn on the  
most recently used overlay function - if the Numeric Mode indicator  
lights you can use the overlay for numeric entry, while if the Arrow Mode  
indicator lights, you can use the overlay for cursor and page control  
function.  
3. Release FN to return to normal keyboard operation.  
Temporarily changing modes  
If the computer is in Numeric Mode, you can switch temporarily to Arrow  
Mode by pressing a SHIFT key, while if it is in Arrow Mode, you can switch  
temporarily to Numeric Mode by also pressing a SHIFT key.  
Generating ASCII characters  
Not all ASCII characters can be generated using normal keyboard  
operation, but you are able to generate these characters using their specific  
ASCII codes.  
With the overlay on:  
1. Hold down ALT.  
2. Using the overlay keys, type the ASCII code of the character you  
require.  
3. Release ALT - the ASCII character will appear on the display screen.  
With the overlay off:  
1. Hold down ALT + FN.  
2. Using the overlay keys, type the ASCII code of the character you  
require.  
3. Release ALT + FN - the ASCII character will appear on the display  
screen.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5-7  
       
Chapter 6  
Power  
The computer's power resources include the AC adaptor, battery pack and  
any internal batteries. This chapter provides details on making the most  
effective use of these resources, and includes information on charging and  
changing batteries, tips for saving battery power, and information on the  
different power-up modes.  
Power conditions  
The computer's operating capability and battery charge status are affected  
by different power conditions, including whether an AC adaptor is  
connected, whether a battery pack is installed and what the charge level is  
for that battery.  
Table 6-1 Power conditions  
Power on  
Power off  
(no operation)  
AC  
adaptor  
connected  
Battery fully  
charged  
• Operates  
• LED: Battery white  
• LED: Battery white  
DC IN white  
DC IN white  
Battery partially • Operates  
charged or no  
• Quick charge  
• Quick Charge  
• LED: Battery amber  
DC IN white  
charge  
• LED: Battery amber  
DC IN white  
No battery  
installed  
• Operates  
• No charge  
• No charge  
• LED: Battery off  
DC IN white  
• LED: Battery off  
DC IN white  
User’s Manual  
6-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Power  
Table 6-1 Power conditions continued  
Power on  
Power off  
(no operation)  
AC  
adaptor  
not  
Battery charge  
is above low  
battery trigger  
• Operates  
• LED: Battery off  
DC IN off  
connected point  
Battery charge  
• Operates  
is below low  
battery trigger  
point  
• LED: Battery  
flashes Amber  
DC IN off  
Battery charge Computer goes into Sleep  
is exhausted  
Mode and shuts down  
No battery  
installed  
• Cannot operate  
• LED: Battery off  
DC IN off  
Power indicators  
As shown in the below table, the Battery, DC IN and Power indicators on  
the system indicator alert you to the computer’s operating capability and  
battery charge status.  
Battery indicator  
Check the Battery indicator to determine the status of the battery pack -  
the following indicator conditions should be noted:  
The battery charge is low, the AC adaptor must  
be connected in order to recharge the battery.  
Flashing amber  
Indicates the AC adaptor is connected and the  
battery is charging.  
Amber  
Indicates the AC adaptor is connected and the  
battery is fully charged.  
White  
Under any other conditions, the indicator does  
not light.  
No light  
If the battery pack becomes too hot while it is being charged, the charge  
will stop and the Battery indicator will go out. When the battery pack's  
temperature falls to a normal range, charging will resume - this process will  
occur regardless of whether the computer's power is on or off.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-2  
     
Power  
DC IN indicator  
Check the DC IN indicator to determine the power status with the AC  
adaptor connected - the following indicator conditions should be noted:  
Indicates the AC adaptor is connected and is  
correctly supplying power to the computer.  
White  
Under any other conditions, the indicator does not  
light.  
No light  
Power indicator  
Check the Power indicator to determine the power status of the computer -  
the following indicator conditions should be noted:  
Indicates power is being supplied to the computer  
and the computer is turned on.  
White  
Indicates that the computer is in Sleep Mode and  
Blinking amber  
that there is sufficient power available (AC  
adaptor or battery) to maintain this condition. In  
Sleep Mode, this indicator will turn on for one  
second and off for one second.  
Under any other conditions, the indicator does  
not light.  
No light  
Battery types  
The computer has two different types of batteries:  
■ Battery pack  
■ Real Time Clock (RTC) battery  
Battery pack  
When the AC adaptor is not connected, the computer's main power source  
is a removable lithium ion battery pack, also referred to in this manual as  
the battery. You can purchase additional battery packs for extended use of  
the computer away from an AC power source although you should not  
change the battery pack while the AC adaptor is connected.  
Before you remove the battery pack, save your data and shut down the  
computer, or place the computer into Hibernation Mode. Please be aware  
that, when placing the computer into Hibernation Mode, the contents of  
memory will be saved to the hard disk drive, although for safety sake, it is  
best to also save your data manually.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-3  
       
Power  
■ The battery pack is a lithium ion battery, which can explode if not  
properly replaced, used, handled or disposed of. Dispose of the battery  
as required by local ordinances or regulations. Use only batteries  
recommended by TOSHIBA as replacements.  
■ Do not remove the battery pack while the computer is in Sleep Mode. In  
this mode data is stored in memory, so if the computer loses power, it  
will be lost.  
■ Battery type (depending on the model you purchased)  
■ There are two types of battery packs. (4cell or 8cell).  
■ The availability of this battery is dependent on the model you  
purchased.  
Real Time Clock battery  
The Real Time Clock (RTC) battery provides power for the internal real  
time clock and calendar function and also maintains the system  
configuration while the computer is turned off. If the RTC battery becomes  
completely discharged, the system will lose this information and the real  
time clock and calendar will stop working - in this instance the following  
message will be displayed when you turn on the power:  
ERROR 0271: Check date and time settings.  
WARNING 0251: System CMOS checksum bad - Default  
configuration used.  
Press <F1> to resume, <F2> to Setup.  
S
The computer's RTC battery is a lithium battery and should be replaced  
only by your dealer or by a TOSHIBA service representative. The battery  
can explode if not properly replaced, used, handled or disposed of.  
Dispose of the battery as required by local ordinances or regulations.  
When this error appears, the following action is recommended.  
1. Connect the AC adapter and let the battery charge for 24-hours.  
2. Press F2 to enter BIOS setup menu.  
3. Set correct time and date.  
If you still see the error message after performing the above actions,  
please contact your TOSHIBA service representative.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-4  
 
Power  
Care and use of the battery pack  
The battery pack is a vital component of portable computing and, as such,  
taking proper care of it will help ensure a longer operating time on battery  
power as well as deliver a longer life for your battery pack. The instructions  
detailed in this section will help to ensure safe operation and maximum  
performance.  
Refer to the enclosed Instruction Manual for Safety and Comfort for  
detailed precautions and handling instructions.  
■ Make sure the battery is securely installed in the computer before  
attempting to charge the battery pack. Improper installation could  
generate smoke or fire, or cause the battery pack to rupture.  
■ Keep the battery pack out of reach of infants and children. It can cause  
injury.  
■ The battery pack is lithium ion battery, which can explode if not  
replaced, used, handled or disposed of properly. Dispose of the battery  
as required by local ordinances or regulations. Use only batteries  
recommended by TOSHIBA as replacements.  
■ Charge the battery pack only in an ambient temperature between 5 and  
35 degrees Celsius. Otherwise, the electrolyte solution might leak,  
battery pack performance might deteriorate and the battery life might  
be shortened.  
■ Never install or remove the battery pack without first turning off the  
power and disconnecting the AC adaptor. Never remove the battery  
pack while the computer is in Sleep Mode. Data will be lost.  
■ Never remove the battery pack while the Wake-up on LAN function is  
enabled. Data will be lost. Before you remove a battery pack, disable  
the Wake-up on LAN function.  
Charging the batteries  
When the power in the battery pack becomes low, the Battery indicator will  
flash amber to indicate that only a few minutes of battery power remain. If  
you continue to use the computer while the Battery indicator flashes, the  
computer will enable Hibernation Mode so that you do not lose any data,  
and automatically turn itself off.  
You must recharge a battery pack when it becomes discharged.  
Procedures  
To recharge a battery pack while it is installed in the computer, connect the  
AC adaptor to the DC IN 19V jack and plug the other end into a working  
outlet - the Battery indicator will glow amber while the battery is being  
charged.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-5  
   
Power  
Use only the computer connected to an AC power source or the optional  
TOSHIBA Battery charger to charge the battery pack. Never attempt to  
charge the battery pack with any other charger.  
Time  
The following table shows the approximate time required to fully charge a  
discharged battery.  
Charging time (hours)  
Battery type  
Power on  
Power off  
Battery Pack  
(4 cell / 8 cell)  
about 12 or longer  
about 4 or longer  
RTC battery  
about 24  
about 24 with AC or  
Battery pack  
Please be aware that the charging time when the computer is on is  
affected by ambient temperature, the temperature of the computer and  
how you are using the computer - if you make heavy use of external  
devices for example, the battery might scarcely charge at all during  
operation. Please refer to the section Maximizing battery operating time for  
further information.  
Battery charging notice  
The battery may not begin charging immediately under the following  
conditions:  
■ The battery is extremely hot or cold (if the battery is extremely hot, it  
might not charge at all). To ensure the battery charges to its full capacity,  
you should charge it at room temperature of between 5° to 35°C (41° to  
95°F).  
■ The battery is nearly completely discharged. In this instance you should  
leave the AC adaptor connected for a few minutes and the battery  
should begin charging.  
The Battery indicator may show a rapid decrease in battery operating time  
when you try to charge a battery under the following conditions:  
■ The battery has not been used for a long time.  
■ The battery has completely discharged and been left in the computer for  
a long time.  
■ A cool battery is installed in a warm computer.  
In such cases you should follow the steps as detailed below:  
1. Fully discharge the battery by leaving it in the computer with the power  
on until the system automatically turns itself off.  
2. Connect the AC adaptor to the DC IN 19V jack of the computer, and to a  
wall outlet that is supplying power.  
3. Charge the battery until the Battery indicator glows blue.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-6  
Power  
Repeat these steps two or three times until the battery recovers normal  
capacity.  
Monitoring battery capacity  
Remaining battery power can be monitored using the following methods.  
■ Clicking the battery icon on the task bar  
■ Via the Battery Status in the Windows Mobility Center window  
■ You should wait at least 16 seconds after turning on the computer  
before trying to monitor the remaining operating time. This is because  
the computer needs this time to check the battery's remaining capacity  
and then calculate the remaining operating time, based on this together  
with the current power consumption.  
■ Please be aware that the actual remaining operating time may differ  
slightly from the calculated time.  
■ With repeated discharges and recharges, the battery's capacity will  
gradually decrease. In view of this it will be noted that an often used,  
older battery will not operate for as long as a new battery even when  
both are fully charged.  
Maximizing battery operating time  
A battery's usefulness depends on how long it can supply power on a  
single charge, while how long the charge lasts in a battery depends on:  
■ Processor speed  
■ Screen brightness  
■ System Sleep Mode  
■ System Hibernation Mode  
■ Display power off period  
■ Hard disk drive power off period  
■ How often and for how long you use the hard disk drive, optical disc and  
floppy diskette drives.  
■ How much charge the battery contained to begin with.  
■ How you use optional devices, such as a PC Cards, to which the  
battery supplies power.  
■ Whether you enable Sleep Mode, which can conserve battery power if  
you are frequently turning the computer off and on.  
■ Where you store your programs and data.  
■ Whether you close the display panel when you are not using the  
keyboard - closing the display saves power.  
■ The environmental temperature - operating time decreases at low  
temperatures.  
■ The condition of the battery terminals - you should always ensure the  
terminals stay clean by wiping them with a clean dry cloth before  
installing the battery pack.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-7  
   
Power  
Retaining data with power off  
When you turn off your computer with fully charged batteries, the batteries  
retain data for the following approximate time periods.  
Retention Time  
Battery type  
State and Retention Time  
Battery pack  
1.5 days for 8 cell;  
0.75 days for 4 cell (sleep mode)  
about 10days(Shut Down Mode)  
RTC battery  
30 days  
Extending battery life  
To maximize the life of your battery packs:  
■ At least once a month, disconnect the computer from a power source  
and operate it on battery power until the battery pack fully discharges.  
Before doing so, follow the steps as detailed below.  
1. Turn off the computer's power.  
2. Disconnect the AC adaptor and turn on the computer's power - if it  
does not turn on then go to Step 4.  
3. Operate the computer on battery power for five minutes. If you find  
that the battery pack has at least five minutes of operating time,  
continue operating until the battery pack is fully discharged,  
however, if the Battery indicator flashes or there is some other  
warning to indicate a low battery condition, go to Step 4.  
4. Connect the AC adaptor to the DC IN 19V jack of the computer, and  
to a wall outlet that is supplying power. The DC IN indicator should  
glow blue, and the Battery indicator should glow amber to indicate  
that the battery pack is being charged, however, in the event that  
DC IN indicator does not glow this indicates that power is not being  
supplied - check the connections for the AC adaptor and the power  
cord.  
5. Charge the battery pack until the Battery indicator glows blue.  
■ If you have extra battery packs, rotate their use.  
■ If you will not be using the system for an extended period, for example  
for more than one month, remove the battery pack from the computer.  
■ Disconnect the AC adaptor when the battery is fully charged -  
overcharging will make the battery hot and can shorten its operating life.  
■ If you are not going to use the computer for more than eight hours,  
disconnect the AC adaptor.  
■ Store spare battery packs in a cool dry place out of direct sunlight.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-8  
 
Power  
Replacing the battery pack  
Please be aware that the battery pack is classified as a consumable item.  
The operating life of the battery pack will gradually reduce through  
repeated charging and discharging, and will need to be replaced when it  
reaches the end of its operating life. In addition to this, you might also  
replace a discharged battery pack with a charged spare when you are  
operating your computer away from an AC power source for an extended  
period of time.  
This section explains how to remove and install the battery pack, and  
begins with the removal process which is detailed through the following  
steps.  
■ Do not remove the battery pack while the computer is in Sleep Mode.  
Data is stored in RAM, so if the computer loses power it will be lost.  
■ In Hibernation Mode, data will be lost if you remove the battery pack or  
disconnect the AC adaptor before the save is completed. Wait for the  
Hard Disk Drive indicator to go out.  
■ Do not touch the battery release latch while holding the computer or the  
battery pack might fall out due to the unintentional release of the  
battery release latch and cause injuries.  
To remove a discharged battery, follow the steps as detailed below:  
1. Save your work.  
2. Turn the computer's power off - ensure that the Power indicator is off.  
3. Remove all cables and peripherals that are connected to the computer.  
4. Close the display panel and turn the computer upside down.  
5. Slide the battery safety lock towards the release (  
the battery release latch movable.  
) position to make  
Battery Safety Lock  
Battery Pack  
Figure 6-1 Releasing the battery pack (1)  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-9  
   
Power  
6. Slide and hold the battery release latch (1) to disengage the battery  
pack and then remove it from the computer (2).  
Battery Pack  
Figure 6-2 Releasing the battery pack (2)  
To install a battery, follow the steps as detailed below:  
1. Insert the battery pack as far as it will go into the computer (1).  
2. Ensure that the battery pack is securely in place and the battery safety  
lock (2) is in its position.  
Battery Safety Lock  
Battery Pack  
Figure 6-3 Securing the battery pack  
3. Turn your computer over.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-10  
Power  
TOSHIBA Password Utility  
The TOSHIBA Supervisor Password Utility provides two levels of password  
security: User and Supervisor.  
Passwords set in TOSHIBA Supervisor Password Utility are different from  
®
the Windows login password.  
User Password  
To start the utility, point to or click the following items:  
Launch TOSHIBA Assist J SECURE J User Password  
■ Registered  
Click to register a password of up to 8 characters. After a password is  
set, you will be prompted to enter it when you start the computer.  
■ Not Registered  
Click to delete a registered password. Before you can delete a  
password, you must first enter the current password correctly.  
■ Owner String (text box)  
You can use this box to associate text with the password. After you  
enter text, click Apply or OK, then, each time the computer is switched  
on, this text will be displayed along with the prompt for the password.  
Supervisor password  
If you set a supervisor password, some functions will be restricted when a  
user logs on with the user password. To set a supervisor password:  
TOSHIBA Assist J SECURE J Supervisor password  
This utility lets you do the following:  
■ Register or delete the supervisor password.  
■ Specify restrictions for general users.  
Starting the computer by password  
If you have already registered a password, there are two ways to start the  
computer:  
■ Swipe your fingerprint on the sensor if you have already registered the  
fingerprint with the Fingerprint utility and enabled Fingerprint Power-  
on Security. If you would not like to swipe your finger or cannot  
authenticate the fingerprint for some reasons, push the BkSp key to  
skip the fingerprint authentication screen. You can try to swipe the  
fingerprint up to five times. If you failed fingerprint authentication more  
than five times, you must enter the password manually to start the  
computer.  
■ Enter the password manually.  
The password is necessary only if the computer was shut down in boot  
mode, not in Hibernation or Sleep mode.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-11  
     
Power  
To enter a password manually, follow these steps:  
1. Turn on the power as described in Chapter 3, Getting Started. The  
following message will appear in the LCD:  
Enter Password [xxxxxxxx]  
At this point, the hotkeys Fn + F1 to F9 do not work. They will function after  
you enter the password.  
2. Enter the Password.  
3. Press Enter.  
If you enter the password incorrectly three consecutive times, the  
computer shuts down. You must turn on the computer again and re-enter  
the password.  
Power-up modes  
The computer has three power-up modes:  
■ Hibernation (saves data in memory to the hard disk)  
■ Sleep (power remains on, maintaining the data in memory, but the CPU  
and all other devices effectively enter a 'sleep' mode)  
■ Boot (does not save data in memory)  
Refer also to the section Turning off the power in Chapter 3, Getting  
Started.  
Windows utilities  
You can configure various settings associated with both Sleep Mode and  
Hibernation Mode within the Power Options (to access it, Start -> Control  
Panel -> System and Maintenance -> Power Options).  
Hot keys  
You can use the FN + F3 hot key to enter Sleep Mode or FN + F4 to enter  
Hibernation Mode - please refer to Chapter 5, The Keyboard for further  
details.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-12  
 
Power  
Panel power on/off  
You can set up your computer so that power is turned off automatically  
when you close the display panel, and turned on again when you open it.  
Please note that this function is only available for Sleep Mode or  
Hibernation Mode, not for Shut Down Mode.  
If the panel power off function is enabled, and you manually shut down  
Windows, do not close the computer's display panel until the shut down  
process has been completed.  
System automatic Sleep/Hibernation  
This feature automatically turns off the system in Sleep or Hibernation  
Mode if the computer is not used for a set duration. Refer to Special  
features, in Chapter 1 for an explanation of how to set the duration.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6-13  
       
Chapter 7  
HW Setup  
This chapter explains how to use the TOSHIBA HW Setup program to  
configure your computer, and provides information on settings for various  
functions.  
Accessing HW Setup  
Start, point to All Programs, point to TOSHIBA, point to Utilities and click  
HWSetup.  
HW Setup Window  
The HW Setup window contains the following tabs: General,  
Password,Display, Boot Priority, CPU, Keyboard, LAN, and USB.  
There are also these three buttons:  
OK  
Accepts your changes and closes the HW Setup  
window.  
Cancel  
Apply  
Closes the window without accepting your  
changes.  
Accepts all your changes without closing the HW  
Setup window.  
General  
This window displays the BIOS version and contains two buttons:  
Default  
Return all HW Setup values to the factory  
settings.  
About  
Display the HW Setup version.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7-1  
             
HW Setup  
Setup  
This field displays BIOS Version and date.  
When finish BIOS update, please restart your computer and press F2 into  
BIOS setup manual and load BIOS default one time.  
Password  
This tab allows you to set or reset the user password for power on.  
CPU  
This function lets you set the CPU operating mode.  
This option is displayed only for Core Duo/Solo processor based model.  
Boot Priority  
Boot Priority Options  
This option sets the priority for booting the computer.  
Select the boot priority from the drop down list.  
You can override the settings and manually select a boot device by  
pressing one of the following keys while the computer is booting:  
U
N
C
Selects the USB floppy disk drive.  
Selects the Network.  
Selects optical device.  
To select the boot drive you want, follow the steps below.  
1. Boot-up your computer and press F12 to enter the boot menu.  
2. The boot select screen will be displayed: HDD1, HDD2, CD/DVD, and  
LAN.  
3. Use the upper/lower cursor keys to highlight the boot device you want  
and press Enter.  
Keyboard  
Wake-up on Keyboard  
When this feature is enabled and the computer is in Sleep mode, you can  
turn on the computer by pressing any key. It is effective only for the internal  
keyboard and only when the computer is in Sleep mode.  
Enabled  
Disabled  
Enables the Wake-up on Keyboard feature.  
Disables the Wake-up on Keyboard function  
(Default).  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7-2  
 
HW Setup  
USB  
USB KB/Mouse Legacy Emulation  
You can use this option to enable or disable USB keyboard/mouse legacy  
emulation so that, even if your operating system does not support USB  
devices, you can still use a standard USB mouse and keyboard - to achieve  
this you should set the appropriate option(s) to Enabled.  
Enabled  
Enables the USB KB/Mouse Legacy Emulation  
function (Default).  
Disabled  
Disables the USB KB/Mouse Legacy Emulation  
function.  
USB-FDD Legacy Emulation  
Use this option to enable or disable USB floppy diskette drive legacy  
emulation. If your operating system does not support USB, you can still use  
a USB floppy diskette drive by setting the USB-FDD Legacy Emulation item  
to Enabled.  
Enabled  
Enables the USB floppy diskette drive legacy  
emulation function (Default).  
Disabled  
Disables the USB floppy diskette drive legacy  
emulation function.  
USB Sleep and Charge function  
Your computer can supply USB bus power (DC5V) to the USB port even  
when the power of the computer is turned OFF. "Power OFF" includes  
Sleep Mode, Hibernation Mode or shutdown state.  
This function can be used for ports that support the USB Sleep and Charge  
function (hereinafter called "compatible ports").  
Compatible ports are USB ports that have the ( ) symbol icon.  
You can use the "USB Sleep and Charge function" to charge certain USB-  
compatible external devices such as mobile phones or portable digital  
music players.  
However, the "USB Sleep and Charge function" may not work with certain  
external devices even if they are compliant with the USB specification. In  
those cases, turn the power of the computer ON to charge the device.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7-3  
HW Setup  
■ When "USB Sleep and Charge function" is set to [Enabled], USB bus  
power (DC5V) will be supplied to compatible ports even when the  
power of the computer is turned OFF. USB bus power (DC5V) is  
similarly supplied to the external devices which are connected to the  
compatible ports. However, some external devices cannot be charged  
solely by supplying USB bus power (DC5V).  
As for the specifications of the external devices, please contact the  
device manufacturer or check the specifications of the external devices  
thoroughly before use.  
■ Using the USB sleep and charge function to charge external devices  
will take longer than charging the devices with their own chargers.  
■ If external devices are connected to compatible ports when the AC  
adaptor is not connected to the computer, the battery of the computer  
will be depleted even when the power of the computer is turned OFF.As  
such, we recommend that you connect the AC adaptor to the computer  
when using the USB sleep and charge function.  
■ External devices connected to the USB bus power (DC5V) function that  
interfaces with the power ON/OFF of the computer may always be in  
an operational state.  
■ When there is a current overflow of the external devices connected to  
the compatible ports, USB bus power (DC5V) supply may be stopped  
for safety reasons.  
■ When "USB Sleep and Charge function" is set to [Enabled], the "USB  
WakeUp function" does not work for compatible ports. In that case, if  
there is an USB port that does not have the USB Sleep and Charge  
function-compatible icon ( ), attach the mouse or keyboard to it. If all  
USB ports have the USB Sleep and Charge function-compatible icon  
(
), change the "USB Sleep and Charge function" setting to  
[Disabled]. However, the "USB Sleep and Charge function" is disabled.  
Metal paper clips or hair pins/clips will generate heat if they come into  
contact with USB ports. Do not allow USB ports to come into contact with  
metal products, for example when carrying the computer in your bag.  
The default setting is [Disabled]. Changing the setting to [Enabled] enables  
the use of this function.  
There are two modes, Mode-1 and Mode-2 in [Enabled]. For normal use,  
set the setting to Mode-1.  
If the function does not work with Mode-1 setting, change it to Mode-2.  
Some external devices may not be able to use this function in either mode.  
When this happens, change the setting to [Disabled].  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7-4  
HW Setup  
Enabled (Mode-1) Enables USB Sleep and Charge function.  
Enabled (Mode-2) Enables USB Sleep and Charge function.  
Disabled  
Disables USB Sleep and Charge function  
(Default).  
LAN  
Wake-up on LAN  
This feature lets the computer's power be turned on when it receives a  
wakeup signal from the LAN.  
Enabled  
Disabled  
Enables Wake-up on LAN.  
Disables Wake-up on LAN (Default).  
The Wake-up on LAN function consumes power even when the system is  
off. Leave the AC adaptor connected while using this feature.  
Do not install or remove an optional memory module while Wake-up on  
LAN is enabled.  
Built-in LAN  
This feature enables or disables the Built-in LAN.  
Enabled  
Disabled  
Enables Built-in LAN function (Default).  
Disables Built-in LAN function.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7-5  
Chapter 8  
AV functions  
This chapter explains how to use the AV functions.  
®
■ The state where Windows Vista is active is referred to as Windows  
mode.  
Media Center  
This section describes the Media Center.  
■ You can record TV programs and pictures/movies from external input  
devices using the TV tuner. To do this, please use the recommended  
software below:  
To record pictures/movies from external input devices:  
■ Windows Media Center  
You cannot use Windows Movie Maker or any other software for this  
purpose.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-1  
       
AV functions  
Windows Vista® has the following function.  
■ Watch TV or a DVD movie.  
■ Pause, rewind, and fast forward TV programs using the Media Center  
time shifting feature.  
■ Watch an instant replay.  
■ Play back your digital videos.  
■ View your digital pictures, or play them as a slide show.  
■ Browse, select, and play music CDs and DVD movies.  
■ Update the Television Program Guide from the Internet.  
■ Listen to FM radio  
When the Media Center is going to be used, be sure that the computer is  
hooked up to an AC adaptor, and please use the AC power. If this is used  
under battery power, you are in danger of experiencing recording failures,  
sound fades, or frames being dropped from videos due to battery depletion.  
For more information, refer to the manual in the Microsoft® Windows Vista®.  
Front operation panel  
This section describes the panels of the front operation panel in Windows  
mode.  
Only touch the panels with your fingers. Do not press the panels too  
strongly, or use a ballpoint pen or any other pointed object to touch the  
panels. Doing so may damage the panels.  
Nine panels are available for use: CD/DVD, Play/Pause, Stop, Previous,  
Next, Mute, Illumination On/Off, Camera, DOLBY.  
These panels allow you to manage Audio/Video functions, run applications  
and access utilities.  
Figure 8-1 Front operation panel  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-2  
   
AV functions  
Camera  
You can use this panel to open the camera software.  
CD/DVD panel  
Touching this panel will launch an application  
program that allows you to watch a DVD or listen  
to a CD.  
Touching this panel while the computer is on or in  
Sleep Mode, will launch Media Center. My Music  
is started when a music CD is inserted in the  
optical disc drive and My Video is started when a  
DVD video is in the drive.  
If the application you wish to run is not selected  
as the active window when these panels are  
touched, please switch to the application  
manually. For example, by clicking the taskbar  
item for the application window you wish to make  
active.  
Play/Pause panel  
STOP panel  
This panel allows you to play/pause chapters or  
tracks.  
Touch this panel to stop playing a track or  
chapter.  
Previous panel  
Next panel  
Touch this panel to move to the previous audio  
track, DVD chapter or recorded data.  
Touch this panel to move to the next audio track,  
DVD chapter or recorded data.  
Mute panel  
Touching this panel turns the sound on and off.  
Illumination On/Off  
panel  
Touch this panel to switch the lighting of  
indicators (e.g. Front operation panel, power  
button, volume dial, etc).  
Camera Panel  
DOLBY panel  
Touching this panel turns the web camera on and  
off.  
Touching this panel, to display the windows of a  
Sound function.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-3  
AV functions  
Windows Media Center  
Front operation Media Center - Media Center - Media Center -  
Icon  
panel  
My TV (TV)  
Play DVD  
(DVD)  
My Music (CD)  
CD/DVD  
-
Run Media  
Center and play Center and start  
Run Media  
DVD  
My Music  
Play/Pause  
Stop  
-
-
-
Play/Pause  
Play/Pause  
Stop  
Stop  
Previous  
Previous  
chapter  
Previous track  
Nexr  
Mute  
-
Next chapter  
Next track  
Turns your computer sound on and off.  
Switch the lighting of indicators.  
Illumination  
On/Off panel  
Camera  
Turn the web camera on and offf.  
DOLBY  
Display the windows of a Sound function.  
User’s Manual  
8-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AV functions  
Remote Controller  
A remote controller, which is provided with some models, enables you to  
perform some functions of your computer from a distant location.  
There are two different types of remote controllers:  
■
■
Full size remote controller  
Slim size remote controller  
■ Some models are included with either a Full size remote controller or  
Slim size remote controller.  
■ Models which include the Slim size remote controller do not have a TV  
tuner installed and so do not allow viewing of TV programs.  
Your computer includes a TV Remote Controller which enables you to  
perform some functions of your computer from a distant location.  
The following figure shows the buttons on the Remote Controller.  
You can use your Remote Controller with Media Center to play CDs, DVDs  
and videos, to view pictures and to watch and record television programs.  
The Remote Controller helps you navigate through Media Center just as a  
cable TV remote control navigates cable TV options or controls the  
playback of a movie in a VCR or DVD player.  
Using the Remote Controller, you can:  
■ Navigate and control all Media Center windows.  
■ Control the video or live TV display.  
■ Place the computer in and out of Sleep Mode.  
Refer to the Using the Remote Controller section in this chapter for  
information on how to use the Remote Controller as well as how to install  
and remove its batteries.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-5  
   
AV functions  
Full Size Remote controller  
Access indicator  
Power  
Stop  
Pause  
Record  
Play  
Rewind  
Replay  
Forward  
Skip  
Start  
More  
Back  
Arrows  
OK Button  
Mute  
Volume Control  
Channel/  
Page Control  
Live TV  
Guide  
DVD Menu  
Recorded TV  
Numeric Keypad  
Clear  
Enter  
Figure 8-2 Remote Controller  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-6  
AV functions  
Access indicator  
Power  
Stop  
Pause  
Record  
Play  
Rewind  
Replay  
Forward  
Skip  
Start  
More  
Back  
Arrows  
OK Button  
Mute  
Volume Control  
Channel/  
Page Control  
Live TV  
Guide  
DVD Menu  
Recorded TV  
Numeric Keypad  
Teletext  
Clear  
Enter  
Blue  
Red  
Green  
Yellow  
Figure 8-3 Remote Controller  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-7  
AV functions  
Power  
Starts or terminates the operating system.  
This button functions like the Power button of  
your computer. By default, the Sleep Mode is  
equivalent to the Power Off state of your  
computer. To change the setting, click Start,  
select Control panel -> System and  
Maintenance -> Power Options. When  
pressing the Sleep button, the following three  
options are available: Do nothing, Sleep and  
Hibernation.  
Access indicator  
This indicator will glow while the Remote  
Controller is sending signals to the computer.  
Please note that this indicator will not light after  
the battery has been completely discharged.  
Record  
Stop  
Records the selected television program and  
stores it on your hand disk drive.  
Stops the media currently playing.  
Pause  
Pauses an audio or video track, and live or  
recorded TV programs.  
Play  
Plays the selected media.  
REW (Rewind)  
Moves the media (video, DVD, music, and so  
on) backwards.  
FWD (Fast Forward) Moves the media (video, DVD, music, and so  
on) forwards.  
Replay  
Skip  
Moves media backward (seven seconds for  
videos and live TV, one music track or one DVD  
chapter at a time).  
Moves media forward (30 seconds for videos  
and live TV, one music track or one DVD  
chapter).  
Back  
Displays the previous window.  
More Info  
Arrows  
The button provides more details on a TV  
program than is listed in the Guide.  
Moves the cursor to navigate within Media  
Center windows.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-8  
AV functions  
OK  
Selects the desired action or window option. It  
acts like the ENTER Key. If watching TV in full  
screen mode, pressing OK switches back to the  
previous viewed channel. Press again to toggle  
back. It acts the same way as a Jump button on  
some TV remote controls.  
Volume +  
Volume -  
Start  
Increases the volume while watching TV,  
viewing DVD's or replaying CD's.  
Decreases the volume while watching TV,  
viewing DVD's or replaying CD's.  
Opens Media Center to the main window.  
Channel/Page up (+) Changes the TV channel or moves a page up  
and down (-)  
and down, depending on the available options.  
Mute  
Turns your computer sound off.  
Recorded TV  
Guide  
Allows you to start recording of TV programs.  
The Recorded TV feature of Media Center will  
be activated.  
Opens the Television Program Guide to display  
available TV channels and programs to watch  
and record.  
Live TV  
A shortcut to the full screen view. It also takes  
you to the current point in a live TV program after  
pausing live TV.  
DVD Menu  
Numbers  
Opens the main menu on a DVD movie, if  
available.  
Allows you to select a channel or chapter  
number while watching TV, or CD/DVD replay.  
Numbers, letters or symbols can be entered.  
To select a channel or chapter number of two or  
more digits, press the buttons sequentially. For  
example, press the "1" button and then the "0"  
button to select the number 10.  
Clear  
Enter  
Deletes entered numbers, letters or symbols.  
The OK button on the Remote Controller has the  
same functions.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-9  
AV functions  
Red, Green, Yellow  
and Blue buttons  
It jumps to a registration link.  
These buttons are not provided with some  
models.  
Teletext  
Starts or terminates the Teletext mode.  
This button is not provided with some models.  
Slim Size Remote Controller  
Brightness up  
Power  
Brightness down  
CD/DVD  
DVD Menu  
Volume +  
Illumination On/Off  
Arrows  
OK  
Volume -  
Back  
Mute  
More info  
Rewind  
Start  
Play/Pause  
Fast Forward  
Stop  
Skip  
Replay  
Figure 8-4 Slim Size Remote Controller  
CD/DVD  
Pressing this button will launch an  
application program that allows you to watch  
a DVD or listen to a CD.  
Pressing this button while the computer is on or  
in Sleep Mode, will launch Media Center. My  
Music is started when a music CD is inserted in  
the optical disc drive and My Video is started  
when a DVD video is in the drive. If the  
application you wish to run is not selected as the  
active window when these buttons are pressed,  
please switch to the application manually. For  
example, by clicking the taskbar item for the  
application window you wish to make active.  
Brightness down  
Decreases the computer's display panel  
brightness in individual steps.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-10  
AV functions  
Brightness up  
Power  
Increases the computer's display panel  
brightness in individual steps.  
Starts or terminates the operating system.  
This button functions like the Power button of  
your computer. By default, the Sleep Mode is  
equivalent to the Power Off state of  
yourcomputer. To change the setting, click Start,  
select Control panel -> System and  
Maintenance -> Power Options. The following  
four options are available: Do nothing, Sleep,  
Hibernate and Shut down  
Volume +  
Volume -  
DVD Menu  
Increases the volume while viewing DVD's or  
replaying CD's.  
Decreases the volume while viewing DVD's or  
replaying CD's.  
Opens the main menu on a DVD movie, if  
available.  
Arrows  
OK  
Moves the cursor to navigate within Media  
Center windows.  
Selects the desired action or window option. It  
acts like the ENTER Key.  
Illumination On/Off  
Pressing this button to switch the lighting of  
indicators (e.g. Front operation panel, power  
button, volume dial, etc).  
Mute  
Turns your computer sound off.  
Back  
Displays the previous window.  
More Info  
Start  
This button has the same function as the  
secondary (right) mouse button.  
Opens Media Center to the main window.  
REW (Rewind)  
Play/Pause  
Moves the media (video, DVD, music, and so  
on) backwards.  
Plays the selected media. Pauses an audio or  
video track.  
FWD (Fast Forward) Moves the media (video, DVD, music, and so  
on) forwards.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-11  
AV functions  
Replay  
Moves media backward (seven seconds for  
videos, one music track or one DVD chapter at a  
time).  
Stop  
Skip  
Stops the media currently playing.  
Moves media forward (30 seconds for videos,  
one music track or one DVD chapter).  
Using the Remote Controller  
Some computers include a remote control unit, which allows you to control  
some of your computer’s functions from a distant location.  
■ The Remote Controller is designed specifically for this computer.  
■ Some application programs may not support remote control functions.  
Operational range of the Remote Controller  
Point the Remote controller at your computer and press a button. The  
operational angle and distance are described below.  
Distance  
Angle  
Within 5 m from the infrared receiver window.  
Within a 30 degree horizontal and 15 degree  
vertical range of the infrared receiver window.  
Infrared receiver  
window  
30 degrees  
15 degrees  
(vertically)  
30 degrees  
15 degrees  
(vertically)  
5m  
Remote Controller  
Figure 8-5 Operational range of the remote control  
* The appearance of the provided Remote Controller may vary from model  
to model.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-12  
 
AV functions  
Even if within the effective scope as described above, the remote control  
may malfunction or not work correctly in the following cases.  
■ When an obstacle stands between the infrared receiver window of your  
computer and the Remote Controller.  
■ When direct sunlight or strong fluorescent light strikes the infrared  
receiver window.  
■ When the infrared receiver window or the infrared emission part of the  
Remote Controller is dirty.  
■ When other computers which use an infrared remote controller are  
used near to your computer.  
■ When a low battery condition is present.  
Installing/Removing batteries  
Be sure to install the provided AA type or CR2016 type batteries before  
using the remote controller.  
The procedures for installing and removing the batteries vary depending on  
the type of the Remote Controller. Check the type and then install or  
remove the batteries as instructed.  
Store the battery for the remote control beyond the reach of children.  
If a child swallows a battery, this might result in choking. If it happens,  
contact a doctor immediately.  
Observe the following precautions when using the battery of the Remote  
Controller.  
■ Do not use batteries other than those specified.  
■ Ensure that you insert the batteries with their polarities correctly  
aligned (+ or -).  
■ Do not recharge, heat, disassemble or short the battery, or put it into a  
fire or flame.  
■ Do not use a battery whose 'recommended expiration date' has been  
reached, or which is completely discharged.  
■ Do not use different types of batteries or old and new batteries at the  
same time.  
■ Do not carry the battery together with metal necklaces, hairpins or  
other metal accessories.  
■ When storing or disposing of used batteries, make sure to put some  
insulation tape on their terminals (+ and -) to avoid short-circuits.  
If these precautions are not followed, heating, fluid leakage or explosion  
may occur. This may cause burns or personal injury. If battery fluid gets on  
your skin or clothes, wash immediately with clean water. If battery fluid  
gets in your eyes, rinse your eyes with clean water immediately and see a  
doctor. Do not touch the battery fluid on instruments or devices with bare  
hands. Wipe off with a cloth or paper towel.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-13  
 
AV functions  
Type of battery that can be used for the Remote Controller  
When the batteries shipped with the Remote Controller are discharged,  
replace them with commercially available AA manganese batteries or AA  
alkaline batteries. Other types or battery should not be used.  
Installing the batteries  
1. Open the battery cover on the back of the Remote Controller.  
Slide the cover in the direction of the arrow to remove the cover.  
Battery cover  
Figure 8-6 Opening the battery cover  
2. Insert the batteries in place.  
Be sure to place the batteries with their polarities (+ and -) in the correct  
position.  
Batteries  
Figure 8-7 Inserting the batteries  
3. Close the battery cover.  
Close the cover securely until it clicks.  
Battery cover  
Figure 8-8 Closing the battery cover  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-14  
AV functions  
Replacing the batteries  
When the batteries in the Remote Controller reach the end of their life, the  
Remote Controller may not operate correctly or work only within a short  
distance from your computer. In this instance, you should purchase new  
batteries and replace the discharged ones.  
1. Open the battery cover on the back of the Remote Controller.  
2. Replace the batteries.  
Be sure to place the batteries with their polarities (+ and -) in the correct  
position.  
Batteries  
Figure 8-9 Removing the batteries  
3. Close the battery cover.until it clicks.  
Slim size remote controller  
Installing the battery  
1. Open the battery cover on the back side of the remote controller.  
Battery cover  
Figure 8-10 Opening the battery cover  
2. Be sure to place the battery with correct polarities. Press the battery  
down to the stopper then push it forward to fit into the battery case.  
Battery  
Stopper  
Figure 8-11 Inserting the battery  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-15  
AV functions  
3. Close the battery cover. Close the cover securely until it clicks.  
Battery cover  
Figure 8-12 Closing the battery cover  
Replacing the battery  
1. Open the battery cover on the back side of the remote controller.  
2. Hold down the stopper and slide the battery out of battery case.  
Battery  
Stopper  
Figure 8-13 Removing the batteries  
3. Insert the battery in place. Be sure to place the batteries with correct  
polarities. Press the battery down to the stopper then push it forward to  
fit into the battery case.  
4. Close the battery cover. Close the cover securely until it clicks.  
Placing Slim size remote controller  
Inserting a Slim size remote controller  
To insert a Slim size remote controller, follow the steps as detailed below:  
1. Make sure the ExpressCard slot is empty.  
2. Set the front side upward and insert a Slim size remote controller.  
ExpressCard slot  
Slim size remote  
controller  
Figure 8-14 Inserting a Slim size remote controller  
3. Press a Slim size remote controller gently to ensure a firm connection is  
made.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-16  
AV functions  
Removing a Slim size remote controller  
To remove a Slim size remote controller, follow the steps as detailed below:  
1. Press a Slim size remote controller slightly to make it stretch out.  
2. Grasp a Slim size remote controller and pull it out from the slot.  
ExpressCard slot  
Slim size remote  
controller  
Figure 8-15 Removing a Slim size remote controller  
Set-top box Connection Method and Watching TV on the  
Media Center  
This section explains how to connect the set-top box and configure settings  
for watching TV.  
Some models are equipped with a TV tuner.  
Connecting the set-top box  
Connect the computer and set-top box using the following procedure to  
watch TV using the set-top box.  
The CATV cable and the coaxial cable are the separate sales.  
1. Connect the end of the infrared transmitter cable into the computer’s  
infrared transmitter cable port.  
That the infrared remote control for your set-top box must be compatible in  
order to function.  
Infrared  
transmitter cable  
port  
Infrared  
transmitter cable  
Figure 8-16 Connecting the infrared transmitter cable  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-17  
 
AV functions  
2. Connect the other end of the infrared transmitter cable to a set-top box.  
It is placed in front of the infrared receiver window on the set-top box to  
allow the Full size remote controller to be used to change channels.  
3. Connect the end of coaxial cable (1) to the TV antenna port of your  
computer. Refer to Connecting the antenna cable section in Chapter 4,  
Operating Basics, for details.  
4. Connect the other end of the coaxial cable (1) to the Splitter Out port of  
a splitter.  
5. Connect the end of the coaxial cable (2) to the Splitter In port of a  
splitter.  
6. Connect the other end of the coaxial cable (2) to the Satellite Out port of  
a set-top box.  
7. Connect the end of the CATV cable to the Satellite In port of a set-top  
box.  
8. Connect the other end of the CATV cable to the wall socket.  
Infrared transmitter cable  
Wall socket  
CATV cable  
Satellite In port  
Satellite Out port  
Set-top box  
Coaxial cable (2)  
Splitter In port  
Splitter  
Splitter Out port  
Coaxial cable (1)  
Figure 8-17 Connection method for the computer and set-top box  
Media Center Environment Settings  
Activating Media Center for the first time  
1. Activate Media Center.  
The setup screen appears. Configure settings according to your  
environment.  
Follow the screen instructions and configure settings according to the  
environment used.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-18  
AV functions  
Changing settings  
Refer to the following procedures to change settings that are already  
configured.  
1. Activate Media Center.  
2. Click in the following order: click Tasks -> settings -> TV -> Set Up TV  
Signal.  
3. The Set Up Your TV Signal window is displayed, and click Next.  
4. Follow the screen instructions and configure settings according to the  
environment used.  
Image data cannot be imported, edited, watched or saved to DVD by  
connecting the Media Center model to external devices such as TV, video  
deck or analog video camera.  
Listen to radio  
This section describes how to use of FM software to listen to radio.  
Setting FM software  
1. Activate Media Center.  
2. Click in the following order: click Tasks -> settings -> TV -> Set Up TV  
Signal.  
3. Follow the wizard to select your region.  
4. Select I will manually configure my TV signal in the Automatic TV  
Signal Setup screen.  
5. Select Antenna in the Select Your TV Signal screen.  
Starting FM software  
1. Active Media Center.  
2. To launch the FM software, scroll to Toshiba then click FM Tuner.  
3. The FM tuner screen is displayed, to find a radio section, click - / +  
button or << / >> button below the Step or Seek.  
If you know the frequency of the station, enter the numbers.  
4. To save the station which you found, click a Preset button.  
Changing of presets  
1. Active Media Center.  
2. To launch the FM software, scroll to Toshiba then click FM Tuner.  
3. Choose a preset which you want to edit by < / > button of Preset.  
4. Enter the number which you know then press Enter key to change  
preset.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-19  
   
AV functions  
QosmioEngine  
Users can select from three video quality modes depending on their  
preferences for watching videos.  
Modes  
There are the following three modes.  
■ Dynamic: Users can enjoy videos in a bright and exciting way.  
■ Standard: Users can enjoy videos in their room in a relaxed way.  
■ Theater: Users can enjoy videos as if they were in a theater in their  
dimly-lit room.  
Two sharpness levels are available: ON and OFF, with the Image  
sharpness being emphasized if ON is selected.  
Restrictions of the QosmioEngine  
The current mode will be maintained, and should be restored the next time  
the computer is turned on, and after the computer returns from Sleep Mode  
or Hibernation Mode.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8-20  
   
Chapter 9  
Optional Devices  
Optional devices can expand the computer's capabilities and its versatility.  
This chapter describes the connection or installation of the following  
devices:  
To connect optional devices (such as USB device or External monitor) to  
the computer, be sure to check the shape and orientation of the connector  
before connecting.  
Cards/memory  
■ ExpressCard  
■ Bridge media slot  
■ Secure Digital (SD) Card (SD memory card, SDHC memory card,  
miniSD Card, microSD Card)  
■ Memory Stick (Memory Stick Duo, Memory Stick PRO, Memory  
Stick PRO Duo)  
■ xD picture card  
■ MultiMediaCard  
■ Memory expansion  
Power devices  
■ Battery packs  
■ Universal AC Adaptor  
■ Battery Charger  
Peripheral devices  
■ Hard disk drive pack  
■ USB floppy diskette drive  
■ eSATA  
■ External monitor  
■ HDMI  
■ i.LINK (IEEE1394)  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-1  
     
Optional Devices  
Other  
■ Security lock  
ExpressCard  
The computer is equipped with a single ExpressCard slot into which any  
ExpressCard device that meets industry standards, either manufactured by  
TOSHIBA or another vendor, can be installed. The slot supports hot plug  
connection and utilizes the PCI Express interface that supports the reading  
and writing of data at a theoretical maximum rate of 2.5Gbps.  
Inserting an ExpressCard  
The Windows hot-install feature allows you to insert ExpressCards while  
the computer is turned on.  
■ Do not insert an ExpressCard while the computer is in Sleep Mode or  
Hibernation Mode as you may find that some cards do not work  
properly.  
To insert an ExpressCard, follow the steps as detailed below:  
1. Press the PC Card eject button to partially extend it out of the computer.  
2. Press the extended PC Card eject button in order to eject the Dummy  
card partially out of the computer.  
3. Grasp the Dummy card and draw it.  
4. Insert the ExpressCard into the ExpressCard slot on the side of the  
computer.  
5. Press the ExpressCard gently to ensure a firm connection is made.  
ExpressCard  
ExpressCard slot  
Figure 9-1 Inserting the ExpressCard  
6. After inserting the ExpressCard you should refer to its documentation  
and also check the configuration in Windows in order to ensure that it is  
correct.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-2  
     
Optional Devices  
Removing an ExpressCard  
To remove an ExpressCard, follow the steps as detailed below.  
1. Open the Safely Remove Hardware icon on the Windows Task Bar.  
2. Point to ExpressCard and click the left Touch Pad control button.  
3. Press the ExpressCard eject button to partially extend it out of the  
computer.  
If the ExpressCard is not inserted all the way into the computer, the eject  
button may not cause it to pop out sufficiently to allows it to be grasped. In  
this instance, simply push the ExpressCard firmly back into the computer  
and then press the eject button again.  
4. Press the extended eject button in order to eject the ExpressCard  
partially out of the computer.  
5. Grasp the ExpressCard and remove it.  
Express Card  
Figure 9-2 Removing the ExpressCard  
6. Insert the Dummy card into the PC Card slot.  
When you do not use a PC card, please be sure to insert a Dummy card.  
Bridge media slot  
The computer is equipped with a Bridge media slot that can accommodate  
some kinds of memory media with various memory capacities so that you  
can easily transfer data from devices, such as digital cameras and  
Personal Digital Assistants.  
■ Keep foreign objects out of the Bridge media slot. Never allow metal  
objects, such as screws, staples and paper clips, to enter the computer  
or Keyboard. Foreign metal objects can create a short circuit, which  
can cause computer damage and fire, possibly resulting in serious  
injury.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-3  
     
Optional Devices  
■ This Bridge media slot supports the following memory media.  
■ Secure Digital (SD) Card (SD memory card, SDHC memory card,  
miniSD Card, microSD Card)  
■ Memory Stick (Memory Stick Duo, Memory Stick PRO, Memory  
Stick PRO Duo)  
■ xD picture card  
■ MultiMediaCard (MMC)  
■ Please note that an adaptor is required to use miniSD/microSD Card.  
■ Please note that an adaptor is required to use Memory Stick PRO Duo.  
■ Please note that not all memory media have been tested and verified to  
work correctly. Therefore, it is not possible to guarantee that all  
memory media will operate properly.  
■ The slot does not support Magic Gate functions.  
xD picture card  
MultiMediaCard  
(MMC)  
Memory Stick  
Secure Digital  
(SD) Card  
microSD card  
and adaptor  
Figure 9-3 Examples of memory media  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-4  
Optional Devices  
Memory media  
This section provides the important safety precautions in order to handle  
your memory media.  
Points to note about the SD/SDHC memory card  
SD/SDHC memory cards comply with SDMI (Secure Digital Music  
Initiative), which is a technology adopted to prevent unlawful copy or  
playback of digital music. For this reason, you cannot copy or playback  
protected material on another computer or other device, and you may not  
reproduce any copyrighted material except for your personal enjoyment.  
Below is a simple explanation for distinguishing SD memory cards from  
SDHC memory cards.  
■ SD and SDHC memory cards appear the same externally.  
■ The logo on SD and SDHC memory cards is different, so pay careful  
attention to the logo when purchasing.  
■ The SD memory card logo is (  
).  
■ The SDHC memory card logo is (  
).  
■ The maximum capacity of SD memory cards is 2GB. The maximum  
capacity of SDHC memory cards is 16G.  
Card Type  
Capacities  
SD  
8MB, 16MB, 32MB, 64MB, 128MB, 256MB,  
512MB, 1GB, 2GB  
SDHC  
4GB, 8GB, 16GB  
Memory media format  
New media cards are formatted according to specific standards. If you wish  
to reformat a media card, be sure to do so with a device that uses media  
cards.  
Formatting an SD/SDHC memory card  
SD/SDHC memory cards are sold already formatted in conformity to  
specific standards. If you reformat an SD/SDHC memory card, be sure to  
reformat it with a device such as digital camera or digital audio player that  
uses the SD/SDHC memory cards, not with the format command provided  
within Windows.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-5  
Optional Devices  
Media care  
This section provides tips on protecting data stored on your CD's, DVD's  
and floppy diskettes. Handle your media with care. Following the simple  
precautions listed below will increase the lifetime of your media and protect  
the data stored on it.  
CD/DVDs  
1. Store your CD's and DVD's in the containers they originally came in to  
protect them and keep them clean.  
2. Do not bend the CD's or DVD's.  
3. Do not write on, apply a sticker to, or otherwise mar the surface of the  
CD or DVD that contains the data.  
4. Hold the CD or DVD by its outside edge or the edge on the center hole -  
any fingerprints on the surface of the disc can prevent the drive from  
properly reading data.  
5. Do not expose the CD or DVD to direct sunlight, extreme heat or cold.  
6. Do not place heavy objects on your CD's or DVD's.  
7. If your CD's or DVD's become dusty or dirty, wipe them with a clean dry  
cloth from the center hole outwards - do not wipe in a circular direction.  
If necessary, you can use a cloth that has been lightly dampened in  
water or a neutral cleaner but you must not use benzine, thinner or any  
similar cleaning solution.  
Floppy diskettes  
The USB floppy diskette drive is available only as an option.  
1. Store your floppy diskettes in the container they came in to protect them  
and keep them clean. If a floppy diskette becomes dirty, clean it with a  
soft, lightly dampened cloth - do not use cleaning fluid.  
2. Never open the shutter or touch the magnetic surface of your floppy  
diskette - doing this could permanently damage it and lose data.  
3. Always handle floppy diskettes with care to prevent the loss of stored  
data.  
4. Always apply the floppy diskette label in the correct location and never  
apply a new label on top of an existing one - in this instance the label  
could come loose and damage the floppy diskette drive.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-6  
 
Optional Devices  
5. Never use a pencil for writing on a floppy diskette label as the dust from  
the pencil lead could cause a system malfunction if it found its way onto  
the computer's components. In this instance, always use a felt-tipped  
pen and write the label first before applying it to the floppy diskette.  
6. Never put a floppy diskette in a location where water or other liquid may  
make contact with it, or where it is excessively damp - either of these  
conditions could cause data loss.  
7. Never use a wet or damp floppy diskette - this could damage the floppy  
diskette drive or other devices within the computer.  
8. Data may be lost if the floppy diskette is twisted, bent, or exposed to  
direct sunlight, extreme heat or cold.  
9. Do not place heavy objects on your floppy diskettes.  
10. Do not eat, smoke, or use items such as erasers near your floppy  
diskettes as foreign particles inside the jacket of the floppy diskette can  
damage the magnetic surface.  
11. Magnetic energy can destroy the data on your floppy diskettes. In view  
of this you should keep your floppy diskettes away from speakers,  
radios, televisions and other sources of magnetic fields.  
About the write-protect  
The following memory media have a function for protect.  
■ SD Card (SD memory card, SDHC memory card)  
■ Memory Stick (Memory Stick, Memory Stick PRO, Memory Stick PRO  
Duo)  
■ MultiMediaCard (MMC)  
Set the write-protect switch to the lock position, if you do not want to record  
data.  
Inserting a memory media  
The following instructions apply to all types of supported media devices. To  
insert a memory media, follow the steps as detailed below:  
1. Turn the memory media so that the contacts (metal areas) are face  
down.  
2. Insert the memory media into the Bridge media slot on the side of the  
computer.  
3. Press the memory media gently to ensure a firm connection is made.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-7  
Optional Devices  
Bridge Media Slot  
Memory Media  
Figure 9-4 Inserting a memory media  
■ Press gently until the cover into place.  
■ Make sure memory media is oriented properly before you insert it. If  
you insert the media in wrong direction, you may not be able to remove  
it.  
■ When inserting memory media, do not touch the metal contacts. You  
could expose the storage area to static electricity, which can destroy  
data.  
■ Do not turn the computer off or switch to Sleep Mode or Hibernation  
Mode while files are being copied - doing so may cause data to be lost.  
Removing a memory media  
The following instructions apply to all types of supported media devices. To  
remove a memory media, follow the steps as detailed below:  
1. Open the Safely Remove Hardware icon on the Windows Task Bar.  
2. Point to memory media and click the left Touch Pad control button.  
3. Press the memory media to partially extend it out of the computer.  
4. Grasp the media and remove it.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-8  
Optional Devices  
Bridge Media Slot  
Memory Media  
Figure 9-5 Removing memory media  
■ Press gently until the cover into place.  
■ Make sure the Bridge Media slot indicator is out before you remove  
the memory media or turn off the computer’s power. If you remove the  
memory media or turn off the power while the computer is accessing  
the memory media, you may lose data or damage the media.  
■ Do not remove the memory media while the computer is in Sleep or  
Hibernation Mode. The computer could become unstable or data in the  
memory media could be lost.  
■ Do not remove only the miniSD/microSD Card while leaving the  
adaptor in the Bridge Media slot.  
Additional memory module  
You can install additional memory into the computer in order to increase the  
amount of system memory that is available. This section describes how to  
install and remove optional memory modules.  
■ You should place a mat beneath the computer in order to prevent the  
computer's lid from becoming scratched or damaged when you are  
installing/replacing the memory module. In this instance you should  
avoid mats that are made of materials that hold or generate static  
electricity.  
■ When installing or removing a memory module, you must ensure that  
you do not touch any other internal areas of the computer.  
■ Insert the two memory modules into Slot A and Slot B respectively. The  
computer will operate in dual channel mode.  
You can access the inserted memory modules efficiently in dual  
channel.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-9  
   
Optional Devices  
■ Use only memory modules approved by TOSHIBA.  
■ Do not try to install or remove a memory module under the following  
conditions.  
a. The computer is turned on.  
b. The computer was shut down in either Sleep or Hibernation Mode.  
c. Wake-up on LAN is enabled.  
d. The wireless communication switch is turned on.  
■ Be careful not to let screws or other foreign matter fall into the  
computer. It could cause malfunction or electric shock.  
■ Additional memory module is a precision electronic component that  
may be fatally damaged by static electricity. Since the human body can  
carry static electricity, it is important that you discharge yourself before  
touching or installing any additional memory modules. To discharge  
your body’s static electricity, simply touch any metal close to you with  
bare hands.  
■ In order to ensure that the computer power is not turned on while  
working, set the Wireless communication switch to OFF.  
Point to note about memory module error  
If you install a memory module that is not compatible with the computer, the  
Power indicator will flashes (on for 0.5 seconds, off for 0.5 seconds) in the  
following ways;  
■ If there is an error in only Slot A or no memory module is inserted in Slot  
A: repeatedly flashes amber twice, then green.  
■ If there is an error in Slot B: repeatedly flashes amber, then green twice.  
■ If there are errors in both Slot A and Slot B: repeatedly flashes amber  
twice, then green twice.  
In all instances you should shut down the computer and remove the  
incompatible module(s).  
Use a #0 point Phillips screwdriver to remove and fasten the screws - the  
use of an incorrect screwdriver can damage the screw heads.  
Installing a memory module  
The computer contains slots for two memory modules, one positioned  
immediately over the other - the procedures are the same for installing  
either module.  
1. Shut down the computer - make sure the Power indicator is off (refer to  
the Turning off the power section in Chapter 3, Getting Started if  
required).  
2. Remove the AC adaptor and all cables and peripherals connected to  
the computer.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-10  
 
Optional Devices  
3. Turn the computer upside down and remove the battery pack (refer to  
Replacing the battery pack section in Chapter 6, Power, if required).  
Screws  
Memory module cover  
Slot A  
Slot B  
Figure 9-6 Removing the memory module cover  
4. Align the notch of the memory module with that of the memory module  
slot and gently insert the module into the slot at about a 45 degree  
angle before holding it down until the latches on either side snap into  
place.  
■ Slot A is reserved for the first memory module. Use slot B for expansion  
memory modules. If only one module is installed, use slot A.  
■ When inserting or removing memory modules, make sure to use the  
correct slot (A or B). On this computer the left slot is slot A.  
■ Align the grooves along the edges of the memory module with the  
locking tabs on the connector and insert the memory module into the  
connector firmly - if you find it difficult to install the memory module,  
gently prise the locking tabs outwards using the tip of your finger.  
Please also ensure that you hold the memory module along its left and  
right hand edges - the edges with the grooves in.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-11  
Optional Devices  
■ Never allow metal objects, such as screws, staples and paper clips, to  
enter the computer or keyboard. Foreign metal objects can create a  
short circuit, which can cause computer damage and fire, possibly  
resulting in serious injury.  
■ Do not touch the connectors on the memory module or on the  
computer. Debris on the connectors may cause memory access  
problems.  
5. Seat the memory module cover in place and secure it with one screw.  
Take care to ensure that the memory module cover is firmly closed.  
Memory module cover  
Screws  
Figure 9-7 Seating the memory module cover  
6. Install the battery pack - refer to Replacing the battery pack section in  
Chapter 6, Power, if required.  
7. Turn your computer over.  
8. Turn the computer on and make sure the added memory is recognized -  
to confirmed it, Start -> Control Panel -> System and Maintenance ->  
System icon.  
Removing a memory module  
The slot A is reserved for main memory. Use the slot B for expanded  
memory. If only one card is installed, use the slot A.  
To remove the memory module, follow the steps as detailed below:  
1. Set the computer to Boot Mode and turn its power off - make sure the  
Power indicator is off (refer to the Turning on the power section in  
Chapter 3, Getting Started if required).  
2. Remove the AC adaptor and all cables and peripherals connected to  
the computer.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-12  
 
Optional Devices  
3. Turn the computer upside down and remove the battery pack (refer to  
Replacing the battery pack section in Chapter 6, Power, if required).  
4. Push the latches away from the module in order to release it.  
5. Grasp the memory module by its edges and remove it from the  
computer.  
■ If you use the computer for a long time, the memory modules and the  
circuits locating close to the memory modules will become hot. In this  
case, let them cool to room temperature before you replace them.Or  
you will get burnt if you touch any of them.  
■ Do not touch the connectors on the memory module or on the  
computer. Debris on the connectors may cause memory access  
problems.  
6. Seat the memory module cover in place and secure it with one screw.  
Take care to ensure that the memory module cover is firmly closed.  
7. Install the battery pack - refer to Replacing the battery pack section in  
Chapter 6, Power, if required.  
8. Turn your computer over.  
Battery Packs  
You can increase the portability of the computer with additional battery  
packs so that, if you're away from an AC power source and your battery  
runs low, you can replace it with a freshly charged battery. Please refer to  
Chapter 6, Power for further information.  
Universal AC Adaptor  
If you frequently use your computer at more than one site, it may be  
convenient to purchase an additional AC adaptor to be kept at each site in  
order to remove the need to always carry the adaptor with you.  
Battery Charger  
The battery charger provides a convenient way to charge up to two Lithium  
Ion battery packs without requiring the use of your computer.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-13  
         
Optional Devices  
USB floppy diskette drive  
The USB floppy diskette drive accommodates either a 1.44MB or 720KB a  
3 2/1" floppy diskette and connects to one of the computer's USB ports.  
The USB floppy diskette drive is available only as an option.  
USB connector  
Disk-In-Use  
Indicator  
Floppy diskette slot  
Eject button  
Figure 9-8 USB floppy diskette drive  
USB connector  
Insert this connector into one of the free USB  
ports of your computer.  
Disk-In-Use Indicator This indicator glows when the floppy diskette is  
being accessed.  
Floppy diskette slot  
Eject button  
Insert a floppy diskette into this slot.  
When a floppy diskette is fully seated in the drive,  
the eject button will pop out. In order to remove  
the diskette, push the eject button in order to  
cause it to partially pop out of the drive and then  
remove it.  
Check the Disk-In-Use indicator when you use the floppy diskette drive.  
Do not press the eject button or turn off the computer while the light is  
glowing. Doing so could destroy data and damage the floppy diskette or  
the drive.  
In use, the following should be noted regarding the operation of the USB  
floppy diskette drive:  
■ The drive should be placed on a flat, horizontal surface.  
■ Do not set the drive on an incline greater than 20° while it is operating.  
■ Do not place anything on top of the drive.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-14  
   
Optional Devices  
Using the USB floppy diskette drive  
The USB floppy diskette drive accommodates either a 1.44MB or 720KB  
floppy diskette and connects to one of the computer's USB ports.  
Connecting the USB floppy diskette drive  
To connect the drive, plug the floppy diskette drive's USB connector into  
one of the computer's free USB ports.  
Make sure the connector is right side up and properly aligned with the  
socket. Do not try to force the connection; doing so can damage the  
connecting pins.  
USB Port  
USB connector  
Figure 9-9 Connecting the USB floppy diskette drive  
If you connect the USB floppy diskette drive after the computer has already  
been turned on, it will take about ten seconds for it to be recognized by the  
computer. Do not attempt to disconnect and reconnect the drive before this  
period has elapsed.  
Disconnecting the USB floppy diskette drive  
When you have finished using the USB floppy diskette drive, you can follow  
the procedures below in order to disconnect it:  
1. Wait for the Disk-In-Use Indicator light to go out to make sure all floppy  
diskette activity has stopped.  
If you disconnect the floppy diskette drive or turn off the power while the  
computer is accessing the drive you may lose data or damage the floppy  
diskette or the drive.  
2. Click the Safely Remove Hardware icon on the Task Bar.  
3. Click the USB floppy diskette drive device that you want to remove.  
4. Carefully pull the floppy diskette drive's USB connector out from within  
the computer's USB port.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-15  
 
Optional Devices  
eSATA (External Serial ATA)  
An device corresponding to eSATA function can be connected to the USB  
(eSATA combo) port on the computer.  
Connecting the eSATA device  
To connect an eSATA device, follow the steps as detailed below:  
1. Connect an eSATA cable to the eSATA/USB combo port.  
Make sure the connector is properly aligned with the socket.Do not try to  
force the connection, doing so can damage the connecting pins.  
eSATA/USB  
combo port  
eSATA cable  
Figure 9-10 Connecting an eSATA cable to the USB (eSATA combo) port  
■ A connected eSATA device may not be recognized if it is connected to  
the computer's eSATA/USB combo port while the computer is in Sleep  
Mode or Hibernation Mode. If this occurs, disconnect the eSATA device  
and then reconnect the device while the computer is turned on.  
■ If you connect an eSATA device after the computer has already been  
turned on, it will take about ten seconds for it to be recognized by the  
computer.  
Do not attempt to disconnect and reconnect the drive before this period  
has elapsed.  
Disconnecting an eSATA device  
When you have finished using an eSATA device, you can follow the  
procedures below in order to disconnect it:  
1. Wait for the indicator light of an eSATA device to go out to make sure all  
activity has stopped.  
If you disconnect an eSATA device or turn off the power while the  
computer is accessing the drive you may lose data or damage an eSATA  
device or the drive.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-16  
 
Optional Devices  
2. Click the Safely Remove Hardware icon on the Windows Taskbar.  
3. Click an eSATA device that you want to remove.  
4. Carefully pull an eSATA device's USB (eSATA combo) connector out  
from within the computer's USB (eSATA combo) port.  
External monitor  
An external analog monitor can be connected to the computer's external  
monitor port, with the computer supporting WUXGA video mode. In order to  
connect a monitor, follow the steps as detailed below:  
1. Turn the computer's power off.  
2. Connect the monitor cable to the external monitor port and tighten the  
screws on the left and right hand side of the connector as required.  
External Monitor Port  
Monitor Cable  
Figure 9-11 Connecting the monitor cable to the external monitor port  
3. Turn the external monitor’s power on.  
4. Turn the computer's power on.  
When you turn on the power, the computer will automatically recognize the  
monitor and determine whether it is a color or monochrome device. In the  
event that you find that there are issues getting an image displayed on the  
correct monitor, you should consider using the FN + F5 hot key to change  
the display settings (if you then disconnect the external monitor before you  
turn the computer's power off, be sure to press FN + F5 hot key again to  
switch to the internal display).  
Please refer to Chapter 5, The Keyboard, for further details on using hot  
keys to change the display setting.  
Do not disconnect the external monitor while in Sleep or Hibernation Mode.  
Turn off the computer before disconnecting the external monitor.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-17  
   
Optional Devices  
HDMI  
The Video data on your computer can be viewed on a TV set. To do so,  
connect your computer’s HDMI out port to the TV using the HDMI out  
cable.  
You can use the hotkeys FN + F5 to change the display device. Refer to  
Chapter 5, The Keyboard.  
As the port operation of all HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface)  
monitors have not been confirmed, some HDMI monitors may not function  
properly.  
Connecting the HDMI out port  
1. Plug one end of the HDMI cable into the HDMI out port of the HDMI  
device.  
HDMI Outport  
HDMI Cable  
Figure 9-12 Connecting the HDMI out port  
2. Plug the other end of the HDMI cable into the HDMI out port on your  
computer.  
When connecting or disconnecting an HDMI device to or from the  
computer, only do so when the computer is turned on or when the  
computer is completely turned off. Do not do so when the computer is in  
Sleep Mode or Hibernation Mode.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-18  
   
Optional Devices  
Settings for display video on HDMI  
To view video on the HDMI device, be sure to configure the following  
settings otherwise you may find that nothing is displayed.  
■ Be sure to use the FN + F5 HotKey to select the display device before  
starting to play video. Do not change the display device while playing  
video.  
■ Do not change the display device under the following conditions.  
■ While data is being read or written.  
■ While communication is being carried out.  
Select HD Format  
To select the display mode, follow the steps as detailed below:  
1. Click Start and click Control Panel.  
2. Click Appearance and Personalization.  
3. Click Personalization.  
4. Click Display Settings.  
5. Click Advanced Settings.  
6. Click List All Modes.  
7. Select the one of the below selection at "List All Modes".  
Display mode at "List All Modes"  
HD Format  
1080p  
1920 by 1080, True Color (32bit), 60Herts  
1920 by 1080, True Color (32bit), 30Herts  
(Interlaced)  
1080i  
1280 by 720, True Color (32bit), 60Herts  
720 by 576, True Color (32bit), 50Herts  
720 by 480, True Color (32bit), 60Herts  
720p  
576p  
480p  
The above display mode is a typical HDMI display mode. The selectable  
display modes will vary for different HDMI monitors.  
REGZA Link (PC Control)  
HDMI out port can connect with Type A connector HDMI cable.  
One HDMI cable can send and receive video, audio and control  
signals.HDMI-CEC (Consumer Electronics Control) is a standard in the CE  
Industry which allows devices to work together over an HDMI cable.  
By connecting a TV player which supports HDMI Control to this port, the  
remote control for the connected TV can be used to operate some of the  
computer functions.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-19  
 
Optional Devices  
Some models are supported with the REGZA Link.  
Using REGZA Link (PC Control)  
Toshiba notebooks with REGZA Link include a Toshiba utility dedicated to  
take advantage of its capabilities which can allow you to:  
■ Use the TV remote control to output the computer screen onto the TV  
screen.  
■ Use the TV remote control to launch, operate and close applications on  
your computer.  
■ Turn on the TV when the HDMI output is selected using the Fn + F5  
key.  
■ Switch the video output (HDMI or LCD) when executing certain desktop  
icons.  
■ Enable/Disable the REGZA Link function on the computer.  
i.LINK (IEEE1394)  
i.LINK ( IEEE1394), is used for high-speed data transfer between a range  
of compatible devices such as:  
■ Digital video cameras  
■ Hard disk drives  
■ Magneto Optical drives  
■ Writable optical disc drives  
i.LINK uses a four-pin connector which does not carry any electric current -  
therefore. External devices will need their own power supply in order to  
operate.  
Precautions  
■ Make a back-up of your data before transferring it to the computer.  
There is a possibility that the original data will be damaged. There is  
a particular risk that some frames will be deleted in the case of  
digital video transfer. TOSHIBA assumes no liability for such loss of  
data.  
■ Do not transfer data in areas where static electricity is easily  
generated or in areas subjected to electronic noise. Data can be  
destroyed.  
■ If you are transferring data through an IEEE1394 hub, do not  
connect or disconnect other devices from the hub during data  
transfer. There is a likelihood that data will be damaged. Connect all  
devices to the hub before you turn on the computer’s power.  
■ You may not use any copyrighted video or music data copied from a  
video camera except for your personal enjoyment.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-20  
     
Optional Devices  
■ If you connect/disconnect an i.LINK device to/from another i.LINK  
device that is currently exchanging data with the computer, data  
frames might be dropped.  
■ Make sure data transfer has ended or turn off the computer, before  
you:  
■ Connect/disconnect an i.LINK device to/from the computer.  
■ Connect/disconnect an i.LINK device to/from another i.LINK  
device that is connected to the computer.  
Connecting the i.LINK (IEEE1394) cable  
To connect the i.LINK (IEEE1394) cable, follow the steps as detailed below:  
1. Make sure the connectors are properly aligned and plug the i.LINK  
(IEEE1394) cable into the computer.  
i.LINK (IEEE1394) port  
Figure 9-13 Connecting the i.LINK (IEEE1394) cable into the computer  
2. Plug the other end of the cable into the device.  
Note of the following when you use i.LINK:  
■ You may need to install drivers for your i.LINK devices.  
■ Not all i.LINK devices have been tested. Therefore, compatibility with all  
i.LINK devices cannot be guaranteed.  
■ Some devices might not support sleep or automatic off functions.  
■ Do not connect or disconnect an i.LINK device while it is using an  
application or when the computer is automatically shutting it down to  
save power. Data might be destroyed.  
Disconnecting the i.LINK (IEEE1394) cable  
To disconnect the i.LINK (IEEE1394) cable, follow the steps as detailed  
below:  
1. Open the Safely Remove Hardware icon on the Windows Task Bar.  
2. Point to i.LINK (IEEE1394) device and click.  
3. Disconnect the cable from the computer then from the i.LINK device.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-21  
   
Optional Devices  
Refer also to the documentation that came with your i.LINK device  
Security lock  
A security locks enable you to anchor your computer a desk or other heavy  
object in order to help prevent unauthorized removal or theft. The computer  
has a security lock slot on its right side into which you can attach one end of  
the security cable, while the other end attaches to a desk or similar object.  
The methods used for attaching security cables differ from product to  
product. Please refer to the instructions for the product you are using for  
more information.  
Connecting the security lock  
In order to connect a security cable to the computer, follow the steps as  
detailed below:  
1. Turn the computer so its left hand side faces you.  
2. Align the security cable with the 'lock hole' and secure it in place.  
Security Latch Slot  
Figure 9-14 Security lock  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9-22  
   
Chapter 10  
Troubleshooting  
TOSHIBA have designed this computer for durability, however, should  
problems occur you are able to use the procedures detailed in this chapter  
to help determine the cause.  
All users should become familiar with this chapter as knowing what might  
go wrong can help prevent problems from occurring in the first place.  
Problem solving process  
Resolving problems will be much easier if you observe the following  
guidelines:  
■ Stop immediately when you recognize a problem exists as taking further  
action may result in data loss or damage, or you may destroy valuable  
problem related information that can help solve the problem.  
■ Observe what is happening - write down what the system is doing and  
what actions you performed immediately before the problem occurred.  
If you have a printer attached, print a copy of the screen using the  
computer's PRTSC key.  
Please also be aware that the questions and procedures described in this  
chapter are meant only as a guide, they are not definitive problem solving  
techniques. In reality many problems can be solved simply, but a few may  
require help from your reseller, dealer or service provider - if you find you  
need to consult others, be prepared to describe the problem in as much  
detail as possible.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10-1  
     
Troubleshooting  
Preliminary checklist  
You should always consider the simplest solution first - the items detailed in  
this checklist are easy to fix and yet can cause what appears to be a  
serious problem:  
■ Make sure you turn on all peripheral devices before you turn on the  
computer - this includes your printer and any other external device you  
are using.  
■ Before you attach an external device you should first turn the computer  
off, then when you turn the computer back on again it will recognize the  
new device.  
■ Make sure all optional accessories are configured properly in the  
computer's setup program and that all required driver software has  
been loaded (please refer to the documentation included with the  
optional accessories for further information on its installation and  
configuration).  
■ Check all cables to ensure they are correctly and firmly attached to the  
computer - loose cables can cause signal errors.  
■ Inspect all connecting cables for loose wires and all connectors for  
loose pins.  
■ Check that your floppy diskette, CD or DVD media is correctly loaded  
and, in the case of a floppy diskette, that its write protect tab is correctly  
set.  
Always try to make detailed notes of your observations and keep them in a  
permanent error log - this will help you to describe your problems to your  
reseller, dealer or service provider. In addition, if a problem recurs, the log  
you have made will help to identify the problem faster.  
Analyzing the problem  
Sometimes the computer will give you clues that can help you identify why  
it is malfunctioning. In view of this you should keep the following questions  
in mind:  
■ Which part of the computer is not operating properly - keyboard, hard  
disk drive, optical disc drive, display panel, touch pad, touch pad control  
buttons - as each device will produce different symptoms.  
■ Check the options within the operating system to ensure that its  
configuration is set properly.  
■ What appears on the display? Does it display any messages or random  
characters? If you have a printer attached, print a copy of the screen  
using the PRTSC key and, if possible, look up the messages in the  
documentation included with the computer, software or operating  
system.  
■ Check that all connecting cables are correctly and firmly attached as  
loose cables can cause erroneous or intermittent signals.  
■ Do any indicators light, if so, which ones, what color are they and do  
they stay on or blink? Write down what you see.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10-2  
 
Troubleshooting  
■ Do you hear any beeps, if so how many, are they long or short and are  
they high pitched or low pitched? In addition, is the computer making  
any unusual noises? Write down what you hear.  
Record your observations so you can describe them in detail to your  
reseller, dealer or service provider.  
Software  
The problems may be caused by your software or disk. If you  
cannot load a software package, the media may be damaged  
or the program might be corrupted - in these instances try  
loading another copy of the software if possible.  
If an error message appears while you are using a software  
package you should refer to the documentation supplied with  
it as this will usually include a problem solving section or a  
summary of error messages.  
Next, you should check any error messages against the  
operating system documentation.  
Hardware If you cannot find a software problem, you should then check  
the setup and configuration of your hardware. First run  
through the items in the preliminary checklist as described  
previously then, if you still cannot correct the problem, try to  
identify the source - the next section provides checklists for  
individual components and peripherals.  
Before using a peripheral device or application software that is not an  
authorized Toshiba part or product, make sure the device or software can  
be used with your computer. Use of incompatible devices may cause injury  
or may damage your computer.  
Hardware and system checklist  
This section discusses problems caused by your computer’s hardware or  
attached peripherals. Basic problems may occur in the following areas:  
■ System start-up  
■ Self test  
■ Fingerprint Sensor  
■ USB device  
■ Power  
■ Password  
■ Keyboard  
■ Internal display panel  
■ Hard disk drive  
■ eSATA device  
■ Memory expansion  
■ Recovery Discs  
■ Sound system  
■ External monitor  
■ Modem  
■ USB floppy diskette drive  
■ ExpressCard  
■ LAN  
■ SD/SDHC memory card,  
miniSD/microSD Card  
■ Memory Stick/Memory Stick  
PRO/Memory Stick PRO Duo  
■ xD picture card  
■ MultiMediaCard  
■ Infrared receiver window  
■ Pointing device  
■ Wireless LAN  
■ Bluetooth  
■ TV output function  
■ HDMI monitor output function  
■ i.LINK (IEEE1394) device  
■ Video Playback  
■ FM tuner  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10-3  
   
Troubleshooting  
System start-up  
When the computer does not start properly, check the following items:  
■ Self Test  
■ Power Sources  
■ Power-on Password  
Self test  
While booting up the computer, self test is executed automatically and the  
following will be displayed:  
S
This message remains on the screen for a few seconds.  
If the self test is successful, the computer tries to load the operating system  
according to how the Boot Priority option is set within the TOSHIBA HW  
Setup program.  
If any of the following conditions are present, the self test has failed:  
■ The computer stops and does not proceed to display information or  
messages except for the TOSHIBA logo.  
■ Random characters appear on the screen and the system does not  
function normally.  
■ The screen displays an error message.  
In these instances, turn off the computer, check all cable connections and  
then restart it - if the self test fails again, contact your reseller, dealer or  
service provider.  
Power  
When the computer is not plugged into an AC power outlet, the battery  
pack is the primary power source. However, your computer also has a  
number of other power resources, including an intelligent power supply and  
a Real Time Clock (RTC) battery, all of which are interrelated with any one  
having the ability to produce apparent power problems.  
This section provides checklists for AC power and the battery. If you cannot  
resolve a problem after following them, the cause may lie with another  
power related resource - in such an instance you should contact your  
reseller, dealer or service provider.  
User’s Manual  
10-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Troubleshooting  
Overheating power down  
If the processor's temperature reaches an unacceptably high level with  
either setting, the computer will automatically shuts down to prevent any  
damage - in this instance all unsaved data in memory will be lost.  
Problem  
Procedure  
Computer shuts down Leave the computer off until the DC IN indicator  
and DC IN indicator  
stops blinking.  
blinks amber  
It is recommended to leave the computer off until the its interior reaches  
room temperature even though the DC IN indicator stops blinking.  
If the computer has reached room temperature  
and it still does not start, or if it starts but shuts  
down quickly, contact your reseller, dealer or  
service provider.  
Computer shuts down This indicates a problem with the heat dispersal  
and its DC IN indicator system - you should contact your reseller, dealer  
is flashing in amber  
or service provider.  
AC power  
If you have trouble turning on the computer with the AC adaptor connected  
you should check the status of the DC IN indicator. Please refer to Chapter  
6, Power for further information.  
Problem  
Procedure  
AC adaptor doesn’t  
power the computer  
Check the connections to make sure that the  
power cord/adaptor is firmly connected to the  
(DC IN indicator does computer and a working power outlet.  
not glow blue)  
Check the condition of the cord and terminals. If  
the cord is frayed or damaged it should be  
replaced, while if the terminals are soiled, they  
should be cleaned with a clean cotton cloth.  
If the AC adaptor still does not power the  
computer, you should contact your reseller,  
dealer or service provider.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10-5  
   
Troubleshooting  
Battery  
If you suspect a problem with the battery, you should check the status of  
the DC IN indicator as well as the Battery indicator. Please refer to Chapter  
6, Power for more information on these indicators, together with general  
battery operation.  
Problem  
Procedure  
Battery doesn’t power The battery may be discharged - connect the AC  
the computer adaptor to recharge the battery.  
Battery doesn’t charge If the battery is completely discharged, it will not  
when the AC adaptor  
is attached (Battery  
indicator does not  
glow amber).  
begin charging immediately, in these instances  
you should wait a few minutes before trying  
again. If the battery still does not charge, you  
should check that the power outlet the AC  
adaptor is connected to is supplying power - this  
can be tested by plugging another appliance into  
it.  
Check whether the battery is hot or cold to the  
touch - if so, it will not charge properly and should  
be allowed to reach room temperature before  
you try again.  
Unplug the AC adaptor and remove the battery to  
make sure its connecting terminals are clean - if  
necessary wipe them with a soft dry cloth lightly  
dipped in alcohol.  
Connect the AC adaptor and replace the battery,  
taking care to ensure that it is securely seated in  
the computer.  
Check the Battery indicator - if it does not glow,  
allow the computer to charge the battery for at  
least twenty minutes. If the Battery indicator  
starts to glow after this period, allow the battery  
to continue to charge for at least another twenty  
minutes before turning on the computer.  
However, if the indicator still does not glow, the  
battery may be at the end of its operating life and  
should be replaced. However, if you do not  
believe the battery is at the end of its operating  
life, you should speak to your reseller, dealer or  
service provider.  
Battery doesn’t power If you frequently recharge a partially charged  
the computer as long  
as expected  
battery, the battery might not charge to its full  
potential - in these instances you should fully  
discharge the battery and then attempt to charge  
it again.  
Check the Power saver option under Select a  
power plan in the Power Options.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10-6  
 
Troubleshooting  
Real Time Clock  
Problem  
Procedure  
The RTC battery charge has become exhausted,  
The following  
message is displayed you should set the date and time in within the  
on the LCD:  
BIOS setup screen through the following steps:  
1. Press [F1] key. BIOS setup will boot up.  
2. Press [F2] to set the date in [System Date].  
3. Press [F2] to set the time in [System Time].  
RTC battery is low or  
CMOS checksum is  
inconsistent. Press  
[F2] key to set  
Date/Time.  
Password  
Problem  
Procedure  
Cannot enter  
password  
Please refer to the TOSHIBA Password Utility  
section in Chapter 6, Power for further  
information.  
Keyboard  
Keyboard problems can be caused by the setup and configuration of the  
computer - please refer to Chapter 5, The Keyboard for further information.  
Problem  
Procedure  
Some letter keys  
produce numbers  
Check that the numeric keypad overlay is not  
activated - press the FN + F11 hot key and try  
typing again.  
Output to screen is  
garbled  
Please refer to your software's documentation to  
ensure that its is not remapping the keyboard in  
any way (remapping involves changing or  
reassigning the function of each key).  
If you are still unable to use the keyboard, you  
should contact your reseller, dealer or service  
provider.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10-7  
         
Troubleshooting  
Internal display panel  
Apparent display panel problems may be related to the computer's setup  
and configuration - please refer to Chapter 7, HW Setup, for further  
information.  
Problem  
Procedure  
No display  
Press the FN + F5 hot keys to adjust the display  
priority, and to make sure it is not set for output to  
an external monitor.  
Markings appear on the These marks may have come from contact with  
LCD screen.  
the keyboard, Touch Pad while the display has  
been closed. You should try to remove the marks  
by gently wiping the display panel with a clean  
dry cloth or, if this fails, with a good quality LCD  
screen cleaner. In this latter instance you should  
always follow the instructions with the screen  
cleaner and always ensure you let the LCD  
screen dry properly before closing it.  
Problems above  
remain unresolved or  
other problems occur  
You should initially refer to the documentation  
supplied with you software to determine if it is  
this that is causing the problems. Alternatively  
you may wish to run the TOSHIBA PC  
Diagnostic Tool to check the general operation  
of the computer.  
If you are still unable to resolve the problem,  
contact your reseller, dealer or service provider.  
Hard disk drive  
Problem  
Procedure  
Computer does not  
boot from hard disk  
drive  
Check to see whether that is a floppy diskette in  
the floppy diskette drive or a CD-ROM/DVD-  
ROM in the optical disc drive - if so remove it and  
try to start the computer again.  
If this has no effect, check the Boot Priority  
setting within the TOSHIBA HW Setup utility -  
please refer to the Boot Priority section in  
Chapter 7, HW Setup for further information.  
Please refer to your operating system  
documentation in order to determine whether  
there is a problem with any of the operating  
system files or settings.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10-8  
   
Troubleshooting  
Problem  
Procedure  
Slow performance  
The files on the hard disk drive may be  
fragmented - in this instance you should run the  
disk Defragmentation utility to check the  
condition of your files and the hard disk drive.  
Please refer to the operating system's  
documentation or online Help File for further  
information on operating and using the  
Defragmentation utility.  
As a last resort you should reformat the hard disk  
drive and then reload the operating system and  
all other files and data. If you are still unable to  
resolve the problem, contact your reseller, dealer  
or service provider.  
DVD Super Multi drive  
For further information, please refer to Chapter 4, Operating Basics.  
Problem  
Procedure  
You cannot access a  
CD/DVD in the drive  
Make sure the drive's disc tray is securely closed -  
press it gently into the computer until it clicks into  
place.  
Open the drive's disc tray and ensure the CD or  
DVD is properly seated - it should lie flat with the  
label facing upwards.  
A foreign object in the drive's disc slot could  
block laser light from reading the CD or DVD -  
remove any foreign objects or obstructions that  
may be present.  
Check whether the CD or DVD is dirty - if it is,  
wipe it with a clean cloth lightly dipped in water or  
a neutral cleaner. Please refer to the Media care  
section in Chapter 4 for further details on  
cleaning the media.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10-9  
Troubleshooting  
Problem  
Procedure  
Some CD/DVD/DVDs The computer's software or hardware  
run correctly, but others configuration may be causing a problem - ensure  
do not  
that these configurations match the requirements  
of the CD/DVD media (refer to the CD's or DVD's  
documentation if available).  
Check the type of CD or DVD media that you are  
using - the drive supports the following:  
DVD:  
CD:  
DVD-ROM, DVD-Video  
CD-DA, CD-Text, Photo CDTM  
(single/multi-session), CD-ROM Mode  
1, Mode 2, CD-ROM XA Mode 2  
(Form1, Form2), Enhanced CD (CD-  
EXTRA), Addressing Method 2  
USB floppy diskette drive  
The USB floppy diskette drive is available only as an option.  
For further information, please refer to Chapter 4, Operating Basics.  
Problem  
Procedure  
Drive does not operate Check the connection between the computer and  
the drive to ensure that it is properly attached.  
Some programs run  
The computer's software or hardware  
correctly but others do configuration may be causing a problem - ensure  
not  
that these configurations match your  
requirements (refer to any relevant  
documentation, for example that supplied with  
any software in use, for further information).  
You cannot access the Try another floppy diskette in the drive - if you are  
external floppy  
diskette drive  
able to access this disk then it indicates the  
original disk and not the drive is probably causing  
the problem.  
If you are still unable to resolve the problem,  
contact your reseller, dealer or service provider.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10-10  
   
Troubleshooting  
ExpressCard  
For further information, please refer to Chapter 9, Optional Devices.  
Problem  
Procedure  
ExpressCard error  
occurs  
Remove the ExpressCard from the computer and  
then reinsert it in order to ensure it is firmly  
connected.  
In the event that the ExpressCard is attached to  
an external peripheral device, ensure that this  
connection is properly made.  
If the problem persists, then you should refer to  
the documentation supplied with your  
ExpressCard for further information.  
If you are still unable to resolve the problem,  
contact your reseller, dealer or service provider.  
SD/SDHC memory card, miniSD/microSD Card  
For further information, please refer to Chapter 9, Optional Devices.  
Problem  
Procedure  
SD/SDHC memory  
Remove the SD/SDHC memory card,  
card, miniSD/microSD miniSD/microSD Card from the computer and  
Card error occurs  
then reinsert it in order to ensure it is firmly  
connected.  
If the problem persists, then you should refer to  
the documentation supplied with your SD/SDHC  
memory card, miniSD/microSD Card for further  
information.  
You cannot write to an Remove the SD/SDHC memory card from the  
SD/SDHC memory  
card  
computer and check to ensure that it is not write  
protected.  
You cannot read a file Check to ensure the required file is actually on  
the SD/SDHC memory card, miniSD/microSD  
Card that is inserted into the computer.  
If you are still unable to resolve the problem,  
contact your reseller, dealer or service provider.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10-11  
       
Troubleshooting  
Memory Stick/Memory Stick Duo/Memory Stick PRO/Memory Stick  
PRO Duo  
For further information, please refer to Chapter 9, Optional Devices.  
Problem Procedure  
Memory Stick/Memory Remove the Memory Stick/Memory Stick  
Stick Duo/Memory  
Stick PRO/Memory  
Stick PRO Duo error  
occurs  
PRO/Memory Stick PRO Duo from the computer  
and then reinsert it in order to ensure it is firmly  
connected.  
If the problem persists, then you should refer to  
the documentation supplied with your Memory  
Stick/Memory Stick PRO/Memory Stick  
Duo/Memory Stick PRO Duo for further  
information.  
You cannot write to an Remove the Memory Stick/Memory Stick  
Memory Stick/Memory PRO/Memory Stick PRO Duo from the computer  
Stick Duo/Memory  
Stick PRO/Memory  
Stick PRO Duo  
and check to ensure that it is not write protected.  
You cannot read a file Check to ensure the required file is actually on  
the Memory Stick/Memory Stick PRO/Memory  
Stick PRO Duo that is inserted into the computer.  
If you are still unable to resolve the problem,  
contact your reseller, dealer or service provider.  
xD picture card  
For further information, please refer to Chapter 9, Optional Devices.  
Problem  
Procedure  
xD picture card error  
occurs  
Remove the xD picture card from the computer  
and then reinsert it in order to ensure it is firmly  
connected.  
If the problem persists, then you should refer to  
the documentation supplied with your xD picture  
card for further information.  
You cannot read a file Check to ensure the required file is actually on  
the xD picture card that is inserted into the  
computer.  
If you are still unable to resolve the problem,  
contact your reseller, dealer or service provider.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10-12  
     
Troubleshooting  
MultiMediaCard  
For further information, please refer to Chapter 9, Optional Devices.  
Problem  
Procedure  
MultiMediaCard error  
occurs  
Remove the MultiMediaCard from the computer  
and then reinsert it in order to ensure it is firmly  
connected.  
If the problem persists, then you should refer to  
the documentation supplied with your  
MultiMediaCard for further information.  
You cannot write to a  
MultiMediaCard  
Remove the MultiMediaCard from the computer  
and check to ensure that it is not write protected.  
You cannot read a file Check to ensure the required file is actually on  
the MultiMediaCard that is inserted into the  
computer.  
If you are still unable to resolve the problem,  
contact your reseller, dealer or service provider.  
Infrared receiver window  
If you are using a USB mouse, you should also refer to both the USB  
device section in this chapter, and the documentation supplied with your  
mouse.  
Problem  
Procedure  
Infrared devices do  
Make sure there is no obstruction blocking  
not work as expected communication between the computer and the  
target device.  
If you are still unable to resolve the problem,  
contact your reseller, dealer or service provider.  
Pointing device  
If you are using a USB mouse, you should also refer to both the USB  
device section in this chapter, and the documentation supplied with your  
mouse.  
Touch Pad  
Problem  
Procedure  
On-screen pointer  
does not respond to  
pointing device  
operation  
In this instance the system might be busy - Try  
moving the mouse again after waiting a short  
while.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10-13  
           
Troubleshooting  
Problem  
Procedure  
Double-tapping does  
not work  
In this instance, you should initially try changing  
the double-click speed setting within the Mouse  
Control utility.  
1. To access this utility, click Start -> Control  
Panel -> Hardware and Sound -> Mouse  
icon.  
2. Within the Mouse Properties window, click  
the Buttons tab.  
3. Set the double-click speed as required and  
click OK.  
The mouse pointer  
moves too fast or too  
slow  
In this instance, you should initially try changing  
the speed setting within the Mouse Control utility.  
1. To access this utility, click Start -> Control  
Panel -> Hardware and Sound -> Mouse  
icon.  
2. Within the Mouse Properties window, click  
the Pointer Options tab.  
3. Set the pointer speed as required and click  
OK.  
If you are still unable to resolve the problem,  
contact your reseller, dealer or service provider.  
The reaction of Touch Adjust the touch Sensitivity.  
pad is either too  
1. Click Start -> Control Panel -> Hardware  
sensitive or not  
sensitive enough.  
and Sound -> Mouse icon.  
2. Within the Mouse Properties window, click  
the Device Settings tab.  
3. Click the Settings button.  
4. Properties for Synaptics TouchPad V6.3 on  
PS/2 Port window is displayed.  
5. Select Sensitivity from the Select an item  
list.  
6. Select Touch Sensitivity and move the slider  
bar to adjust the sensitivity.  
7. Click the OK button.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10-14  
Troubleshooting  
USB mouse  
Problem  
Procedure  
On-screen pointer  
does not respond to  
mouse operation  
In this instance the system might be busy - Try  
moving the mouse again after waiting a short  
while.  
Remove the mouse from the computer and then  
reconnect it to a free USB port it in order to  
ensure it is firmly attached.  
Double-clicking does  
not work  
In this instance, you should initially try changing  
the double-click speed setting within the Mouse  
Control utility.  
1. To access this utility, click Start -> Control  
Panel -> Hardware and Sound -> Mouse  
icon.  
2. Within the Mouse Properties window, click  
the Buttons tab.  
3. Set the double-click speed as required and  
click OK.  
The mouse pointer  
moves too fast or too  
slow  
In this instance, you should initially try changing  
the speed setting within the Mouse Control utility.  
1. To access this utility, click Start -> Control  
Panel -> Hardware and Sound -> Mouse  
icon.  
2. Within the Mouse Properties window, click  
the Pointer Options tab.  
3. Set the pointer speed as required and click  
OK.  
The mouse pointer  
moves erratically  
The elements of the mouse responsible for  
detecting movement might be dirty - please refer  
to the documentation supplied with the mouse for  
instructions on how to clean it.  
If you are still unable to resolve the problem,  
contact your reseller, dealer or service provider.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10-15  
 
Troubleshooting  
Fingerprint Sensor  
Problem  
Procedure  
Reading of the  
fingerprint was not  
successful.  
In this instance you should try the fingerprint  
reading operation again using the correct finger  
position - please refer to Using the Fingerprint  
Sensor in Chapter 4, Operating Basics for further  
information.  
Alternatively, you should try the recognition  
process again using another enrolled finger.  
The fingerprint sensor compares and analyzes  
the unique characteristics in a fingerprint.  
However, there may be instances where certain  
users are unable to register their fingerprints due  
to insufficient unique characteristics in their  
fingerprints.  
The recognition success rate may differ from  
user to user.  
The fingerprint cannot In this instance you should try the recognition  
process again using another enrolled finger.  
However, if fingerprints from all the enrolled  
fingers cannot be read, you should instead log  
into the computer by using the keyboard to input  
the password.  
be read due to injuries  
to the finger.  
If you are still unable to resolve the problem,  
contact your reseller, dealer or service provider.  
USB device  
In addition to the information in this section, please also refer to the  
documentation supplied with your USB device.  
Problem  
Procedure  
USB device does not  
work  
Remove the USB device from the computer and  
then reconnect it to a free port it in order to  
ensure it is firmly attached.  
Ensure that any required USB device drivers are  
properly installed - to achieve this you should  
refer to both the device documentation and the  
operating system documentation.  
If you are using an operating system that does  
not support USB, you are still able to use a USB  
mouse and/or USB keyboard by setting the USB  
KB/Mouse Emulation option within the  
TOSHIBA HW Setup utility to Enabled.  
If you are still unable to resolve the problem,  
contact your reseller, dealer or service provider.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10-16  
         
Troubleshooting  
USB Sleep and Charge function  
For more information and settings, please refer to the USB Sleep and  
Charge function section in Chapter 7, HW Setup.  
Problem  
Procedure  
I cannot use the "USB The setting of "USB Sleep and Charge function"  
may be [Disabled]. Change the setting to  
[Enabled].  
Sleep and Charge  
function".  
When there is a current overflow of the external  
device connected to the compatible port, USB  
bus power (DC5V) supply may be stopped for  
safety reasons. When this happens, disconnect  
an external device if some external devices are  
connected. After that, turn the power of the  
computer ON/OFF to restore the function. If this  
function can not be still used even if only one  
external device is connected, stop using the  
external device because its current is over the  
acceptable value of this computer.  
Some external devices may not be able to use  
the "USB Sleep and Charge function". In this  
case, please try one or more of the following  
methods.  
■ Change a mode setting of [Enabled].  
■ Turn OFF the computer while external  
devices are connected.  
■ Connect external devices after turning OFF of  
the computer.  
If this function can not be still used, change the  
setting to [Disabled] and stop using this function.  
The battery depletes When "USB Sleep and Charge function" is set to  
[Enabled], USB bus power (DC5V) will be  
supplied to the external device connected to the  
compatible port. If external device is connected  
to the compatible port when the AC adaptor is  
not connected to the computer, the battery of the  
computer will be depleted even when the power  
of the computer is turned OFF.  
quickly even when I  
turned OFF the  
power of the  
computer.  
Connect the AC adaptor to the computer or  
change the "USB Sleep and Charge function"  
setting to [Disabled].  
Instead use an USB port that does not have the  
USB Sleep and Charge function-compatible icon  
(
).  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10-17  
Troubleshooting  
Problem  
Procedure  
External devices  
connected to the  
compatible ports do  
not work when  
connected to a  
compatible port.  
Some external devices may not work when  
connected to a compatible port when the "USB  
Sleep and Charge function" is [Enabled].  
Reconnect the external device after turning ON  
the computer.  
If the external device still does not work, connect  
device to an USB port that does not have the  
USB Sleep and Charge function-compatible icon  
(
) or change the "USB Sleep and Charge  
function" setting to [Disabled].  
The "USB WakeUp  
function" does not  
work.  
When "USB Sleep and Charge function" is set to  
[Enabled], the "USB WakeUp function" does not  
work for ports that support the USB Sleep and  
Charge function.  
In that case, use an USB port that does not have  
the USB Sleep and Charge function-compatible  
icon ( ) or change the "USB Sleep and Charge  
function" setting to [Disabled].  
eSATA device  
In addition to the information in this section, please also refer to the  
documentation supplied with your eSATA device.  
Problem  
Procedure  
eSATA device does  
not work  
Remove the eSATA device from the computer  
and then reconnect it to a free port it in order to  
ensure it is firmly attached.  
A connected eSATA device may not be  
recognized if it is connected to the computer's  
eSATA/USB combo port while the computer is in  
Sleep Mode or Hibernation Mode. If this occurs,  
disconnect the eSATA device and then reconnect  
the device while the computer is turned on.  
Ensure that any required eSATA device drivers  
are properly installed - to achieve this you should  
refer to both the device documentation and the  
operating system documentation.  
If you are still unable to resolve the problem,  
contact your reseller, dealer or service provider.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10-18  
 
Troubleshooting  
Additional memory module  
Please also refer to Chapter 9, Optional Devices, for further information on  
installing and removing memory modules.  
Problem  
Procedure  
If there is a memory  
In the event of Power indicator flashes when the  
malfunction, the Power computer is turned on you should initially ensure  
indicator will repeatedly that the installed memory module(s) are  
flash (on for 0.5  
seconds, off for 0.5  
seconds) in the  
compatible with the computer. If you determine  
that an incompatible module has been installed,  
you should follow the steps as detailed below:  
following patterns;  
1. Turn off the computer.  
If there is an error in  
only slot A or no  
memory module is  
inserted in Slot A:  
amber twice, then green  
once.  
2. Disconnect the AC adaptor and all peripheral  
devices.  
3. Remove the battery pack.  
4. Remove the incompatible memory module.  
5. Install the battery and/or connect the AC  
adaptor.  
If there is an error in  
Slot B: amber once,  
then green twice.  
6. Turn on the computer.  
If you are still unable to resolve the problem,  
contact your reseller, dealer or service provider.  
If there are errors in  
both Slot A and Slot B:  
amber twice, then green  
twice.  
An error will occur if a Remove the memory module from Slot B and  
memory module is  
inserted into Slot B  
while no memory  
module is inserted in  
Slot A.  
insert it into Slot A.  
Sound system  
In addition to the information in this section, please also refer to the  
documentation supplied with your audio device.  
Problem  
Procedure  
No sound is heard  
Adjust the volume control dial.  
Turn the dial clockwise to increase the volume  
and turn it counter-clockwise to decrease the  
volume.  
Check the software volume settings.  
Please check to see if Mute is turned to Off.  
Check to make sure the headphone connection  
is secure.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10-19  
 
Troubleshooting  
Problem  
Procedure  
Check within the Windows Device Manager  
application to ensure the sound function is  
enabled.  
If you are still unable to resolve the problem,  
contact your reseller, dealer or service provider.  
Annoying sound is  
heard  
In this instance you may be experiencing  
feedback from either the internal microphone or  
an external microphone connected to the  
computer - please refer to Sound system in  
Chapter 4, Operating Basics for further  
information.  
Volume cannot be adjusted when Windows is  
turned on or turned off.  
If you are still unable to resolve the problem,  
contact your reseller, dealer or service provider.  
Volume control dial  
Problem  
Procedure  
No sound is heard  
Adjust the volume control dial.  
Turn the dial clockwise to increase the volume  
and turn it counter-clockwise to decrease the  
volume.  
Turn the volume control dial while verifying the  
volume in order to adjust.  
Annoying sound is  
heard  
Volume cannot be adjusted when Windows is  
turned on or turned off.  
If you are still unable to resolve the problem,  
contact your reseller, dealer or service provider.  
External monitor  
Please also refer to Chapter 9, Optional Devices, and to the documentation  
supplied with your monitor for further information.  
Problem  
Procedure  
Monitor does not turn After confirming that the monitor's power switch  
on  
is on, you should check the connections to make  
sure that the power cord/adaptor is firmly  
connected to the monitor and to a working power  
outlet.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10-20  
   
Troubleshooting  
Problem  
Procedure  
No display  
Try adjusting the contrast and brightness controls  
on the external monitor.  
Press the FN + F5 hot key in order to change the  
display priority and ensure that it is not set for the  
internal display panel only.  
Check to see if the external monitor is connected.  
When the external monitor is set as the primary  
display device in extended desktop mode, it will  
not display when the computer wakes up from  
Sleep Mode if the external monitor has been  
disconnected while in Sleep Mode.  
To keep this from happening, do not disconnect  
the external monitor while the computer is in  
Sleep or Hibernation Mode.  
Remember to turn off the computer before  
disconnecting the external monitor.  
When the display panel and an external monitor  
are set to clone mode and the monitors are  
turned off by the timer, the display panel or the  
external monitor may not display when turned on  
again.  
If this occurs, press FN + F5 to re-set the display  
panel and external monitor to clone mode.  
Display error occurs  
Check that the cable connecting the external  
monitor to the computer is firmly attached.  
If you are still unable to resolve the problem,  
contact your reseller, dealer or service provider.  
Modem  
This information is applicable to the models equipped with a built-in  
modem.  
Problem  
Procedure  
Communication  
Make sure the computer's internal modem  
software can’t initialize settings are correct - please refer to the Phone  
modem  
and Modem Options link within the Windows  
Control Panel.  
You can hear a dial  
If the call is going through a Private Branch  
tone but can’t make a Exchange (PBX), take care to ensure that the  
call  
communication application's tone dial detection  
feature is disabled.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10-21  
   
Troubleshooting  
Problem  
Procedure  
You place a call, but a Make sure that the settings are correct within  
connection can’t be  
made  
your communication application.  
After making a call you Ensure that the communication application's tone  
can’t hear a ring or pule dialling selection feature is set correctly.  
Communication is cut The computer will automatically cut off  
off unexpectedly  
communication when connection with the carrier  
is not successful for a set time interval - try  
lengthening this time interval within your  
communication application.  
A CONNECTdisplay is Ensure that the communication application's  
quickly replaced by NO error control feature is set correctly.  
CARRIER  
Character display  
becomes garbled  
during a  
When transmitting data you should ensure that  
the parity bit and stop bit settings correspond  
with those of the remote computer - you should  
check the flow control and communication  
protocol settings within your communication  
application.  
communication  
You cannot receive an Ensure that the communication application's  
incoming call  
rings before auto answer feature is set correctly.  
If you are still unable to resolve the problem,  
contact your reseller, dealer or service provider.  
LAN  
Problem  
Procedure  
Cannot access LAN  
Check for a firm cable connection between the  
LAN jack and the LAN HUB.  
Wake-up on LAN does Make sure the AC adaptor is connected. The  
not work  
Wake-up on LAN function consumes power even  
when the system is off.  
If problems persist, consult your LAN  
administrator.  
User’s Manual  
10-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Troubleshooting  
Wireless LAN  
If the following procedures do not restore LAN access, consult your LAN  
administrator. For more information on wireless communication, refer to  
Chapter 4, Operating Basics.  
Problem  
Procedure  
Cannot access  
Wireless LAN  
Make sure the computer’s wireless  
communication switch is set to on.  
Bluetooth  
For further information on Bluetooth wireless communication, please refer  
to Chapter 4, Operating Basics.  
Problem  
Procedure  
Cannot access  
Bluetooth device  
Check to ensure the computer's wireless  
communication switch is set to on.  
Check to ensure the Bluetooth Manager  
application is running on the computer and that  
power to the external Bluetooth device is turned  
on.  
Check to ensure that no optional Bluetooth  
Adaptor is installed in the computer - the built-in  
Bluetooth hardware cannot operate  
simultaneously with another Bluetooth controller.  
If you are still unable to resolve the problem,  
contact your reseller, dealer or service provider.  
HDMI monitor output function  
Problem  
Procedure  
No display  
Try adjusting the contrast and brightness controls  
on the television.  
Press the FN + F5 hot key in order to change the  
display priority and ensure that it is not set for the  
internal display panel only.  
If you are still unable to resolve the problem,  
contact your reseller, dealer or service provider.  
If you turn the computer off into Sleep Mode while the display is on TV, the  
computer will select either the internal LCD or an external computer CRT  
as the display device the next time is switched on.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10-23  
       
Troubleshooting  
i.LINK (IEEE1394) device  
Problem  
Procedure  
i.LINK device does not Check that the cable connecting the external  
function  
device to the computer is firmly attached.  
Check to ensure that power is being supplied to  
the device and that the device is turned on.  
Reinstall the drivers required for the device - this  
can be achieved by clicking Start, Control  
Panel, Hardware and Sound and then clicking  
the Add Hardware icon at the left-hand side of  
the screen and following the on-screen  
instructions.  
Restart the computer and the Windows  
operating system to re-initialize the device.  
If you are still unable to resolve the problem,  
contact your reseller, dealer or service provider.  
Video Playback  
Problem  
Procedure  
DVD does not play  
Try setting the configuration in the BIOS setup.  
However, note that when the BIOS setup  
configuration is modified, the power saving  
function of PCI Express becomes disabled. Refer  
to Chapter 7, HW Setup for more information.  
smoothly when using  
the Windows Media  
Center of the DVD  
playing software  
Set the PCI Express Link ASPM in the BIOS  
setup using the following steps:  
1. Press the F1 key. The BIOS setup screen will  
appear.  
2. Set the PCI Express Link ASPM to Disabled  
in BATTERY.  
3. Press the END key. A confirmation message  
will appear.  
4. Press the Y key. The BIOS setup will  
terminate and the computer will reboot.  
If you are still unable to resolve the problem,  
contact your reseller, dealer or service provider.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10-24  
     
Troubleshooting  
FM tuner  
The computer is equipped with either a modem jack or FM tuner jack.  
Problem  
Procedure  
Poor reception  
Adjust the FM tuner antenna.  
Make sure the FM tuner antenna connection is  
secure.  
If you are still unable to resolve the problem,  
contact your reseller, dealer or service provider.  
TOSHIBA support  
If you require any additional help using your computer or if you are having  
problems operating the computer, you may need to contact TOSHIBA for  
additional technical assistance.  
Before you call  
Some problems you experience may be related to software or the operating  
system so it is important that you investigate other sources of assistance  
first. Before contacting TOSHIBA, try the following:  
■ Review troubleshooting sections in the documentation supplied with  
your software and/or peripheral devices.  
■ If a problem occurs when you are running software applications, consult  
the software documentation for troubleshooting suggestions and  
consider calling the software company's technical support department  
for assistance.  
■ Consult the reseller or dealer from where you purchased your computer  
and/or software - they are your best resource for current information  
and support.  
Where to write  
If you are still unable to solve the problem and suspect that it is hardware  
related, write to TOSHIBA at the nearest location listed below:  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10-25  
     
Troubleshooting  
Outside of Europe  
In Europe  
Australia  
Germany & Austria  
TOSHIBA Australia Pty. Ltd.  
TOSHIBA Europe (I.E.) GmbH  
Information Systems Division 84-92 Geschäftsbereich,  
Talavera Road North Ryde N.S.W. Deutschland-Österreich  
2113 Sydney  
Hammfelddamm 8, D-41460 Neuss,  
Germany  
Canada  
France  
TOSHIBA of Canada Ltd.  
191 McNabb Street, Markham,  
Ontario L3R 8H2  
TOSHIBA Systèms France S.A.  
7, Rue Ampère B.P. 131, 92804  
Puteaux Cedex  
China  
Netherlands  
TOSHIBA Personal Computer &  
Network (Shanghai) Co., Ltd.  
TOSHIBA Information Systems,  
Benelux B.V.  
43F, Hong Kong New World Tower, Rivium Boulevard 41 2909 LK  
No. 300 Huaihai Zhong Road,  
Shanghai, P. R. China 200021  
Capelle a/d IJssel  
Singapore  
Spain  
TOSHIBA Singapore Pte. Ltd.  
438B Alexandra Road #06-01  
Alexandra Technopark Singapore  
119968  
TOSHIBA Information Systems,  
ESPAÑA  
Parque Empresarial San Fernando  
a
Edificio Europa, l Planta, Escalera A  
28830 Madrid  
United States of America  
United Kingdom  
TOSHIBA America Information  
Systems, Inc.  
9740 Irvine Boulevard Irvine,  
California 92618 USA  
TOSHIBA Information Systems  
(U.K.) Ltd.  
TOSHIBA Court Weybridge  
Business Park Addlestone Road  
Weybridge, Surrey KT15 2UL  
India  
The Rest of Europe  
Toshiba India Pvt Ltd.  
PC Division  
TOSHIBA Europe (I.E.) GmbH  
Geschäftsbereich, Deutschland-  
Österreich Hammfelddamm 8,  
D-41460 Neuss, Germany  
6th Floor, DR Gopal Das Bhawan  
Barakhamba Road,  
Delhi-110001, India  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10-26  
Chapter 11  
Legal Footnotes  
This chapter states the Legal Footnotes information applicable to TOSHIBA  
computers. In the text in this manual, *XX is used to show which Legal  
Footnotes description is related to TOSHIBA computers.  
Description(s) related to this computer are marked with a blue *XX in this  
manual. Clicking on *XX will display the related description.  
CPU*1  
Central Processing Unit ("CPU") Performance Legal Footnotes.  
CPU performance in your computer product may vary from specifications  
under the following conditions:  
■ use of certain external peripheral products  
■ use if battery power instead of AC power  
■ use of certain multimedia, computer generated graphics or video  
applications  
■ use of standard telephone lines or low speed network connections  
■ use of complex modeling software, such as high end computer aided  
design applications  
■ use of several applications or functionalities simultaneously  
■ use of computer in areas with low air pressure (high altitude >1,000  
meters or >3,280 feet above sea level)  
■ use of computer at temperatures outside the range of 5°C to 35°C (41°F  
to 95°F) or >25°C (77°F) at high altitude (all temperature references are  
approximate and may vary depending on the specific computer model -  
please refer to your computer documentation or visit the Toshiba  
website at www.pcsupport.toshiba.com for details).  
CPU performance may also vary from specifications due to design  
configuration.  
User’s Manual  
11-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Legal Footnotes  
Under some conditions, your computer product may automatically shut-  
down. This is a normal protective feature designed to reduce the risk of lost  
data or damage to the product when used outside recommended  
conditions. To avoid risk of lost data, always make back-up copies of data  
by periodically storing it on an external storage medium. For optimum  
performance, use your computer product only under recommended  
conditions. Read additional restrictions under "Environmental Conditions"  
in your computer documentation.  
Contact Toshiba Technical Service and Support for more information.  
64-Bit Computing  
The following section applies only to Intel® CoreTM 2 Duo Processor  
equipped models.  
64-bit processors are designed to take advantage of 32 and 64 bit  
computing.  
64-bit computing requires that the following hardware and software  
requirements are met:  
■ 64-bit Operating System  
■ 64-bit CPU, Chipset and BIOS (Basic Input/Output System)  
■ 64-bit Device drivers  
■ 64-bit applications  
Certain device drivers and/or applications may not be compatible with a  
64-bit CPU and therefore may not function properly. A 32-bit version of the  
operating system is preinstalled on your computer unless explicitly stated  
that the operating system is 64-bit.  
CoreTM 2 Duo or CoreTM Duo Processor.  
Intel® Dual Core Technology is a new technology designed to deliver  
improved performance to the notebook PC. Performance or compatibility  
may vary. For more information on Intel's Core 2 Duo processors, visit:  
http://www.intel.com/core2duo/  
See 64-Bit Computing Legal Footnote, if applicable.  
Memory (Main System)*2  
Part of the main system memory may be used by the graphics system for  
graphics performance and therefore reduce the amount of main system  
memory available for other computing activities. The amount of main  
system memory allocated to support graphics may vary depending on the  
graphics system, applications utilized, system memory size and other  
factors. For computer's configured with 4 GB of system memory, the full  
system memory space for computing activities will be considerably less and  
will vary by model and system configuration.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
11-2  
   
Legal Footnotes  
Battery Life*3  
Battery life may vary considerably depending on product model,  
configuration, applications, power management settings and features  
utilized, as well as the natural performance variations produced by the  
design of individual components. Published battery life numbers are  
achieved on select models and configurations tested by Toshiba at the time  
of publication. Recharge time varies depending on usage. Battery may not  
charge while computer is consuming full power.  
After a period of time, the battery will lose its ability to perform at maximum  
capacity and will need to be replaced. This is normal for all batteries. To  
purchase a new battery pack, see the accessories information that shipped  
with your computer.  
Hard Disk Drive (HDD) Capacity*4  
1 Gigabyte (GB) means 109 = 1,000,000,000 bytes using powers of 10. The  
computer operating system, however, reports storage capacity using  
powers of 2 for the definition of 1 GB = 230 = 1,073,741,824 bytes, and  
therefore shows less storage capacity. Available storage capacity will also  
be less if the product includes one or more pre-installed operating systems,  
such as Microsoft Operating System and/or pre-installed software  
applications, or media content. Actual formatted capacity may vary.  
LCD*5  
Over a period of time, and depending on the usage of the computer, the  
brightness of the LCD screen will deteriorate. This is an intrinsic  
characteristic of LCD technology.  
Maximum brightness is only available when operating in AC power mode.  
Screen will dim when the computer is operated on battery power and you  
will not be able to increase the brightness of the screen.  
Graphics Processor Unit ("GPU”)*6  
Graphics processor unit ("GPU") performance may vary depending on  
product model, design configuration, applications, power management  
settings and features utilized. GPU performance is only optimized when  
operating in AC power mode and may decrease considerably when  
operating in battery power mode.  
Wireless LAN*7  
The transmission speed over the wireless LAN and the distance over which  
wireless LAN can reach may vary depending on surrounding  
electromagnetic environment, obstacles, access point design and  
configuration, and client design and software/hardware configurations.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
11-3  
                   
Legal Footnotes  
The actual transmission speed will be lower than the theoretical maximum  
speed. The wireless adapter is based on a draft 2.0 release version of the  
IEEE 802.11n specification and; may not be full compatible with, or support  
some feature (e.g., security) of, certain Wi-Fi equipment.  
Non-applicable Icons*8  
Certain notebook chassis are designed to accommodate all possible  
configurations for an entire product series. Your selected model may not  
have all the features and specifications corresponding to all of the icons or  
switches shown on the notebook chassis, unless you have selected all  
those features.  
Copy Protection*9  
Applicable copy protection standards included in certain media may  
prevent or limit recording or viewing of the media.  
TV Tuner*10  
TV Tuner will function only in the country where the computer was  
purchased.  
Images*11  
All images are simulated for purposes of illustration.  
LCD Brightness and Eye Stain*12  
Your display panel has a brightness approaching that of a TV device. We  
recommend that you adjust the brightness of your LCD to a comfortable  
level to prevent possible strain on your eyes.  
Safety Use for TV Tuner*13  
If you have to operate your computer during a thunderstorm and are  
connecting the TV tuner to an outside antenna, you should operate your  
computer using AC power mode. The AC adaptor offers some protection  
against (but does not entirely prevent) possible electric shock caused by  
lightning. For complete protection, do not operate your computer during a  
thunderstorm.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
11-4  
             
Appendix A  
Specifications  
This appendix summarizes the computer’s technical specifications.  
Physical Dimensions  
Refer to User’s Manual about Weight and Size.  
Environmental Requirements  
Conditions  
Operating  
Ambient temperature  
Relative humidity  
5°C (41°F) to 35°C (95°F)  
20% to 80%  
(noncondensing)  
Non-operating  
-20°C (-4°F) to 65°C (149°F) 10% to 90%  
(noncondensing)  
Wet-bulb  
26°C maximum  
temperature  
Conditions  
Operating  
Altitude (from sea level)  
-9 to 3,000 meters  
Non-operating  
-9 to 12,000 meters maximum  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A-1  
     
Specifications  
Power Requirements  
AC adaptor  
90-260 volts AC  
50 or 60 hertz (cycles per second)  
Computer  
19V  
6.31 Amperes  
Built-in Modem  
This information is applicable to the models equipped with a built-in  
modem.  
Network control unit (NCU)  
Type of NCU  
Type of line  
AA  
Telephone line (analog only)  
Type of dialing  
Pulse  
Tone  
Control command  
Monitor function  
AT commands  
EIA-578 commands  
Computer’s speaker  
Communication specifications  
Communication  
system  
Data:  
Fax:  
Full duplex  
Half duplex  
Communication  
protocol  
Data  
ITU-T-Rec  
(Former CCITT)  
V.21/V.22/V.22bis/V.32/V.32  
bis/V.34/V.90  
Bell  
Fax  
103/212A  
ITU-T-Rec  
V.17/V.29/V.27ter/V.21 ch2  
(Former CCITT)  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A-2  
Specifications  
Communication  
speed  
Data transmission and reception  
300/1200/2400/4800/7200/9600/12000/14400/16  
800/19200/21600/24000/26400/28800/31200/33  
600 bps  
Data reception only with V.90  
28000/29333/30666/32000/33333/34666/36000/  
37333/38666/40000/41333/42666/44000/45333/  
46666/48000/49333/50666/52000/53333/54666/  
56000 bps  
Fax  
2400/4800/7200/9600/12000/14400 bps  
Transmitting level  
Receiving level  
-10 dBm  
-10 to -40 dBm  
600 ohms ±30%  
Input/output  
impedance  
Error correcting  
Data compression  
Power supply  
MNP class 4 and ITU-T V.42  
MNP class 5 and ITU-T V.42bis  
+3.3V (supplied by computer)  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A-3  
Appendix B  
Display Controller and Video modes  
Display controller  
The display controller interprets software commands into hardware  
commands that turn particular parts on the screen on or off.  
Due to the display panel's increased resolution, lines may appear broken in  
when displaying images in full-screen text mode.  
The display controller also controls the video mode and uses industry  
standard rules to govern the screen resolution and the maximum number of  
colors that can be displayed at any one time. Therefore, software written for  
a given video mode will run on any computer that supports that mode.  
Video modes  
Video mode settings are configured via the Display Properties dialog.  
To open the Display Properties dialog, click Start -> Control Panel ->  
Appearance and Personalization -> Personalization -> Display  
Settings.  
If you are running some applications (for example a 3D application or video  
playback and so on), you may see some disturbance, flickering or frame  
dropping on your screen.  
If that occurs, adjust the resolution of display, lowering it until the screen is  
displayed properly.  
®
Disabling Windows AeroTM may also help correct this issue.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
B-1  
             
Appendix C  
Wireless LAN  
This appendix is intended to help you get your Wireless LAN network up  
and running, with a minimum of parameters.  
Card Specifications  
Form Factor  
Compatibility  
PCI Express Mini Card  
■ IEEE 802.11 Standard for Wireless LANS  
■ Wi-Fi (Wireless Fidelity) certified by the Wi-Fi  
Alliance. The ‘Wi-Fi CERTIFIED’ logo is a  
certification mark of the Wi-Fi Alliance.  
■ Microsoft Windows® Networking  
Network Operating  
System  
■ CSMA/CA (Collision Avoidance) with  
Media Access  
Protocol  
Acknowledgment (ACK)  
User’s Manual  
C-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Wireless LAN  
Radio Characteristics  
Radio Characteristics of Wireless LAN Cards may vary according to:  
■ Country/region where the product was purchased  
■ Type of product  
Wireless communication is often subject to local radio regulations.  
Although Wireless LAN wireless networking products have been designed  
for operation in the license-free 2.4GHz and 5GHz band, local radio  
regulations may impose a number of limitations to the use of wireless  
communication equipment.  
Refer to the sheet “Information to the User” for regulatory information that  
may apply in your country/region.  
■ Band 5GHz (5150-5850 MHz) (Revision a, n  
Radio  
Frequency  
draft 2.0)  
■ Band 2.4GHz (2400-2483.5 MHz) (Revision  
b, g, n draft 2.0)  
The range of the wireless signal is related to the transmit rate of the  
wireless communication. Communications at lower transmit range may  
travel larger distances.  
■ The range of your wireless devices can be affected when the antennas  
are placed near metal surfaces and solid high-density materials.  
■ Range is also impacted due to "obstacles" in the signal path of the radio  
that may either absorb or reflect the radio signal.  
Supported Frequency Sub-bands  
Subject to the radio regulations that apply in the countries/regions, your  
Wireless LAN card may support a different set of 5 GHz/2.4 GHz channels.  
Consult your Authorized Wireless LAN or TOSHIBA Sales office for  
information about the radio regulations that apply in the countries/regions.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C-2  
   
Wireless LAN  
Wireless IEEE 802.11 Channels Sets (Revision B, G and N Draft Ver.  
1.0)  
Frequency Range  
2400-2483.5 MHz  
Channel ID  
1
2412  
2417  
2422  
2427  
2432  
2437  
2442  
2447  
2452  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
10  
11  
12  
13  
2457*  
2462  
2
2467*  
2
2472*  
*1 Factory-set default channels  
*2 Refer to the sheet Approved Countries/Regions for use for the  
countries/regions that in which these channels can be used. When  
installing Wireless LAN cards, the channel configuration is managed as  
follows:  
■ For wireless clients that operate in a Wireless LAN Infrastructure, the  
Wireless LAN card will automatically start operation at the channel  
identified by the Wireless LAN Access Point. When roaming between  
different access points the station can dynamically switch to another  
channel if required.  
■ For Wireless LAN cards installed in wireless clients that operating in a  
peer-to-peer mode, the card will use the default channel 10.  
■ In a Wireless LAN Access Point, the Wireless LAN card will use the  
factory-set default channel (printed in bold), unless the LAN  
Administrator selected a different channel when configuring the  
Wireless LAN Access Point device.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C-3  
Wireless LAN  
Wireless IEEE 802.11 Channels Sets (Revision A and N Draft Ver. 1.0)  
Frequency Range  
5150-5850 MHz  
Channel ID  
36  
5180  
5200  
5220  
5240  
5260  
5280  
5300  
5320  
5500  
5520  
5540  
5560  
5580  
5600  
5620  
5640  
5660  
5680  
5700  
5745  
5765  
5785  
40  
44  
48  
52  
56  
60  
64  
100  
104  
108  
112  
116  
120  
124  
128  
132  
136  
140  
149  
153  
157  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C-4  
Wireless LAN  
161  
165  
5805  
5825  
* The approved channels on using are different at each country or region.  
When using these channels in any country or region, refer to the  
addendum sheet which is Approved Countries/Regions for use. The  
channel configuration is managed as follows:  
■ For wireless clients that operate in a Wireless LAN Infrastructure, the  
Wireless LAN module will automatically start operation at the channel  
identified by the Wireless LAN Access Point. When roaming between  
different access points the station can dynamically switch to another  
channel if required.  
■ For Wireless LAN modules installed in wireless clients that operating in  
a peer-to-peer mode, the module will use the default channel 10.  
■ In a Wireless LAN Access Point, the Wireless LAN module will use the  
factory-set default channel (printed in bold), unless the LAN  
Administrator selected a different channel when configuring the  
Wireless LAN Access Point device.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C-5  
Appendix D  
Bluetooth wireless technology  
Interoperability  
Bluetooth® Cards from TOSHIBA are designed to be interoperable with any  
product with Bluetooth wireless technology that is based on Frequency  
Hopping Spread Spectrum (FHSS) radio technology, and is compliant to:  
■ Bluetooth Specification Ver.2.1+EDR, as defined and approved by The  
Bluetooth Special Interest Group.  
■ Logo certification with Bluetooth wireless technology as defined by The  
Bluetooth Special interest Group.  
■ When you use Bluetooth Adaptor from TOSHIBA close to 2.4 GHz  
Wireless LAN devices, Bluetooth transmissions might slow down or  
cause errors. If you detect certain interference while you use Bluetooth  
Adaptor from TOSHIBA, always change the frequency, move your  
computer to the area outside of the interference range of 2.4 GHz  
Wireless LAN devices (40 meters/43.74 yards or more) or stop  
transmitting from your computer. Please visit the following TOSHIBA  
PC product support website.  
■ Bluetooth and Wireless LAN devices operate within the same radio  
frequency range and may interfere with one another. If you use  
Bluetooth and Wireless LAN devices simultaneously, you may  
occasionally experience a less than optimal network performance or  
even lose your network connection. If you should experience any such  
problem, immediately turn off either one of your Bluetooth or Wireless  
LAN. Please visit the following TOSHIBA PC product support website.  
TOSHIBA PC product support website. In Europe visit  
http://www.toshibaeurope. com/computers/tnt/bluetooth.htm In the  
United States visit http://www.pc.support.global.toshiba.com  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
D-1  
   
Bluetooth wireless technology Interoperability  
Bluetooth wireless technology and your Health  
The products with Bluetooth wireless technology, like other radio devices,  
emit radio frequency electromagnetic energy. The level of energy emitted  
by devices with Bluetooth wireless technology however is far much less  
than the electromagnetic energy emitted by wireless devices like for  
example mobile phones.  
Because products with Bluetooth wireless technology operate within the  
guidelines found in radio frequency safety standards and  
recommendations, TOSHIBA believes Bluetooth wireless technology is  
safe for use by consumers. These standards and recommendations reflect  
the consensus of the scientific community and result from deliberations of  
panels and committees of scientists who continually review and interpret  
the extensive research literature.  
In some situations or environments, the use of Bluetooth wireless  
technology may be restricted by the proprietor of the building or responsible  
representatives of the organization. These situations may for example  
include:  
■ Using the equipment with Bluetooth wireless technology on board of  
airplanes, or  
■ In any other environment where the risk of interference to other devices  
or services is perceived or identified as harmful.  
If you are uncertain of the policy that applies on the use of wireless devices  
in a specific organization or environment (e.g. airports), you are  
encouraged to ask for authorization to use the device with Bluetooth  
wireless technology prior to turning on the equipment.  
Regulatory statements  
General  
This product complies with any mandatory product specification in any  
country/region where the product is sold. In addition, the product complies  
with the following.  
European Union (EU) and EFTA  
This equipment complies with the R&TTE directive 1999/5/EC and has  
been provided with the CE mark accordingly.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
D-2  
   
Bluetooth wireless technology Interoperability  
Canada - Industry Canada (IC)  
This device complies with RSS 210 of Industry Canada.  
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not  
cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference,  
including interference that may cause undesired operation of this device.  
L’utilisation de ce dispositif est autorisée seulement aux conditions  
suivantes: (1) il ne doit pas produire de brouillage et (2) l’utilisateur du  
dispositif doit étre prét à accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique reçu,  
même si ce brouillage est susceptible de compromettre le fonctionnement  
du dispositif.  
The term “IC” before the equipment certification number only signifies that  
the Industry Canada technical specifications were met.  
USA-Federal Communications Commission (FCC)  
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a  
Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of FCC Rules. These limits are  
designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a  
residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate  
radio frequency energy. If not installed and used in accordance with the  
instructions, it may cause harmful interference to radio communications.  
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a  
particular installation.  
If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television  
reception, which can be determined by tuning the equipment off and on, the  
user is encouraged to try and correct the interference by one or more of the  
following measures:  
■ Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna  
■ Increase the distance between the equipment and the receiver.  
■ Connect the equipment to outlet on a circuit different from that to which  
the receiver is connected.  
■ Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.  
TOSHIBA is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused  
by unauthorized modification of the devices included with this Bluetooth®  
Card from TOSHIBA, or the substitution or attachment of connecting cables  
and equipment other than specified by TOSHIBA.  
The correction of interference caused by such unauthorized modification,  
substitution or attachment will be the responsibility of the user.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
D-3  
Bluetooth wireless technology Interoperability  
Caution: Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation  
The radiated output power of the Bluetooth® Card from TOSHIBA is far  
below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the  
Bluetooth® Card from TOSHIBA shall be used in such a manner that the  
potential for human contact during normal operation is minimized. The  
antenna(s) used in this device are located at the upper edge of the LCD  
screen, and this device has been tested as portable device as defined in  
Section 2.1093 of FCC rules when the LCD screen is rotated 180 degree  
and covered the keyboard area. In addition, Bluetooth has been tested with  
Wireless LAN transceiver for co-location requirements. This device and its  
antenna(s) must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any  
other antenna or transmitter. The installer of this radio equipment must  
ensure that the antenna is located or pointed such that it does not emit RF  
field in excess of Health Canada limits for the general population; consult  
Safety Code 6, obtainable from Health Canada's website  
www.hc-sc.gc.ca/rpb.  
Taiwan  
Article 12  
Without permission granted by the DGT or NCC, any  
company, enterprise, or user is not allowed to change  
frequency, enhance transmitting power or alter original  
characteristic as well as performance to an approved low  
power radio-frequency devices.  
Article 14  
The low power radio-frequency devices shall not influence  
aircraft security and interfere legal communications; If found,  
the user shall cease operating immediately until no  
interference is achieved.  
The said legal communications means radio communications  
is operated in compliance with the Telecommunications Act.  
The low power radio-frequency devices must be susceptible  
with the interference from legal communications or ISM radio  
wave radiated devices.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
D-4  
Bluetooth wireless technology Interoperability  
Using Bluetooth® Card from TOSHIBA equipment in Japan  
In Japan, the frequency bandwidth of 2,400 - 2,483.5 MHz for second  
generation low-power data communication systems such as this equipment  
overlaps that of mobile object identification systems (premises radio station  
and specified low-power radio station).  
1. Sticker  
Please put the following sticker on computer incorporating this product.  
The frequency bandwidth of this equipment may operate  
within the same range as industrial devices, scientific  
devices, medical devices, microwave ovens, licensed radio  
stations and non-licensed specified low-power radio stations  
for mobile object identification systems (RFID) used in  
factory production lines (Other Radio Stations).  
1. Before using this equipment, ensure that it does not  
interfere with any of the equipment listed above.  
2. If this equipment causes RF interference to other radio  
stations, promptly change the frequency being used,  
change the location of use, or turn off the source of  
emissions.  
3. Contact TOSHIBA Direct PC if you have problems with  
interference caused by this product to Other Radio Stations.  
2. Indication  
The indication shown below appears on this equipment.  
(1) 2.4 : This equipment uses a frequency of 2.4 GHz.  
(2) FH : This equipment uses FH-SS modulation.  
(3) 1: The interference range of this equipment is less than 10 m.  
(4)  
This equipment uses a frequency bandwidth from  
2,400 MHz to 2,483.5 MHz.  
It is impossible to avoid the band of mobile object  
identification systems.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
D-5  
 
Bluetooth wireless technology Interoperability  
3. TOSHIBA Direct PC  
Monday - Friday : 10:00-17:00  
Toll Free Tel  
Direct Dial  
FAX  
: 0120-15-1048  
: 03-3457-4850  
: 03-3457-4868  
Device Authorization  
This device obtains the Technical Conditions Compliance Approval, and it  
belongs to the device class of radio equipment of low-power data  
communication system radio station stipulated in the Telecommunications  
Business Law.  
The Name of the radio equipment: EYTFXCS  
JAPAN APPROVALS INSTITUTE FOR TELECOMMUNICATIONS  
EQUIPMENT  
Approval Number: D07-0040001  
The following restrictions apply:  
Do not disassemble or modify the device.  
Do not install the embedded wireless module into other device.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
D-6  
Appendix E  
AC Power Cord and Connectors  
The power cord’s AC input plug must be compatible with the various  
international AC power outlets and the cord must meet the standards for  
the country/region in which it is used. All cords must meet the following  
specifications:  
Length:  
Minimum 1.7 meters  
2
Wire size:  
Minimum 0.75 mm  
Current rating:  
Voltage rating:  
Minimum 2.5 amperes  
125 or 250 VAC  
(depending on country/region’s power standards)  
Certification agencies  
China:  
CQC/CEMC (CCC)  
U.S. and Canada: UL listed and CSA certified  
No. 18 AWG, Type SVT or SPT-2  
Australia:  
AS  
Japan:  
DENANHO  
Europe:  
Austria:  
OVE  
Italy:  
IMQ  
Belgium:  
CEBEC  
The Netherlands:  
KEMA  
User’s Manual  
E-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
AC Power Cord and Connectors  
Denmark:  
Finland:  
France:  
DEMKO  
FIMKO  
LCIE  
Norway:  
Sweden:  
NEMKO  
SEMKO  
Switzerland:  
SEV  
BSI  
Germany:  
VDE  
United Kingdom:  
In Europe, two conductors power cord must be VDE type, H05VVH2-F or  
H03VVH2-F and for three conductors power cord must be VDE type,  
H05VV-F.  
For the United States and Canada, two pin plug configuration must be a  
2-15P (250V) or 1-15P (125V) and three pin plug configuration must be  
6-15P (250V) or 5-15P (125V) as designated in the U.S. National Electrical  
code handbook and the Canadian Electrical Code Part II.  
The following illustrations show the plug shapes for the U.S.A. and Canada,  
the United Kingdom, Australia and Argentina, and Europe and Chile, and  
China.  
United Kingdom  
USA  
UL approved  
BS approved  
Australia and Argentina  
Europe and Chile  
AS approved  
Approved by the  
appropriate agency  
Canada  
China  
CSA approved  
CCC approved  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E-2  
Appendix F  
Usage Restrictions  
This appendix describes the Usage Restrictions.  
■ This configuration is designed to work with a signal from a conventional  
(standard or analog) TV antenna.  
■ TOSHIBA does not guarantee that signals received by satellite or cable  
TV receivers will work properly and does not provide technical support  
for them.  
■ The TOSHIBA Qosmio’s AC power adaptor must be connected to get  
the best possible audio and video performance.  
■ For copyright protection reasons, TOSHIBA has incorporated CGMS  
(Copy Generation Management System) restrictions into this product.  
This allows a broadcasting channel to send a signal to prevent a motion  
picture from being copied.  
■ The Microsoft® Windows Vista®’s radio features cannot be used  
because the TV feature does not include a radio receiver (FM tuner).  
■ If your computer is equipped with single tuner, it is not possible to  
record a TV program on one channel and simultaneously view a TV  
program on another channel because the computer only has one TV  
feature. However, it is possible to view one recorded TV program and  
simultaneously record another.  
■ The TV feature lets you capture and record a video stream  
(S-Video/Composite Video) from a camcorder, DVD player, etc.  
Because of the large number of peripherals currently on the market,  
TOSHIBA does not guarantee that this type of configuration will work  
properly and does not provide support for this functionality.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-1  
   
Glossary  
The terms in this glossary cover topics related to this manual. Alternate  
naming is included for reference.  
Abbreviations  
AACS: advanced access content system  
AC: Alternating current  
ACPI: Advanced Configuration and Power Interface  
ASCII: American Standard Code for Information Interchange  
BIOS: basic input/output system  
bps: bits per second  
CD: compact disc  
CD-ROM: Compact Disc Read-Only Memory  
CD-RW: Compact Disc-ReWritable  
CMOS: complementary metal-oxide semiconductor  
CPU: central processing unit  
CRT: cathode ray tube  
DC: direct current  
DDC: display data channel  
DDR: double data rate  
DIMM: dual inline memory module  
DVD: digital versatile disc  
DVD-R: Digital Versatile Disc Recordable  
DVD-RAM: Digital Versatile Disc Random Access Memory  
DVD-R (Dual Layer): Digital Versatile Disc Recordable Dual Layer  
DVD-ROM: Digital Versatile Disc Read Only Memory  
DVD-RW: Digital Versatile Disc ReWritable  
DVD+R (Double Layer): Digital Versatile Disc Recordable Double Layer  
FDD: floppy diskette drive  
FHD: Full High Definition  
FIR: fast infrared  
GB: gigabyte  
HDD: hard disk drive  
HD+: High Definition Plus  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary-1  
 
Glossary  
IDE: integrated drive electronics  
IEEE: Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers  
I/O: input/output  
IrDA: Infrared Data Association  
IRQ: interrupt request  
KB: kilobyte  
LAN: local area network  
LCD: liquid crystal display  
LED: light emitting diode  
MB: megabyte  
MMC: multi media card  
OCR: optical character recognition (reader)  
PCB: printed circuit board  
PCI: peripheral component interconnect  
RAM: random access memory  
RGB: red, green, and blue  
ROM: read only memory  
RTC: real time clock  
S/P DIF: Sony/Philips Digital Interface Format  
SDRAM: synchronous dynamic random access memory  
SLI: Scalable Link Interface  
SO-DIMM: small-outline dual in line memory module  
SSD: Solid state drive  
TFT: thin-film transistor  
UART: universal asynchronous receiver/transmitter  
USB: Universal Serial Bus  
VESA: Video Electronic Standards Association  
VGA: video graphics array  
XGA: extended graphics array  
A
adaptor: A device that provides a compatible connection between two  
units. For example, the computer's internal display adapter receives  
information from the software and translates it into images on the  
screen. An adapter can take a number of forms, from a  
microprocessor to a simple connector: An intelligent adapter (one  
that is capable of doing some processing) may also be called a  
controller.  
alphanumeric: Keyboard characters including letters, numbers and other  
symbols, such as punctuation marks or mathematical symbols.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary-2  
Glossary  
alternating current (AC): Electric current that reverses its direction of flow  
at regular intervals.  
analog signal: A signal whose characteristics such as amplitude and  
frequency vary in proportion to (are an analog of) the value to be  
transmitted. Voice communications are analog signals.  
application: A group of programs that together are used for a specific task  
such as accounting, financial planning, spreadsheets, word  
processing and games.  
ASCII: American Standard Code for Information Interchange. ASCII code is  
a set of 256 binary codes that represent the most commonly used  
letters, numbers, and symbols.  
asynchronous: Lacking regular time relationship. As applied to computer  
communications, asynchronous refers to the method of transmitting  
data that does not require a steady stream of bits to be transmitted  
at regular time intervals.  
B
backup: A copy of a file, usually on a removable disk, kept in case the  
original file is lost or damaged.  
binary: The base two number system composed of zeros and ones (off or  
on), used by most digital computers. The right-most digit of a binary  
number has a value of 1, the next a value of 2, then 4, 8, 16, and so  
on. For example, the binary number 101 has a value of 5. See also  
ASCII.  
BIOS: Basic Input/Output System. The firmware that controls data flow  
within the computer. See also firmware.  
bit: Derived from "binary digit," the basic unit of information used by the  
computer. It is either zero or one. Eight bits is one byte. See also  
byte.  
Bluetooth: A short-range radio technology designed to simplify wireless  
communication among computers, communication devices and the  
Internet.  
board: A circuit board. An internal card containing electronic components,  
called chips, which perform a specific function or increase the  
capabilities of the system.  
boot: Short for bootstrap. A program that starts or restarts the computer.  
The program reads instructions from a storage device into the  
computer’s memory.  
boot disk: See system disk.  
bootable disk: See system disk.  
bps: Bits per second. Typically used to describe the data transmission  
speed of a modem.  
buffer: The portion of the computer’s memory where data is temporarily  
stored. Buffers often compensate for differences in the rate of flow  
from one device to another.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary-3  
Glossary  
bus: An interface for transmission of signals, data or electric power.  
byte: The representation of a single character. A sequence of eight bits  
treated as a single unit; also the smallest addressable unit within the  
system.  
C
cache memory: A section of very fast memory in which frequently used  
information is duplicated for quick access. Accessing data from  
cache is faster than accessing it from the computer's main memory.  
See also L1 cache, L2 cache.  
capacity: The amount of data that can be stored on a magnetic storage  
device such as a floppy diskette or hard disk drive. It is usually  
described in terms of kilobytes (KB), where one KB = 1024 bytes,  
megabytes (MB), where one MB = 1024 KB and gigabytes (GB),  
where one GB = 1024 MB.  
CD: An individual compact disc. See also CD-ROM.  
CD-R: A Compact Disc-Recordable disc can be written once and read  
many times. See also CD-ROM.  
CD-ROM: A Compact Disc Read-Only Memory is a high capacity disc that  
can be read from but not written to. The CD-ROM drive uses a laser,  
rather than magnetic heads, to read data from the disc.  
CD-RW: A Compact Disc-ReWritable disc can be rewritten many times.  
See also CD-ROM.  
character: Any letter, number, punctuation mark, or symbol used by the  
computer. Also synonymous with byte.  
chassis: The frame containing the computer.  
chip: A small semiconductor containing computer logic and circuitry for  
processing, memory, input/output functions and controlling other  
chips.  
click: To press and release the pointing device's primary button without  
moving the pointing device. In the Windows® operating system, this  
refers to the pointing device's left button, unless otherwise stated.  
See also double-click.  
CMOS: Complementary Metal-Oxide Semiconductor. An electronic circuit  
fabricated on a silicon wafer that requires very little power.  
Integrated circuits implemented in CMOS technology can be tightly  
packaged and are highly reliable.  
cold start: Starting a computer that is currently off (turning on the power).  
COM1, COM2, COM3 and COM4: The names assigned to the serial and  
communication ports.  
commands: Instructions you enter at the terminal keyboard that direct the  
actions of the computer or its peripheral devices.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary-4  
Glossary  
compatibility: 1) The ability of one computer to accept and process data in  
the same manner as another computer without modifying the data  
or the media upon which it is being transferred. 2) the ability of one  
device to connect to or communicate with another system or  
component.  
components: Elements or parts (of a system) which make up the whole  
(system).  
Composite Video (YUV): A standard video signal used to transmit images,  
e.g. from a VCR to a TV.  
computer program: A set of instructions written for a computer that enable  
it to achieve a desired result.  
computer system: A combination of hardware, software, firmware, and  
peripheral components assembled to process data into useful  
information.  
configuration: The specific components in your system (such as the  
terminal, printer, and disk drives) and the settings that define how  
your system works. You use the HW Setup program to control your  
system configuration.  
controller: Built-in hardware and software that controls the functions of a  
specific internal or peripheral device (e.g. keyboard controller).  
co-processor: A circuit built into the processor that is dedicated to  
intensive math calculations.  
CPU: Central Processing Unit. The portion of the computer that interprets  
and executes instructions.  
CRT: Cathode Ray Tube. A vacuum tube in which beams projected on a  
fluorescent screen-producing luminous spots. An example is the  
television set.  
cursor: A small, blinking rectangle or line that indicates the current position  
on the display screen.  
D
data: Information that is factual, measurable or statistical that a computer  
can process, store, or retrieve.  
data bits: A data communications parameter controlling the number of bits  
(binary digits) used to make up a byte. If data bits = 7 the computer  
can generate 128 unique characters. If data bits = 8 the computer  
can generate 256 unique characters.  
DC: Direct Current. Electric current that flows in one direction. This type of  
power is usually supplied by batteries.  
default: The parameter value automatically selected by the system when  
you or the program do not provide instructions. Also called a preset  
value.  
delete: To remove data from a disk or other data storage device.  
Synonymous with erase.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary-5  
Glossary  
device driver: A program (called a "driver") that permits a computer to  
communicate with a device.  
dialog box: A window that accepts user input to make system settings or  
record other information.  
disable: To turn a computer option off. See also enable.  
Digital Audio: An audio compression standard that enables high-quality  
transmission and real-time playback of sound files.  
disk drive: The device that randomly accesses information on a disk and  
copies it to the computer°¶s memory. It also writes data from  
memory to the disk. To accomplish these tasks, the unit physically  
rotates the disk at high speed past a read-write head.  
disk storage: Storing data on magnetic disk. Data is arranged on  
concentric tracks much like a phonograph record.  
display: A CRT, LCD, or other image producing device used to view  
computer output.  
documentation: The set of manuals and/or other instructions written for  
the users of a computer system or application. Computer system  
documentation typically includes procedural and tutorial information  
as well as system functions.  
double click: To press and release the pointing device's primary button  
rapidly twice without moving the pointing device. In the Windows®  
operating system, this refers to the pointing device's left button,  
unless otherwise stated.  
driver: A software program, generally part of the operating system, that  
controls a specific piece of hardware (frequently a peripheral device  
such as a printer or mouse).  
DVD: An individual digital versatile (or video) disc. See also DVD-ROM.  
DVB-T (Digital Video Broadcasting - Terrestrial): Also known as  
terrestrial digital TV. Digital TV broadcasting standard.  
DVD-R (+R, -R): A Digital Versatile Disc Recordable disc can be written  
once and read many times. The DVD-R drive uses a laser to read  
data from the disc.  
DVD-RAM: A Digital Versatile Disc-Random Access Memory is a  
highcapacity, high performance disc that lets you store large  
volumes of data. The DVD-RAM drive uses a laser to read data from  
the disc.  
DVD-R (Dual Layer): A disc having two layers on one side with the DVD-R  
storage capacity about 1.8 times larger than before. The DVD-RW  
drive uses a laser to read data from the disc.  
DVD-ROM: A Digital Versatile Disc-Read Only Memory is a high capacity,  
high performance disc suitable for play back of video and other  
high-density files. The DVD-ROM drive uses a laser to read data  
from the disc.  
DVD-RW (+RW, -RW): A Digital Versatile Disc-ReWritable disc can be  
rewritten many times.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary-6  
Glossary  
DVD+R (Double Layer): A disc having two layers on one side with the  
DVD+R storage capacity about 1.8 times larger than before. The  
DVD-RW drive uses a laser to read data from the disc.  
E
echo: To send back a reflection of the transmitted data to the sending  
device. You can display the information on the screen, or output it to  
the printer, or both. When a computer receives back data it  
transmitted to a CRT (or other peripheral device) and then transmits  
the data to printer, the printer is said to echo the CRT.  
enable: To turn on a computer option. See also disable.  
erase: See delete.  
escape: 1) A code (ASCII code 27), signaling the computer that what  
follows are commands; used with peripheral devices such as  
printers and modems. 2) A means of aborting the task currently in  
progress.  
escape guard time: A time before and after an escape code is sent to the  
modem which distinguishes between escapes that are part of the  
transmitted data, and escapes that are intended as a command to  
the modem.  
execute: To interpret and execute an instruction.  
F
fast infrared: An industry standard that enables cableless infrared serial  
data transfer at speeds of up to 4 Mbps.  
file: A collection of related information; a file can contain data, programs, or  
both.  
fingerprint sensor: The fingerprint sensor compares and analyzes the  
unique characteristics in a fingerprint.  
firmware: A set of instructions built into the hardware which controls and  
directs a microprocessor’s activities.  
flash memory: Non-volatile memory that can be written to as well as read.  
Information in flash memory remains whether or not the computer is  
receiving power. This type of memory is used to retain your  
fingerprint data. See also memory. Compare RAM and ROM.  
floppy diskette: A removable disk that stores magnetically encoded data.  
floppy diskette drive (FDD): An electromechanical device that reads and  
writes to floppy diskettes.  
Fn-esse: A TOSHIBA utility that lets you assign functions to hot keys.  
folder: An icon in Windows used to store documents or other folders.  
format: The process of readying a blank disk for its first use. Formatting  
establishes the structure of the disk that the operating system  
expects before it writes files or programs onto the disk.  
function keys: The keys labeled F1 through F9 that tell the computer to  
perform certain functions.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary-7  
Glossary  
G
gigabyte (GB): A unit of data storage equal to 1024 megabytes. See also  
megabyte.  
graphics: Drawings, pictures, or other images, such as charts or graphs, to  
present information.  
H
hard disk: A storage device composed of a rigid platter or platters that can  
be magnetically coded with data. Hard disks hold much more  
information than diskettes and are used for long-term storage of  
programs and data. The primary (or only) hard disk in a computer is  
usually fixed, but some computers have secondary hard disks that  
are removable. By default, the hard disk is referred to as drive C.  
hard disk drive (HDD): An electromechanical device that reads and writes  
a hard disk. See also hard disk.  
hardware: The physical electronic and mechanical components of a  
computer system: typically, the computer itself, external disk drives,  
etc. See also software and firmware.  
hertz: A unit of wave frequency that equals one cycle per second.  
host computer: The computer that controls, regulates, and transmits  
information to a device or another computer.  
hot key: The computer°¶s feature in which certain keys in combination with  
the extended function key, FN, can be used to set system  
parameters, such as speaker volume.  
HW Setup: A TOSHIBA utility that lets you set the parameters for various  
hardware components.  
I
icon: A small graphic image displayed on the screen or in the indicator  
panel. In Windows, an icon represents an object that the user can  
manipulate.  
i.LINK (IEEE1394): This port enables high-speed data transfer directly  
from external devices such as digital video cameras.  
input: The data or instructions you provide to a computer, communication  
device or other peripheral device from the keyboard or external or  
internal storage devices. The data sent (or output) by the sending  
computer is input for the receiving computer.  
instruction: Statements or commands that specify how to perform a  
particular task.  
interface: 1) Hardware and/or software components of a system used  
specifically to connect one system or device to another. 2) To  
physically connect one system or device to another to exchange  
information. 3) The point of contact between user, the computer, and  
the program, for example, the keyboard or a menu.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary-8  
Glossary  
interrupt request: A signal that gives a component access to the  
processor.  
I/O: Input/output. Refers to acceptance and transfer of data to and from a  
computer.  
I/O devices: Equipment used to communicate with the computer and  
transfer data to and from it.  
IrDA 1.1: An industry standard that enables cableless infrared serial data  
transfer at speeds of up to 4 Mbps.  
K
K: Taken from the Greek word kilo, meaning 1000; often used as equivalent  
to 1024, or 2 raised to the 10th power. See also byte and kilobyte.  
keyboard: An input device containing switches that are activated by  
manually pressing marked keys. Each keystroke activates a switch  
that transmits a specific code to the computer. For each key, the  
transmitted code is, in turn, representative of the (ASCII) character  
marked on the key.  
kilobyte (KB): A unit of data storage equal to 1024 bytes. See also byte  
and megabyte.  
L
L1 cache: Level one cache. Memory cache built into the processor to help  
improve processing speed. See also cache memory, L2 cache.  
L2 cache: Memory cache installed on the motherboard to help improve  
processing speed. It is slower than L1 cache and faster than main  
memory. See also cache memory, L1 cache.  
LAN: A group of computers or other devices dispersed over a relatively  
limited area and connected by a communications link that enables  
any device to interact with any other on the network.  
Light Emitting Diode (LED): A semiconductor device that emits light when  
a current is applied.  
Liquid Crystal Display (LCD): Liquid crystal sealed between two sheets of  
glass coated with transparent conducting material. The viewingside  
coating is etched into character forming segments with leads that  
extend to the edge of the glass. Applying a voltage between the  
glass sheets alters the brightness of the liquid crystal.  
M
main board: See motherboard.  
megabyte (MB): A unit of data storage equal to 1024 kilobytes. See also  
kilobyte.  
megahertz: A unit of wave frequency that equals 1 million cycles per  
second. See also hertz.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary-9  
Glossary  
memory: Typically refers to the computer's main memory, where programs  
are run and data is temporarily stored and processed.  
Memory can be volatile and hold data temporarily, such as RAM, or  
it can be nonvolatile and hold data permanently, such as ROM. A  
computer's main memory is RAM. See RAM, ROM.  
menu: A software interface that displays a list of options on the screen.  
Also called a screen.  
microprocessor: A hardware component contained in a single integrated  
circuit that carries out instructions. Also called the central  
processing unit (CPU), one of the main parts of the computer.  
mode: A method of operation, for example, the Shut Down Mode, Sleep  
Mode or the Hibernation Mode.  
modem: Derived from modulator/demodulator, a device that converts  
(modulates) digital data for transmission over telephone lines and  
then converts modulated data (demodulates) to digital format where  
received.  
monitor: A device that uses rows and columns of pixels to display  
alphanumeric characters or graphic images. See also CRT.  
motherboard: A name sometimes used to refer to the main printed circuit  
board in processing equipment. It usually contains integrated  
circuits that perform the processor’s basic functions and provides  
connectors for adding other boards that perform special functions.  
MP3: An audio compression standard that enables high-quality  
transmission and real-time playback of sound files.  
N
network: A collection of computers and associated devices that are  
connected by communications facilities. A network allows you to  
share data and peripheral devices, such as printers, with other  
users and to exchange electronic mail.  
non-system disk: A disk for storing programs and data that cannot be  
used to start the computer. Compare system disk.  
nonvolatile memory: Memory, usually read-only (ROM), that is capable of  
permanently storing information. Turning the computer’s power off  
does not alter data stored in nonvolatile memory.  
numeric keypad overlay: A feature that allows you to use certain keys on  
the keyboard to perform numeric entry, or to control cursor and page  
movement.  
O
OCR: Optical Character Recognition (reader). A technique or device that  
uses laser or visible light to identify characters and input them into a  
storage device.  
online state: A functional state of a peripheral device when it is ready to  
receive or transmit data.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary-10  
Glossary  
operating system: A group of programs that controls the basic operation  
of a computer. Operating system functions include interpreting  
programs, creating data files, and controlling the transmission and  
receipt (input/output) of data to and from memory and peripheral  
device.  
output: The results of a computer operation. Output commonly indicates  
data. 1) printed on paper, 2) displayed at a terminal, 3) sent through  
the serial port of internal modem, or 4) stored on some magnetic  
media.  
P
PAL: PAL (Phase Alternating Line) is the dominant video and broadcasting  
standard in Europe.  
parity: 1) The symmetrical relationship between two parameter values  
(integers) both of which are either on or off; odd or even; 0 or 1. 2) In  
serial communications, an error detection bit that is added to a  
group of data bits making the sum of the bits even or odd. Parity can  
be set to none, odd, or even.  
password: A unique string of characters used to identify a specific user.  
The computer provides various levels of password protection such  
as user and supervisor.  
PCI: Peripheral Component Interconnect. An industry standard 32-bit bus.  
peripheral: Any device, such as a printer or joystick, that is attached to the  
computer and controlled by the computer's CPU.  
Péritel: Péritel is a 21-pin connecting cable/port system that allows images  
and high-quality stereo sound (including Dolby® Pro-Logic sound  
formats) to be sent from one audio-visual device to another. It is also  
known as a "SCART connector" or "Euro connector".  
pixel: A picture element. The smallest dot that can be made on a display or  
printer. Also called a pel.  
plug and play: A capability with Windows that enables the system to  
automatically recognize connections of external devices and make  
the necessary configurations in the computer.  
pointing device: Any device, such as the TouchPad or a mouse, that  
enables you to move the cursor on the screen.  
port: The electrical connection through which the computer sends and  
receives data to and from devices or other computers.  
Power Saver: A TOSHIBA utility that lets you set the parameters for  
various power-saving functions.  
program: A set of instructions a computer can execute that enables it to  
achieve a desired result. See also application.  
prompt: A message the computer provides indicating it is ready for or  
requires information or an action from you.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary-11  
Glossary  
R
Radio frequency interference (RFI) shield: A metal shield enclosing the  
printed circuit boards of the printer or computer to prevent radio and  
TV interference. All computer equipment generates radio frequency  
signals. The FCC regulates the amount of signals a computing  
device can allow past its shielding. A Class A device is sufficient for  
office use. Class B provides a more stringent classification for home  
equipment use. TOSHIBA portable computers comply with Class B  
computing device regulations.  
Random Access Memory (RAM): Volatile memory that can be written to  
as well as read. Volatile here means that information in RAM is lost  
when you turn off your computer. This type of memory is used for  
your computer's main memory. See also memory. Compare ROM.  
resolution: A measure of the sharpness of the images that can be  
produced by a printer or displayed on a screen. For a printer,  
resolution is expressed in dots per inch (dpi). For a screen, it is  
expressed as the number of pixels available horizontally and  
vertically  
restart: Resetting a computer without turning it off (also called "warm boot",  
"soft reset" or "reboot"). See also boot.  
RGB: Red, green and blue. A device that uses three input signals, each  
activating an electron gun for a primary additive color (red, green  
and blue) or port for using such a device. See also CRT.  
RJ11: A modular telephone jack.  
RJ45: A modular LAN jack.  
Read Only Memory (ROM): Non-volatile memory that can be read but not  
written to. Non-volatile here means that information in ROM remains  
whether or not the computer is receiving power. This type of  
memory is used to store your computer's BIOS, which is essential  
instructions the computer reads when you start it up. See also  
BIOS, memory. Compare RAM.  
S
S/P DIF: A standard of digital interface for audio.  
SCSI: Small Computer System Interface is an industry standard interface  
for connection of a variety of peripheral devices.  
SD/SDHC memory card: Secure Digital cards are flash memory widely  
used in a variety of digital devices such as digital cameras and  
Personal Digital Assistants.  
SECAM L: SECAM (Sequential Color Memory) is a broadcasting standard  
used in France.  
SIO: Serial Input/Output. The electronic methodology used in serial data  
transmission.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary-12  
Glossary  
soft key: Key combinations that emulate keys on the IBM keyboard,  
change some configuration options, stop program execution, and  
access the numeric keypad overlay.  
software: The set of programs, procedures and related documentation  
associated with a computer system. Specifically refers to computer  
programs that direct and control the computer system°¶s activities.  
See also hardware.  
stop bit: One or more bits of a byte that follow the transmitted character or  
group codes in asynchronous serial communications.  
synchronous: Having a constant time interval between successive bits,  
characters or events.  
system disk: A diskette that contains the operating system files needed to  
start the computer. Any diskette can be formatted as a system disk.  
A system disk is also called a "bootable disk", "boot disk" or a  
"startup disk." Compare non-system disk.  
T
terminal: A typewriter-like keyboard and CRT display screen connected to  
the computer for data input/output.  
TFT display: A liquid crystal display (LCD) made from an array of liquid  
crystal cells using active-matrix technology with thin film transistor  
(TFT) to drive each cell.  
Touch Pad: A pointing device integrated into the TOSHIBA computer palm  
rest.  
U
USB: Universal Serial Bus. This serial interface lets you communicate with  
several devices connected in a chain to a single port on the  
computer.  
V
VGA: Video Graphics Array is an industry standard video adaptor that lets  
you run any popular software.  
volatile memory: Random access memory (RAM) that stores information  
as long as power is supplied to the computer.  
W
warm start: Restarting or resetting a computer without turning it off.  
Wi-Fi®: A registered trademark term of the Wi-Fi Alliance that stands for  
Wireless Fidelity, and is another term for the communication  
protocol to permit an Ethernet connection using wireless  
communication components.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary-13  
Glossary  
window: A portion of the screen that can display its own application,  
document or dialog box. Often used to mean a Microsoft Windows  
window.  
Wireless LAN: Local Area Network (LAN) through wireless  
communication.  
write protection: A method for protecting a floppy diskette from accidental  
erasure.  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary-14  
Index  
Cooling vents, 2-6, 2-9  
A
AC adaptor, 1-5  
D
additional, 1-20  
connecting, 3-2  
DC IN indicator, 2-12, 6-3  
Disconnecting the i.LINK (IEEE1394)  
cable, 9-21  
DC IN 19V jack, 2-6  
ASCII characters, 5-7  
Display, 1-7, 2-9  
automatic power off, 1-12  
brightness (down), 5-4  
brightness (up), 5-4  
controller, B-1  
hinge, 2-9  
opening, 3-5  
B
Battery  
charging, 6-5  
extending battery life, 6-8  
indicator, 2-12, 6-2  
Monitoring capacity, 6-7  
real time clock, 1-5, 6-4  
save mode, 1-13  
Documentation list, 1-2  
E
types, 6-3  
Equipment checklist, 1-1  
ExpressCard, 1-8, 9-2  
inserting, 9-2  
problems, 10-11  
removing, 9-3  
External monitor, 1-8, 2-6, 9-17  
problems, 10-20  
Battery Charger, 1-20, 9-13  
Battery pack, 1-4, 2-9  
additional, 9-13  
replacing, 6-9  
Bluetooth, 1-11, 4-40  
Bluetooth Stack for Windows by  
Toshiba, 1-17  
F
problems, 10-23  
Bridge media slot, 1-8, 2-3, 9-3  
indicator, 2-13  
Fingerprint Sensor  
problems, 10-16  
using, 9-3  
FN + 1 (TOSHIBA Zooming Utility  
reduce), 5-5  
C
FN + 2 (TOSHIBA Zooming Utility  
enlarge), 5-5  
FN + ENTER, 5-3  
FN + ESC (Mute), 5-3  
FN + F1 (Lock), 5-3  
Cache memory, 1-3  
Cleaning the computer, 4-44  
Connecting the i.LINK (IEEE1394)  
cable, 9-21  
User’s Manual  
Index-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Qosmio F50  
FN + F10 (Arrow mode), 5-6  
FN + F11 (Numeric mode), 5-6  
FN + F12 (ScrLock), 5-3  
FN + F2 (Power Plan), 5-3  
FN + F3 (Sleep), 5-4  
I
i.LINK, 1-8, 2-4, 9-20  
precautions, 9-20  
problems, 10-24  
Indicators  
FN + F4 (Hibernate), 5-4  
FN + F5 (Output), 5-4  
Battery, 2-12, 6-2  
DC IN, 2-12  
Hard Disk Drive, 2-13  
Power, 2-12  
FN + F6 (Brightness Down), 5-4  
FN + F7 (Brightness Up), 5-4  
FN + F8 (Wireless), 5-4  
FN + F9 (Touch Pad), 5-4  
FN + space (Zoom), 5-5  
Front operation panel, 8-2  
Function keys, 5-2  
Infrared receiver window, 1-10, 2-5  
problems, 10-13  
K
Keyboard, 1-7, 5-1  
emulating keys on enhanced, 5-2  
FN Sticky key, 5-5  
Function keys F1 ... F12, 5-2  
Hot keys, 5-3  
G
Graphics controller, 1-7  
H
problems, 10-7  
Hard disk drive  
automatic power off, 1-12  
HDMI, 9-18  
Typewriter keys, 5-1  
Windows special keys, 5-5  
Keypad overlay, 1-13, 5-6  
arrow mode, 5-6  
Heat dispersal, 1-13  
Hibernation Mode, 1-14  
Hot keys, 1-12  
Brightness (Down), 5-4  
Brightness (Up), 5-4  
Hibernate, 5-4  
Lock, 5-3  
numeric mode, 5-6  
temporarily using normal keyboard  
(overlay on), 5-7  
temporarily using overlay (overlay  
off), 5-7  
turning on the overlays, 5-6  
Mute, 5-3  
Output, 5-4  
Power Plan, 5-3  
Sleep, 5-4  
L
LAN, 1-11, 4-42  
active indicator, 2-7  
cable types, 4-43  
connecting, 4-43  
disconnecting, 4-44  
jack, 2-6  
TOSHIBA Zooming Utility  
(enlarge), 5-5  
TOSHIBA Zooming Utility  
(reduce), 5-5  
Touch Pad, 5-4  
Wireless, 5-4  
Zoom, 5-5  
Link indicator, 2-7  
problems, 10-22  
M
HW Setup  
accessing, 7-1  
general, 7-1  
Media care, 4-30  
CD/DVDs, 4-30  
User’s Manual  
Index-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Qosmio F50  
floppy diskettes, 4-31  
Memory, 1-4  
ExpressCard, 10-11  
External monitor, 10-20  
expansion, 1-20  
installing, 9-10  
removing, 9-12  
Fingerprint Sensor, 10-16  
Hard disk drive, 10-8  
Hardware and system checklist,  
10-3  
HDMI Monitor, 10-23  
i.LINK (IEEE1394) device, 10-24  
Infrared receiver window, 10-13  
Internal display panel, 10-8  
Keyboard, 10-7  
Modem, 1-11, 4-35  
connecting, 4-38  
disconnecting, 4-38  
jack, 2-7  
problems, 10-21  
properties menu, 4-37  
region selection, 4-36  
Moving the computer, 4-45  
MultiMediaCard  
LAN, 10-22  
Memory Stick/Memory Stick PRO/  
Memory Stick PRO Duo, 10-12  
Modem, 10-21  
problems, 10-13  
MultiMediaCard, 10-13  
Overheating power down, 10-5  
Password, 10-7  
Pointing device, 10-13  
Power, 10-4  
SD/SDHC memory card, miniSD/  
microSD Card, 10-11  
Self test, 10-4  
Sound system, 10-19  
System start-up, 10-4  
TOSHIBA support, 10-25  
Touch Pad, 10-13  
USB device, 10-16  
USB floppy diskette drive, 10-10  
USB mouse, 10-15  
USB Sleep and Charge, 10-7  
Video Playback, 10-24  
Wireless LAN, 10-23  
xD picture card, 10-12  
P
Password  
power on, 1-13  
problems, 10-7  
user, 6-11  
Pointing device  
Touch Pad, 2-10, 4-1  
Touch Pad control buttons, 4-1  
Ports, 1-8  
External monitor, 1-8  
i.LINK, 1-8  
USB, 1-8  
Power  
conditions, 6-1  
Hibernation Mode, 3-10  
indicator, 6-3  
panel power on/off, 6-13  
Shut Down mode (Boot Mode), 3-7  
Sleep Mode, 3-8  
system auto off, 6-13  
turning off, 3-7  
Processor, 1-3  
Q
turning on, 3-6  
QosmioEngine, 8-20  
Problems  
R
AC power, 10-5  
Analyzing the problem, 10-2  
Battery, 10-6  
Recovery Discs, 3-14  
Recovery hard disk drive, 3-14  
Remote Controller, 8-5  
Bluetooth, 10-23  
User’s Manual  
Index-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Qosmio F50  
Restarting the computer, 3-11  
V
Video modes, B-1  
Video RAM, 1-4  
Volume control dial, 2-12  
S
SD/SDHC memory card, miniSD/  
microSD Card  
problems, 10-11  
Security lock  
attaching, 9-22  
Sleep Mode, 1-14  
setting, 3-8  
W
Web Camera, 1-9  
Wireless communication, 4-39  
indicator, 4-42  
Wireless communication switch, 1-12,  
2-2, 4-41  
Wireless LAN, 1-11, 4-39  
problems, 10-23  
System automatic, 1-13  
Soft keys  
emulating keys on enhanced  
keyboard, 5-2  
X
ENTER, 5-3  
ScrLock, 5-3  
xD picture card  
problems, 10-12  
Sound system, 1-9, 4-33  
headphone jack, 1-9, 2-4  
microphone, 2-12  
microphone jack, 1-9, 2-4  
Stereo speakers, 2-10  
Volume control dial, 2-12  
T
TOSHIBA Assist, 1-17  
TOSHIBA ConfigFree, 1-17  
TOSHIBA Disc Creator, 1-18, 4-23  
TOSHIBA PC Diagnostic Tool, 1-14  
TOSHIBA support, 10-25  
TOSHIBA Zooming Utility, 1-14  
Touch Pad, 1-7  
using, 4-1  
TV Tuner, 1-10, 4-32  
U
USB device, 1-8  
problems, 10-16  
USB floppy diskette drive, 9-14  
problems, 10-10  
using, 9-15  
User’s Manual  
Index-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Technics Stereo Receiver RQT5087 Y User Manual
Telex Speaker PST 170 User Manual
Timex Watch W 15 US User Manual
Toshiba Network Card AD368 User Manual
Toshiba Printer DRJST 51 User Manual
Uniden Cordless Telephone DX14560 Series DX14561 Series User Manual
Uniden Scanner UBC220XLT User Manual
Vermont Casting Gas Grill VCS3505BI User Manual
ViewSonic Car Video System VG2230wm User Manual
ViewSonic Personal Computer VS13727 User Manual